Home

Sharp AR-M207 Owner's Manual

1. Horizontal Landscape orientation Conventions used in this manual Warns the user that injury may result if the contents of the warning are not properly followed Cautions the user that damage to the machine or one of its components may result if the contents of the caution are not properly followed 2 Notes provide information relevant to the machine regarding specifications functions performance operation and such that may be useful to the user This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the RSPF and the single pass feeder as the SPF Unless specific mention is made both the RSPF and the SPF are referred to simply as SPF MAIN FEATURES High speed laser copying e First copy time at 300 dpi is only 7 2 seconds Copying speed is 20 AR M207 or 16 AR M162 copies per minute This provides a big boost to workplace productivity 1 Measured after the machine has warmed up following power on copying using the document glass 8 1 2 x 11 A4 paper fed from machine tray 1 The first copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature and power voltage 2 dpi dots per inch is a unit that is used to measure resolution Resolution indicates how much detail can be reproduced in a printed or scanned image High quality digital image High quality copying at
2. 42 Stream feeding 46 84 T Toner cartridge ii diris 13 35 Toner cartridge lock release lever 13 35 Toner cartridge replacement required icon 28 12 Tray 12 12 Troubleshooting Machine copying problems 25 Troubleshooting and maintenance 24 Two sided copies using the bypass tray 61 Two sided copying esee 56 U USB 1 1 port 1 12 USB 2 0 port 2 12 2 ZOOTTI 52 ZOOM Key Legen 15 INDEX BY PURPOSE Convenient copy functions 2 ini T 4 in Copy iate pedis 66 ide ence eic os 71 Eraso CODY EE 69 Margiti Shift itane rds 68 Rotation COPY iion ee ceiesett 64 S rt MOJE tintin tnde aper 64 Copying Automatic ratio selection 52 Dual page copy 62 Interrupt 63 Making copy darker or 48 Manual ratio selection preset copy
3. REDIALLING The machine retains the last fax or phone number 5 oS dialled This number can be redialled by simply SPEAKER REDIAUIPAUSE SPEED 0123456789 pressing the REDIAL key and then the START C as 3 e MANUAL amp AUTO f you pressed a numeric key during the previous call STANDARD the REDIAL key may not dial the correct number The last number dialled is e Redialling is not possible to broadcast transmission displayed page 32 serial polling page 38 timer transmission page 34 group dialling page 20 or F code transmission page 55 destinations ON HOOK DIALLING This feature allows you to dial without lifting an ENTER DIAL extension phone connected to the machine Press the 9 SPEAKER key listen for the dial tone through the QMANUAL amp AUTO speaker and then dial If a person answers lift the extension phone to STANDARD answer You can only speak to the other party if an extension phone is connected to the machine e Faxes must be sent manually when using on hook dialling Page 24 e On hook dialling is not possible using a Rapid key that includes a sub address and passcode or a group dial key A combined total of 50 Rapid dial and group dial keys be stored and 300 speed dial destinations
4. e Original A original A 5 sl Copy of Original A original A Bg Place original B as shown below Vertically oriented original If the original is oriented vertically place it in the same orientation as original A S Original B Horizontally oriented original Place in the opposite orientation rotated 180 CJ jg degrees to that of Original B original A d a Insert the paper all the way in bos J Copy of Original B original A aj Copy of original A Copies made on the back side of paper should always be made one sheet at a time using the bypass tray Straighten curled or wavy paper before using it Curled paper may cause misfeeds creases or a poor quality image Select the bypass tray with the PAPER key and then press the START key The copies are delivered to the center tray 61 DUAL PAGE COPY Dual page copy The dual page copy function produces separate copies of open bound original pages This function is convenient when you wish to make a separate copy of each page of a book or other bound document Original 2in1 4
5. a 25 Power is on but copying is 22 11011000 25 Copies are too dark or too 25 Textis not clear in a Copys nena petet ee nei eden teer n c 25 tee e t eet p ve e 25 The paper size used for the copy is different from the selected paper size part of the image is cut off or too much of the page is blank ccccececeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeececeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseaeeeseaeeesceaeesecaeeeecaeeeeseieeeeenneeeees 26 Wrinkles appear in the paper or the image disappears in 26 Paper Misteed c DE 26 The original size is not automatically selected or the copy is not made on paper that matches the size ofthe original et 27 Copies are smu dged or dirty de b de RR ru tet te dei ndis 27 White or black lines appear on 27 tray s paper size setting cannot be inneren nnns 27 copy job stops before it is finished 27 Scanning of the original stops before it is eee 27 A lightin the room TlICKets
6. N Llp Printing X C Border R 00 Order I Right and Down v N Up Left to Right Right to Left un 134 4 3 N Up Right and Down Down and Right Left and Down Down and Left IE IB 21 31 34 24 43 42 If you select the Border checkbox borderlines will be printed around each page 4 Up 2 Examples for 2 Up 4 Up are shown here The order of 6 Up 8 Up 9 Up 16 Up is the same as 4 Up The order can be viewed in the print image in the printer driver setup screen t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 7 10 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER The printer driver can adjust the size of the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine Follow the steps shown below to use this function The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a ledger or size document on letter or A4 size paper To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 2 The Fit To Paper Size setting is available when N Up Printing is selected t PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE page 10 Click the Paper tab in the printer 4 Select the size of the paper Letter driver setup screen A4 that is loaded in the machine from Fit to Paper Size Select the original size Ledger or A3 The size of the print image will be automatically of the print image in Paper Size adjust
7. The screen will change to the detailed status The icon turns red when printing is not screen f Note possible due to a machine error or other m SHAKE AR X XXxX problem Puppies HIT Toner 0 To return to the abbreviated status screen click the Hide detail button By default the abbreviated status screen appears when SHARP AR XXXX Status is selected in Step 1 If desired you can change the setting to have the detailed status screen initially appear t CHANGING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR SETTINGS page 15 16 3 PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH This chapter explains the procedures for printing from a Macintosh environment BASIC PRINTING To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N must be installed and the machine must be connected to a network To install the PPD file and configure the printer driver settings see 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS in the Software setup guide Before printing make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine Paper that can be used and the procedures for loading paper are the same as for copying See the Operation manual for general information and copier 1 Make sure that the ONLINE indicator 4 Make sure that the correct printer is on the operation panel is lit selected If the ONLINE indicator is not on press the PRINT key to swi
8. A This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is Subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause 2 harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference 4 received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING Y FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment gener ates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the operation manual may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with standard NOTICE for users in the USA BE SURE TO ASK YOUR AUTHORIZED SHARP DEALER ABOUT THE WAR RANTY THAT YOUR SELLING DEALER EXTENDS TO YOU In order to assure you the end user of
9. Gata i te teh es agen wren 27 INDICATORS AND DISPLAY 28 REMOVING MISFEEDS uuu u nuu n nnmnnn nn 29 REPLACING THE TONER 35 CHECKING THE TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT 36 CLEANING THE MACHINE 5 2252 cca 37 ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST 39 24 TROUBLESHOOTING MACHINE COPYING PROBLEMS Check the following troubleshooting list before requesting service as many problems can be fixed by the user If you are unable to solve the problem by checking the list turn off the power switch unplug the power cord Problems related to general use of the machine and copying are described below If a problem occurs in printer or scanner mode see the Operation manual for printer and scanner If a problem occurs in fax mode see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit If the message Call for service appears in the display turn off the power switch wait about 10 seconds and then turn the power switch back on If the message still appears after switching the power on and off several times a failure may have occurred In this case promptly unplug the power cord and contact your dealer No
10. 42 I 5 Part 2 Copier Operation 4 copy Functions NORMAL COPYING entente 45 MAKING A COPY DARKER OR LIGHTER 48 SELECTING THE 49 SETTING THE NUMBER OF COPIES 49 SELECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE 50 USING THE BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL 51 REDUCING OR ENLARGING A COPY 52 AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION 52 MANUAL RATIO SELECTION PRESET COPY PATIOS se ad 52 SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY XY zoom copying 54 TWO SIDED COPYING 56 TWO SIDED 56 TWO SIDED COPYING OF ONE SIDED ORIGINALS tertie een eoe 57 TWO SIDED COPIES OF TWO SIDED ORIGINALS ONLY WHEN USING THE RSPF 59 ONE SIDED COPIES OF TWO SIDED ORIGINALS ONLY WHEN USING THE 60 TWO SIDED COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY 61 DUAL PAGE COPY Dual page copy 62 INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN Interrupt copying nete eruere 63 5 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS ROTATING THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES Rotation copy 64 SORT
11. 7 Sender s 7 eee 18 Sending 8 100 Serial polling cane ath 38 Speaker volume 97 Specifications 108 SPP niodo nd dried 13 Standard sizes 14 Storing transmission jobs 24 S b address eure 48 T Timer transmission essen 34 Transaction 86 Transmission 20 GCancelling i arteries 26 Image rotation 21 4 11 25 Quick on line transmission 25 Two sided 2 4 44 22 22 Transmission 25 Transmission settings 23 Tray selection rti ect renes 104 TX RX end SOUNA 97 Type note 4 00 86 U Using an extension phone for voice calls 60 W Warning messages 2 4 2 88 INDEX BY PURPOSE Advanced transmission methods Broadcast 32 Cover sheet message function 44 Dual page 2222 11 43 Forwarding
12. Fnac Eia a Submit Job Maire eng eral Eres you have completed all of the entries click Submit The entries will be stored Storing a group of destinations Item Description Name Required Enter a name for the group up to 36 characters Initial Optional Enter initial text for the destinations maximum of 10 characters When the destination list is displayed in the destination control screen the initial text is used to group the destinations Custom Index Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired page 5 allowing convenient grouping of destinations Drop down list Select a custom index for the destination to be stored User checkbox When this is selected the destination is stored in the user tab of the address book Page 22 Address es Required Select the address of each destination from the E mail list box Programmed e mail destinations appear in each of the destination lists To select multiple destinations click each address while holding down the Ctrl key on the keyboard If you need to cancel an address that has been selected click the address again while holding down the Ctrl key If an LDAP server is being used you can click the Global Address Search button to search for an address on the LDAP server Multiple e mail addresses can be entered Separate the e mail addresses with comma semi colon space or colon
13. e Paper sizes that be used 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R BA 4 B5 B5R and A5 Automatic two sided copying is not possible when the bypass tray is used Copying from the SPF 1 Make sure that original does not 4 If you wish to have the orientation of remain on the document glass and the image on the back of the copy then adjust the original guides to the paper be opposite the orientation of width of your originals and place the the image on the front set BINDING originals face up in the document CHANGE to ON with the lt 4 or gt feeder tray key If you placed an odd number of originals the last copy will be SS COPI NODE one sided If the copies are to be bound at the top reversing the orientations of the images on the front and back sides of each copy will result in a uniform orientation when the bound copies are viewed note that this may depend on the orientation of the originals g Press the OK key You will return to the base The duplex mode selection screen appears H Select 1 to 2 with the V or A key or with the DUPLEX key SOS COPY MODE g Set the number of copies and press the START key To stop copying in the middle of a run press the C key 57 COPY FUNCTIONS Copying from the document glass Place the original for the front side of 6 Make sure that the
14. 64 COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO A SINGLE SHEET OF PAPER 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy 66 CREATING MARGINS WHEN COPYING Margin 4 21 222 22 68 ERASING SHADOWS AROUND THE EDGES OF A COPY Erase 69 CARD 71 SPECIFICATIONS 73 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET 75 INDEX H 83 CAUTIONS Follow the cautions below when using this machine CAUTIONS ON USING A Warning The fusing area is hot Exercise care in this area when removing misfed paper Do not look directly at the light source Doing so may damage your eyes Fusing unit Caution Do not switch the machine rapidly on and off After turning the machine off wait 10 to 15 seconds before turning it back on Place the machine on a firm level surface When the machine is not used for a long time for example during prolonged holidays turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet When moving the machine be sure to turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet Do not cover the machine with a dust cover cloth or plastic film while the power is on Doing so may prevent heat dissipation damaging the machine Do not make any modifications to this machine Doing so may result in pe
15. BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations To edit or delete programmed destinations click Destination in the menu frame of the Web page a Click Destination in the menu frame 3 To edit the selected destination click Edit of the Web page at the bottom of the Destinations List 2 The programming screen of the destination selected in step 2 map Management Behring shapa appears Edit the Fabre tbn See information in the same Zubmit Print Job LER wei way as you initially stored it When finished be sure to click Submit to save your changes BJ In the Destinations List click the To delete the selected destination checkbox of the destination that you click Delete at the bottom of the want to edit or delete Destinations List num LL message appears Oooo asking you to confirm the Dee deletion Click Yes to Dshangec Gra delete E 5 Destinations lap rinoo If you attempt to delete a programmed destination in the following situations a warning message will appear and deletion will not be possible The destination is included in a group If the destination is being used for a current transmission cancel the transmission or wait until it is completed and then delete the destination If the destination is include
16. H ndi and then click the name of shared printer name of server connected to machine The Printer Ports dialog box will appear mm 6 Click the Close button in the Printer sema Ports dialog box Freeda iera cee eee aam ia a ee Click the OK button in the printer at properties window 4 Select Local Port in the Available Printer Ports list and click the New Port button The Port Name dialog box will appear Hore LESSE kamanmi 14 SCAN This chapter explains how to scan from a computer connected to the machine by a USB cable and how to scan using the machine s operation panel 2 When the dual function board is installed Before using the machine in USB 2 0 High speed mode be sure to read USB2 0 MODE and System requirements for USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode in the Key operator s guide SCANNING OVERVIEW The flow chart shown below provides an overview of scanning The environment in which the machine s scanning function can be used is subject to certain limitations For more information see 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide Scanning from a Scanning from the Scanner TWAIN compliant or and Camera Wizard WIA 2 compliant application Windows XP Using the machine to begin scanning Place the o
17. As of the end of October 2004 CONTENTS Part 1 General Information PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS cc cecsscessccessecsccecscceccersecacsecsccacsecacsecacuanseceeacsarsccacseeaceaesecacsavacearseeacearaces 3 caddie dedere Adena nuance 6 CAUTIONS ON USING erwin RD EIL dS tnc Ld 6 LASER INFORMATION Gu uda occhi ct Marteka tt a Bers LIEU LLL C OE 7 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS rere 8 ENVIRONMENTAL 0 9 99 8 MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE PRODUCT s s csssscssssssccsccocscceceessccacsssaccacacsarsessceecasearsesarsecasearaees 9 MAIN EEATURES RUE 10 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT 2 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 12 TROUBLESHOOTING eere 25 OPERATION 14 MACHINE COPYING PROBLEMS 25 OPERATION IN COPY PRINT SCAN AND INDICATORS AND DISPLAY MESSAGES 28 FAX MODEB a eed o tee ch e Dae 16 S ax a 28 TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF 17 ORIGINAL MISFEED IN THE 29 o POWER ON 17 o MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY t C
18. Once you have verified that the USB port is enabled see INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE page 7 to install the MFP driver TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION The MFP driver cannot be correctly installed by Plug and Play Windows 2000 XP In Windows 2000 XP if the MFP driver cannot be correctly installed by Plug and Play for example Plug and Play takes place without copying the required files for the MFP driver installation from the installer follow these steps to remove unneeded devices To install the MFP driver see INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE page 7 Click the start button click Control Panel and then click Performance and Maintenance In Windows 2000 click the Start button select Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Click System click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button 2 Windows 2000 double click the System icon click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button Click the icon beside Other devices Gh Other devices GP AR XXXX Scanner SHARPAR XXXX If AR XXXX Scanner and SHARP AR XXXX appear select and delete both these items If Other devices does not appear close Note the Device Manager window 4 To install the driver see INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE page 7 Another printer is using the parallel port when using a parallel cable If another printer is using the para
19. 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide 15 SCANNING FROM TWAIN COMPLIANT APPLICATION The SHARP scanner driver is compatible with the TWAIN standard allowing it to be used with a variety of TWAIN compliant applications The procedure for scanning from some applications may differ in places from the procedure below For more information refer to the manual or the help file of your application Place the original s that you wish to 5 In the Scanning Position menu scan on the document glass or in the select the location where you placed SPF the original in Step 1 For information on placing an original for f you placed a one sided original in the SPF scanning see 4 COPY FUNCTIONS in the select SPF Simplex Operation manual for general information and f you placed a two sided original in the RSPF copier select SPF Duplex Book or SPF Duplex Tablet 2 Start up a Twain compliant f you selected SPF Duplex Book or application and select Select Note SPF Duplex Tablet from the Scan Scanner from the File menu Position menu select Right Edge Fed First or Leading Edge Fed First for the orientation of the original Select SHARP MFP TWAIN G and For original sizes for which two sided then click the Select button scanning is possible see HEVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS METTI FEEDER in 3 PERIPH
20. 14 46 CA Key a na ein 15 18 Card 71 12 Charger cleaner 10 1112 12 38 Checking the total output 36 Cleaning the machine Bypass tray paper feed roller 37 Document glass SPF document cover 37 Transfer charger intent tete 38 Cleaning the transfer 38 Copy 45 COPY key 14 Copy number display 14 D DATA 2 14 15 Default Settings ceret entes 18 Developer replacement required icon 28 14 16 39 Document 13 lt lt ee 37 Removing 47 Document feeder 13 Document 91455 12 45 Cleaning ERR Rita 37 Normal 45 Two sided copies of one sided originals 58 D al paga copy rte nnn 62 DUPLEX key er
21. 51 PROCEDURE FOR F CODE POLLING 53 F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION 55 F CODE TRANSMISSION F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION 55 PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX 57 5 F CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION cse 58 USING THE F CODE RELAY BROADCAST FUNCTION your machine is the relay machine 59 USING THE F CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION your machine requests a relay broadcast 59 5 CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE 60 USING AN EXTENSION PHONE 60 SETTING THE RECEPTION MODE 61 6 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING 2 62 STORING EDITING AND DELETING AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND 62 STORING EDITING AND DELETING AUTO DIAL NUMBERS RAPID KEYS SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AND GROUP KEYS 62 STORING EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS ene anelli 72 PROGRAMMING EDITING AND DELETING F CODE MEMORY 74 PROGRAMMING AN F CODE MEMORY BOX 74 PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY 81 ENTERING CHARACTERS 82 CHARACTERS THAT CAN BE ENTERED 82 CHANGING TO ENTRY MODE
22. Any number from 2 1 2 to 17 64 mm to 432 mm can be entered for the width and Select inches or AB with the lt or any number from 2 1 2 to 11 5 8 64 mm to 297 mm be entered for the length gt and then select the original The entered size is retained until the size with the V or A key power is turned off even if SIZE INPUT 2 S cy is selected again and the entry screen of step 5 is displayed Press the OK key OK You will return to the base e screen Press the START key Copying begins 51 REDUCING ENLARGING A COPY There are three ways to enlarge and reduce copies Automatic selection of a ratio according to the paper size Auto ratio selection Specifying a ratio from 2596 to 40096 Preset ratios zoom Selecting the vertical and horizontal ratios separately XY zoom When the SPF is being used the zoom copy ratio range is 5096 to 200 AUTOMATIC RATIO SELECTION 1 Place the original the document H Press the AUTO key feeder tray or on the document glass The copy ratio will be automatically set correct size does not appear see SELECTING THE f the original and paper are in different orientations ORIGINAL SIZE page 50 the image is automatically rotated to match the paper Fee agnor SSPE orientation rotation copy However if enlargement is the original size is 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 selected for
23. Set up the start up application in the Application Selection area e If the Show TWAIN setting screen when scanning checkbox is selected the setting screen will appear when scanning is executed to let you adjust the scanning conditions f an application other than FAX is selected you can select the File format of the scanned image If PDF is selected for the file format the image quality may be slightly degraded SCAN BUTTON MANAGER SETTINGS If you need to configure Button Manager settings follow the steps below For details on Button Manager settings see Button Manager Help page 24 Select scanning conditions such as Color Mode and Scanning Side in the Scan Setup area f you placed a two sided original in the RSPF select Duplex Book or Duplex Tablet as appropriate for the position of the binding on the original The name of the tab can be changed Click the Menu Name button and enter a new name After entering a name click the Apply button or OK button This also changes the scan destination name that appears on the machine Example SC1 XXXXX 2 f you selected Duplex Book or Duplex Tablet from the Scanning Side menu select Right Edge Fed First or Leading Edge Fed First for the orientation of the original For original sizes for which two sided scanning is possible see HEVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS FEEDER in 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES A
24. The original is smaller than 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 size Ifthe original is smaller than 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 the size cannot be detected Follow the procedure in USING THE BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL to make the copy The original is not a standard size Ifthe original is a small non standard size the size cannot be detected Manually select a size close to the original size or follow the procedure in USING THE BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL to make the copy Copies are smudged or dirty The document glass or the underside of the document cover SPF is dirty Clean these regularly The original is smudged or blotchy Use a clean original White or black lines appear on copies The scanner glass for the SPF is dirty Clean the long narrow scanning glass The transfer charger is dirty Clean the transfer charger A tray s paper size setting cannot be set The COPY indicator is off Press the COPY key to select copy mode A copy print job or received fax is being printed Setthe paper size after copying or printing is complete The machine has stopped temporarily due to a paper misfeed Remove the misfeed and then set the paper size An interrupt copy job is in progress Setthe paper size after the interrupt copy job is finished A copy job stops before it is finished The paper output tray is full
25. When the connection is complete the Web page will appear in your Web browser ABOUT THE WEB PAGE FOR USERS page 5 ABOUT THE WEB PAGE FOR USERS When you successfully connect to the Web server in the machine the following page will appear in your browser A menu frame appears on the left side of the page When you click an item in the menu a screen appears in the right frame that allows you to establish settings for that item For detailed explanations of the procedures for configuring settings click Help in the menu frame 1 2 1 AR XXXXY 2 Vitia matin 3 4 Menu frame The various settings appear in this frame Click a menu item to configure the corresponding setting System Information This shows the model name and current status of the machine Device Status This shows information on the machine s paper trays and output trays toner and other supplies and the total sheet usage count Out of paper and other warnings appear in red Device Configuration Shows what options are installed Network Status Shows general information as well as the status of TCP IP NetWare AppleTalk and NetBEUI 5 SHARE stan Information Unk Yersin Mumba 123456 256 H Locations for Currant Status Onine 3 4 Image Send Management This is the base screen for storing editing and deleting destination inform
26. transmission to programmed transfer destination 5 Printing 4 S 2 2 All received faxes are forwarded a particular fax cannot be selected for forwarding A fax received to confidential box see F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION on page 55 cannot be forwarded Faxes that have been received to memory by the fax print hold function page 30 are also forwarded The result of forwarding is indicated in the activity report see VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY REPORT AT REGULAR INTERVALS Communication activity report on page 88 Transfer destination USING THE FORWARDING FUNCTION Programming the fax number of the forwarding destination The number of the forwarding destination is programmed in the key operator programs see RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET on page 105 Only one fax number can be programmed The forwarding function cannot be used unless a number is programmed Forwarding received faxes Make sure that the machine is fax 2 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key mode When the machine is in fax mode the FAX indicator is NO Press the SPECIAL lit If the light is not on press the FAX key La M st FUNCTION key to display the i i special function menu 46 Select RX DATA TRANSFER with the V or A key SPECIAL FUNCTION PRINT RX DATA TRANSFER wow amp 12345678901234 12345678901234 123456789012 To cancel forwarding sel
27. 480 12 46 Own number 42 Polling function Renee 37 Polling memory 39 a ore rcu Rmo T 45 Timer 2000 0 122 34 Entering characters Alphabetical 84 N mb 6rS i edente Hadr et ect i heel 84 Special 85 Symbols Re utri enun 84 Faxes sending and receiving Cancelling a fax transmission 26 Dialling methods Group dialling see 16 dialling eee 16 Rapid 00 0101 16 enn 16 Speed dialling sees 16 Receiving faxes Activating fax reception from an extension phone 61 Basic procedure for receiving faxes 28 Sending faxes Basic procedure for sending faxes 18 Faxing a two sided original 22 Placing the 2 2 13 Preparations Connecting to the telephone 4 Program the sender s 96 Program the sender s 96 Set the date and 99 Printing
28. 6 7 8 12 14 USB 2 0 port USB 2 when the dual function board is installed Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer and scanner functions USB 1 1 port USB 1 Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer and scanner functions Parallel port Connect to your computer to this port to use the printer function Charger cleaner Use to clean the transfer charger Glass cleaner Use to clean the original scanning glass Document glass Place an original that you wish to scan face down here Page 45 Handles Use to move the machine Power switch Press to turn the machine power on and off 15 18 19 20 9 Center tray Copies and printed pages are output to this tray 10 Top tray when the job separator tray kit is installed Received faxes when the fax option is installed and print jobs are delivered to this tray 11 Operation panel Contains operation keys and indicator lights 12 Front cover Open to remove paper misfeeds or replace the toner cartridge 13 Tray 1 Tray 1 can hold approximately 250 sheets of copy paper 20 Ibs 80 g m For restrictions on paper types and weights see PAPER page 18 14 Tray 2 Tray 2 can hold approximately 250 sheets of copy paper 20 Ibs 80 g m For restrictions on paper types and weights see PAPER page 18 23 24 28 27 22 15 Document cover when in
29. 9 ORIG SIZE ENTER 121 PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear The XY zoom screen will appear ready for selection of Press the OK key the X horizontal ratio Set the horizontal ratio with the V A lt 4 or gt keys C A preset ratio can be selected with the W or A keys The O ratio can be adjusted in increments of 1 with the 44 The special modes or gt keys screen will appear 54 7 Press the key The vertical ratio can now be selected Set the vertical ratio with the V A 4 or gt keys O A preset ratio can be selected with the W or A keys The ratio can be adjusted in increments of 1 with the 44 or gt keys To change the copy ratio in the horizontal direction again press the key 9 Press the OK key OK e You will return to the base Screen Make sure that the desired paper tray is selected If the auto paper select function has been enabled the appropriate copy paper size will be automatically selected based on the original size and the selected copy ratios Image rotation will take place if necessary COPY FUNCTIONS itl Select any other copy settings as needed and press the START key If the ZOOM key is pressed when XY zoom ratios are set the following screen appears To cancel the XY zo
30. If the dual function board is installed the f Note AR XXxx EB printer driver and scanner driver will be installed This completes the installation If you installed the MFP Driver see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to configure the printer driver settings e f you installed Button Manager see SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER page 18 to set up Button Manager 13 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE INSTALLATION METHOD 4 Use this procedure to install the software in the following environments 1 The printer is connected by parallel cable 2 Windows version Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Note install this software you must have administrator s rights Make sure that the parallel cable is not Installation of the MFP driver printer connected to the machine and your driver begins if MFP Driver was computer before proceeding selected in Step 5 If the cable is connected a Plug and Play window Follow the on screen instructions If you are using will appear If this happens click the Cancel Windows 95 NT 4 0 go to step 10 button to close the window and disconnect the cable 8 When you are asked how the printer is connected select Connected to this The cable will be connected in step 17 computer and click the Next button BJ Insert the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine into your computer s CD RO
31. OPERATION MANUAL for network scanner SHARP SHARP CORPORATION ARNB3 EN1 SCANNER SHARP NETWORK EXPANSION KIT OPERATION MANUAL for network printer e INTRODUCTION 1 QONTERNTS ipiis ERE Pa Rd kan 2 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS 3 e PRINTER UTILITIES WINDOWS 14 e PRINTING FROM A MACINTOSH 17 e WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE 20 e KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 31 TROUBLESHOOTING 34 SPECIFICATIONS 38 INTRODUCTION The optional network expansion kit AR NB3 enables the machine to be used as a network printer To use the machine as a PS printer the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N must be purchased and the product key password must be entered in Product Key Setting in the Web page for the administrator Please consult your dealer for the product key to be entered Note This manual only explains the network printer function that can be used when the optional network expansion kit is installed For information on copier functions adding paper and toner removing misfeeds using peripheral equipment and other general information please refer to Operation manual for general information and copier that accompanies the machine For information on the network scanner function please refer to the Operation manual for network scanner in the network expansion kit AR NB3 For information on installing the drivers and software c
32. TX RX RESERVE 1 5 e name of the destination appears i P XXX NO XX E C Transmission method name In the case of a timer transmission the timer icon appears at the beginning Press the WV or A key until the transmission job that of the transmission method name you wish to cancel appears D Number of pages stored In the case of a stored transmission job the document number assigned at the Press the C key time of scanning appears E In the case of a timer transmission the timer job number appears Job cancelled F In the case of a timer transmission the The first stored transmission job appears YES timer job number appears Prepared will appear for a stored transmission job Status of completed jobs To check the status of completed jobs select COMPLETED in step 2 and press the OK key in step 3 The transmission cancel confirmation screen appears 27 RECEIVING FAXES When another fax machine sends a fax to your machine your machine will ring automatically receive the fax and begin printing This is called automatic reception If you do not wish to have received faxes printed immediately use the print hold function to hold received faxes in memory for printing at your convenience all received faxes will be printed at once To enable this function and print received faxes see FAX PRINT HOLD FUNCTION on page 30 2 You can store a transmissi
33. WXYZ DOG 6 G READ END wn o wn V 5 10 al v N MW OD A o a N gt g c o z x z m w x lt O O TF S v z 0 o gt x clol z x w lt N h k n o w X yz QG xicio l5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 e _ amp gt 2 To enter two characters in succession that require the same key press the p gt key to move the cursor after entering the first character Example Entering ab when directly entering an e mail address Press the 2 key once press the p gt key once to move the cursor and then press the 2 key twice 31 3 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs allow the administrator of the machine key operator to enable and disable functions to suit the needs of the workplace This chapter explains the key operator programs for the network scanner functions For key operator programs for general use of the machine see the Key operator s guide To access the key operator programs the key operator code must be entered For the initial key operator code set at the factory see PROGRAMMING A KEY OPERATOR CODE in the Key operator s guide KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST The key operator programs for the network and printer functions are shown in the following table
34. Configuring SMTP and DNS server settings Click Services in the menu frame to display the services setup screen Select the desired server and then configure the required parameters for that server Configuring LDAP server settings Click LDAP in the menu frame to display the LDAP setup screen Configure the required parameters If you need to configure advanced settings for the SMTP DNS and LDAP servers follow the procedures below ote 13 BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE Passwords The settings and information programmed in the Web page can be protected by establishing passwords click Passwords in the menu frame The administrator must change the factory default password to a new password The administrator should also take care to remember the new password From now on the new password must be entered each time you wish to configure settings in the Web pages A password can be set for the administrator and users Passwords in the menu frame Enter passwords User Password and Admin Password Darica Stup A maximum of 7 characters and or numbers nfumatian be entered for each password passwords mue are case sensitive settings Be sure to enter the same password in Oonrator Programs Confirm Password as you did in New Custom Links Password 4 5 you have completed all entries Enter the current pas
35. It is recommended that you enable and disable fax print hold as needed for your conditions of use for example enable fax print hold during the night and disable it during the day When fax print hold is enabled and received faxes are held in memory the DATA indicator above the FAX key on the operation panel blinks and a message appears in the display When the received faxes are printed the indicator stops blinking and the message no longer appears e f the remaining free memory reaches 0 fax reception will no longer be possible For this reason it is important to constantly make sure that sufficient free memory remains and frequently print received faxes The percentage of free memory remaining appears in the base screen of fax mode Page 10 Enabling fax print hold 2 If fax print hold is prohibited using DISABLE FAX PRINT HOLD page 100 the key operator programs it will not be possible to enable it In Fax mode press the SPECIAL H Press the OK key FUNCTION key Begin the following procedure from the base screen of Fax mode Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key to display the special function menu To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 Select SETTING with the V or A key 2 Select FAX PRINT HOLD with the V or A key SS FAX PRINT HOLD PRINT HOLD DATA SPECIAL FUNCTION SETTING FAX PRINT HOLD TIMER MODE SENDING OPTIONS g Press the
36. settings and then when printing specify a tray In Windows 95 98 Me click the Setup other than Auto Select in Paper Source in the tab Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen Click the OK button in the Set Tray Status window Click the OK button in the printer properties window INSTALLING ACROBAT READER To view the Online Manual Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer If you do not have Acrobat Reader follow the steps below to install it Windows environment Macintosh environment Hr Insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM Insert the network expansion kit drive Software CD ROM 1 into your computer s CD ROM drive 2 Click the Start button click My Computer and then double click 2 Double click the CD ROM icon the CD ROM icon on the desktop In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click My Computer and then double click the Double click the Acrobat Reader CD ROM icon folder and then double click the English folder H Double click the Acrobat folder and then double click 500 4 Double click the Reader Installer icon Follow the on screen instructions to install Acrobat Reader crotat nee Follow the on screen instructions to install the Acrobat Reader 42 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS There are several settings where the IP address must be entered or checked To check the IP address of the machine hold do
37. 2 1 4 in 1 copy cannot be used in combination with the following functions The function selected first will take precedence However 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy will take precedence over XY zoom Dual page copy XY zoom edge erase margin shift card shot e A special paper size cannot be used for 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy 2in1 4in 1 cannot be selected for an interrupt copy job Interrupt copying is not possible during a 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy job An appropriate ratio setting will be automatically selected based on the original size the paper size and the selected number of images When using the document glass reduction is possible to 25 When using the SPF reduction is possible to 5096 Certain combinations of original size paper size and number of images may result in images being cut off Even if Rotation copy is disabled in the key operator programs the images may be rotated if needed depending on the orientation of the originals and the orientation of the paper Place the originals in the document H Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key feeder tray or the first original on the SPECIAL FUNCTION document glass ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear Press the PAPER key to select the g desired paper tray 4 Press the OK key The bypass tray cannot be EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO selected TION ADDRESS BROADG AN COLORIIODE Tm
38. 2 The settings can be changed in the key operator programs See RING TIMEOUT IN AUTO TX page 103 and RECALL SET ERR page 102 Image rotation The machine is initially set to rotate a vertically placed document 90 so that it is oriented horizontally 101 before transmission A4 8 1 2 x 11 originals are rotated to 8 1 2 x 11 R and A5R originals are rotated to 5 A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R originals and A5 originals are not rotated If desired you can disable the rotation function in the key operator programs as explained on ROTATE TX page 100 the ORIGINAL SIZE key and specify the correct original size select A5R See MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE on page 14 Place A5 size originals so that they are oriented vertically If oriented horizontally WJA5R orientation press ote 25 BASIC OPERATIONS CANCELLING A FAX TRANSMISSION To cancel a transmission that is in progress or a stored transmission job follow the steps below A transmission in progress or a stored transmission job is cancelled from the fax status screen Printing of a received fax cannot be cancelled 2 To cancel a transmission while the original is being scanned READING appears the message display or before the key is pressed IREAD END key when scanning the original from the document glass the C or CA key can be pressed Cancelling a fax transmission Press the F
39. 82 CHARACTER ENTRY 83 INITIAL PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING CHARAGTERS niin 84 7 TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED 86 INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE TYPE NOTE COLUMN 86 VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY REPORT AT REGULAR INTERVALS Communication activity report m 88 WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED 88 SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION 89 MESSAGES DURING NORMAL OPERATION 89 PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS 90 8 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST 92 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM MENU 93 PROCEDURE FOR USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 94 INITIAL 94 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE FAX FUNGCTION 2 ecce ree etre eee nk 95 LIST PRINT SET eie tents 95 INITIAL SETTING 96 SENDING FUNCTION 100 103 POLLING SECURITY 107 SPECIFICATIONS e ene 108 0 ERE 109 TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS A FACSIMILE Several points must be kept in mind when u
40. Copying stops temporarily during a copy each time 250 sheets 150 sheets when job separator tray kit is installed are output Remove the copies from the tray and press the OK key to resume copying The tray is out of paper Load paper Scanning of the original stops before it is completed The display shows Memory is full See INDICATORS AND DISPLAY MESSAGES A light in the room flickers The same outlet is being used for the light and the machine Connect the machine to a dedicated power outlet which is not shared with other electric appliances 27 INDICATORS AND DISPLAY MESSAGES If one of the following messages appears in the display take prompt action as instructed by the message Message Action Maintenance icon It is time for regular maintenance Contact your SHARP service center 9 Developer replacement required Developer is required Contact your SHARP service center as soon as icon possible A Maintenance required Call for Maintenance required soon Contact your SHARP service center service A Call for service Turn off the power and then turn it back on If this does not clear the message write down the 2 digit main code and 2 digit sub code turn off the power and promptly contact your SHARP service center 2 Toner cartridge replacement The toner cartridge must be replaced soon required icon A
41. D Enter a 2 digit control number from 01 to 10 with the numeric keys to identify the passcode that will be entered in the next step and then press the OK key If you make a mistake move the cursor to the mistake with the lt q or gt keys and enter the correct number KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 6 Enter the passcode number up to 20 digits and then press the OK key If you make a mistake press the C key and then re enter the correct number To clear a passcode number follow these steps 1 Select DELETE in step 4 and then press the OK key 2 Enter the control number that identifies the number you wish to clear and then press the OK key 3 Select DELETE with the W or A key and then press the OK key 107 APPENDIX This chapter contains the specifications of the fax function and the index SPECIFICATIONS For information on power requirements power consumption dimensions weight and other specifications that are common to all features of the machine see SPECIFICATIONS in the Operation manual for general information and copier Applicable telephone line Public switched telephone network Compression method MH MR MMR JBIG Transmission mode Super G3 G3 this machine can only communicate with fax machines that support the G3 or Super G3 standard Scanning method Flatbed CCD Scanning resolution supports ITU T standards 8 x 8 85 line
42. INSTALLATION circo eene 7 PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 8 OPERATION 8 FAX MODE BASE SCREEN 10 AUDITING 2 222 2 1 11 ORIGINALS retener 12 ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED 12 PLACING THE ORIGINAL 13 USING THE SPF 13 USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS 18 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL etre Erba 14 MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE 14 SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE 6 15 CONVENIENT DIALLING METHODS 16 2 BASIC OPERATIONS SENDING A FAX 18 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES 18 TRANSMISSION BY AUTO DIALLING RAPID DIALLING AND GROUP DIALLING 20 SENDING A FAX BY SPEED DIALLING 20 SEARCHING FOR A PROGRAMMED DESTINATION USING THE ADDRESS 21 FAXING TWO SIDED ORIGINAL 22 CANCELLING A FAX TRANSMISSION 26 RECEIVING FAXES eene 28 RECEIVING A 28 FAX PRINT HOLD 30 N 3 ADVAN
43. et aou e ea eara toco fon tec cre p edet 12 INSTALLATION METHOD 0c 14 USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER VIA A 16 18 WINDOWS XB ea dada dd hiv ede 18 5 98 2000 55 5 dea PO us EYED 19 INSTALLATION FOR A NETWORK CONNECTION nnn nna hana aa aaa aaa usan sanas asas nenne 20 SETUP WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 6 20 21 SETTING THE IP ADDRESS OF THE 21 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE ceruice rr ra reruma cena nd ni o ca rara A oce ca raras 24 INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER STANDARD 24 e CUSTOM INSTALLATION itae a eet ew detecta Ee Lega e ra ETE a E Gea 26 USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER VIA A 7
44. expansion kit Network scanner destination information and scanning settings will remain after the network expansion kit is reset however the network settings and network printer settings will revert to the factory default settings 37 SPECIFICATIONS PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS When the dual function board is installed AR M206 AR M207 20 pages min AR M161 AR M162 AR M165 16 pages min When the dual function board is not installed 12 pages min Resolution 600 dpi 300 dpi Standard memory 64 MB Additional memory slot 1 slot an additional 128 MB or 256 MB memory module 144 SDRAM SODIMM be installed Emulation PCL5e PCL6 PS3 PostScript 3 4 PCL6 PCL5e compatible 80 outline fonts and 1 bitmap font PostScript 3 compatible 3 136 outline fonts Printing speed Network expansion kit memory 3 Installed fonts Interface 10 100Base TX network interface 1 Print speed during printing of the second sheet and following sheets when using 8 1 2 x 11 A4 plain paper and performing continuous one sided printing of the same page excluding use of offset output 2 300 dpi can only be selected when using the PCL6 or PCL5e printer driver 3 For information on machine and dual function board memory see the Operation manual for general information and copier 4 Available only if the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N is installed 2 As part of our policy of continuous impr
45. 1er 36 39 Polling passcode numbers Deleting senate tenete 107 tiene 107 Polling security tt 41 107 Power switch eer cre eet eter 4 Print passcode riaren ect cerne 75 Print Selection pe eee ettet 95 Print station in rcvd 101 Printing ACC Usage list 0 Rer its 95 Activity 4 41 2440122 81 95 GConf RX list eue e ees 81 F code confidential 57 F code public polling memory boxes 52 s Junk fax it lists u iie reete peni 95 Key ope list 2 occ 95 Mem polling 1 2 2 24 81 Public polling memory 40 nei Rex te eo 81 Transaction 86 95 Problems and 90 Programming F code confidential boxes 75 F code public polling memory boxes 77 F code relay 76 Fscode settirigs as 64 Group K6ySi a noe tea dere 67 Program S eere e etate 72 Rapid K6YS et 63 Speed dial 63 Programs
46. 2 MB 2 Error Correction Mode ECM Yes 1 Transmission speed is for 4 or 8 1 2 x 11 document with approximately 700 characters at standard resolution 8 x 3 85 lines mm sent in high speed mode 33 6 kbps JBIG or 14 4 kbps JBIG This is only the time required to transmit the image information the time required to send protocol signals is not included Actual transmission times will vary depending on the contents of the document the receiving machine type and telephone line conditions 2 Image memory can be expanded by installing the additional fax memory 8 MB Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine 108 INDEX Symbols Numbers ttof rings at iius e tr ien 104 8 1 2x11 105 Acc NAME print ei eere 101 Account BAI 98 Account Controla eei tee ete 98 Account 11 Advanced transmission methods Broadcast 32 Cover sheet message function 44 Dual page Scan eine ene 43 Forwarding function 2 4 444 22 41 46 Own number sending eene 42 Timer transmission 34 Alarm Sounds enr det 88 Anti junk fax riore ent 106 Auditing mode sse 11 Auto cover 2 2442 2 4 103 Auto lis
47. PPD folder the 9 folder and then PFMSetup exe 31 SETUP IN A MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Before installing the PPD file for Macintosh see HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS on page 43 to make sure your computer meets the hardware and software requirements Operating system Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 10 1 5 and 10 2 to 10 2 8 excluding 10 2 2 10 3 to 10 3 4 CPU and RAM The requirements of the operating system must be satisfied APPLETALK SETTINGS After connecting the machine to the network configure AppleTalk settings as required for your network environment To configure the settings see the online manual on the Network Utilities CD ROM INSTALLING THE PPD FILE In order to print from a Macintosh the PPD file must be installed Follow the steps below to install the PPD file INSTALLATION IN MAC OS X 1 Insert the network expansion kit Double click the folder of the Software CD ROM 1 into your operating system version you are computer s CD ROM drive using In Mac OS X v10 1 5 double click the Version 2 Double click the CD ROM icon 10 1 folder on the desktop e In Mac OS X v10 2 to 10 2 8 excluding 10 2 2 double click the Version 10 2 folder eInM X v10 10 3 4 le click th H Double click the MacOSX folder 5 Double click the AR NB3 1 icon f the Authenticate window appears enter the password and clic
48. XYZ SP REDIALPAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING Cx SPACEL PROGRAMMING Select DELETE with the V or A key 3 DETATL 2 If you select NO DELETE you can press the key to check the destination name If you are deleting the destination check the destination name and then delete the destination Press the OK key You will return to the screen of step 2 If you wish to delete another Rapid key or Speed Dial number repeat steps 2 to 4 To exit press the BACK key Editing and deleting group keys To edit or delete a group key follow steps 1 through 6 on pages 62 to 63 and then follow the steps below A group key cannot be edited or deleted in Note following cases The group key is stored in a program or F code relay group e Editing a group key Select GROUP with the V or A key 69 PROGRAMMING H Select CHANGE with the V or A 9 Edit the stored information key O add a Rapid key or Speed Dial number enter the gt Rapid key 01 to 50 or Speed Dial number that you wish to add A key or number that is already in the group cannot be added Press the OK key To delete a Rapid key or Speed Dial number select e it with the 4 or gt key and press the C key ENTER RX STATION V 012345678 g Press the group key
49. folds or creases well before placing Transparencies tracing paper other transparent or translucent paper and photographs Carbon paper thermal paper Originals that are creased folded or torn Glued originals cut out originals Originals with binder holes Originals printed using an ink ribbon thermal transfer printing originals on thermal transfer paper Points concerning the position of the printed copy image Even if the same original is copied onto the same type of paper differences in the original size scanning location document glass or document feeder tray selected paper tray enlargement reduction ratio and other conditions may cause the position of the printed copy image on the paper to vary As shown in the following example when an original smaller than the paper size for example 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 original and 11 x 17 paper is copied from the document glass the position of the printed copy image on the paper is different when paper from tray 1 is used 1 and paper from the bypass tray is used 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 copy image 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 copy image 11 x 17 paper 47 COPY FUNCTIONS MAKING A COPY DARKER OR LIGHTER The copy exposure be adjusted as needed to the original Three exposure modes are available AUTO TEXT and PHOTO When TEXT or PHOTO is selected the ex
50. rpm e rosas eee ee 95 Programmed information settings 81 Report MEE 81 Programming settings Deleting F code confidential boxes 78 F code public polling memory boxes 80 F code relay 79 Group redde deuten et edd 71 Programs ioo he mentre bes 73 Rapid Keys uem oett 69 Speed Dial 69 Editing F code confidential boxes 78 F code public polling memory boxes 80 F code relay 79 Group 0 erinnert tati ees 69 PIOgfams iege ettet ti erede 73 Bapid K6yS iu neue 68 Speed Dial 68 Expos re setting eee eee 15 Original scanning size 22 2 14 Programming F code confidential boxes 75 F code public polling memory boxes 77 F code relay 76 F code settings n siepe tetti 64 Grop Keys 2 ret iet t RR 67 Programs retenir te eren ret tee 72 gt Rapid Key 63 63 Resolution 0 4
51. the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear 1 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key B Press the OK key SPECIAL FUNCTION uut OK You will return to the base screen and the selected original size will appear in the original ORIG SIZE ENTER size display PAPER SIZE SET y DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear D ORIG SIZE ENTER from the menu with the V or A key 9 9 SPECIAL FUNCTION g Select the original size with the V or SPECIAL MODES A key ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET SS y DISPLAY CONTRAST To return to selection of inch original sizes press the 4 key to return to step 4 7 Press the OK key 84x14 OK You will return to the base screen and the selected original size will appear in the original size display Select the original size with the V or MA To cancel an original size selection press the CA key ORIG SIZE ENTER The original size selection screen will appear Q v 84X11 The selected original size is highlighted To select an AB original size press the key and go to step 6 f you selected SIZE INPUT follow steps 4 through 6 of the procedure in USING THE BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL page 51 to set the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the original 50 COPY FUNCTIONS USING THE
52. 400x400 600x600 dpi Interface LAN connection 10Base T 100Base TX Network protocol NetWare NetBEUI EtherTalk TCP IP SMTP LDAP FTP Supported client PC operating systems Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Workstation4 0 Service Pack 5 or later Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional Windows 2000 Server Windows Server 2003 File formats Remarks Two sided originals File types PDF TIFF JPEG Compression modes None G3 G4 Possible Optical resolution 600dpi File creation method One file per each 1 to 6 pages One file for all pages Scan destinations Scan to FTP Scan to Desktop Scan to E mail Management system Uses built in Web server Recommended Web browser Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows 5 1 or later Macintosh Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later Supported mail system Mail server that supports SMTP mail server that supports Number of destinations 200 maximum Utilities Sharpdesk A total of 200 destinations can be stored including E mail FTP Desktop Fax and Group destinations Among these multiple e mail addresses up to 100 can be stored as a group Note that this may reduce the maximum number of destinations normally 200 that can be stored Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine 38
53. 50 to 200 when the SPF is used Fixed preset 25 50 64 77 95 100 121 129 141 200 400 25 50 70 81 86 100 115 122 141 200 400 25 and 400 only when the SPF is used Paper feeding Two automatic feeding paper trays 250 sheets each bypass tray 100 sheets One automatic feeding paper tray 250 sheets bypass tray 100 sheets Fusing system Heat rollers Developer system Dry development Resolution Scanning 600 x 300 dpi output 600 x 600 dpi AUTO TEXT mode Scanning 600 x 600 dpi output 600 x 600 dpi PHOTO mode Gradation Scanning 256 halftones printing 2 halftones Power supply AC 120V 60 Hz 10A Power consumption Max 1 2 kW 1 Measured when copying is started after warm up following power on using the document glass Exposure set to AUTO RESOLUTION IN AUTO TEXT set to 300 dpi and WAITING COPY LAMP SETTING set to in the key operator programs Paper fed from tray 1 on machine 8 1 2 x 11 A4 original and paper oriented horizontally no reduction or enlargement 2 May vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as power voltage and humidity 73 APPENDIX Overall dimensions 23 15 64 W x 23 7 16 D 590 mm W x 595 mm D with bypass tray folded Weight Approx 66 2 Ibs 30 0 kg Approx 75 7 165 34 3 kg Not including toner cartridge
54. If you have another page to scan change pages and then press START key START CONTINUE 4 READ END When you have finished searching for the destination you will return to the following base screen Ready to scan 8AX11 84X11 Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned You can change the color mode and resolution setting as needed for each page page 27 If no action is taken for one minute the START key amp is not pressed scanning automatically ends and transmission begins When the final original page has been scanned press the READ END key LJ 2 START CONTINUE 4 READ END Using the SPF 9 Press the START key Scanning begins If scanning is completed normally the following Screen is appears briefly and then the display returns to the base screen Open the SPF and remove the document When the original is removed or any key operation is performed the display returns to the base screen 84X11 Canceling transmission To cancel the transmission while Reading appears or before the key is pressed press the C or CA key If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the SPF the machine will stop and a document misfeed will occur After the power is restored remove the misfed original as explained in REMOVING MISFEEDS in 2 TROUBLESHOOTI
55. If you make a mistake in step 4 or 5 move f Note the cursor to the mistake with the lt d or gt key and then enter the correct digit AUTO SUMMER TIME SETTING Turn on this setting to have the internal clock automatically move forward and backward at the beginning and end of Auto Summer Time The clock will move forward and backward as follows The first Sunday in April 2 00 A M 3 00 A M The last Sunday in October 2 00 A M 1 00 A M 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 99 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 3 Select AUTO SUMMER TIME SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is turned on and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is turned on the checkmark is cleared and the setting turned off DISABLE FAX PRINT HOLD This program is used to disable the fax print hold function which holds received faxes in memory instead of printing them as they are received Page 30 Normally the fax print hold function is disabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and press the OK key 3 Select DISABLE FAX PRINT HOLD with the V or key and press the OK key The setting which disables fax print hold is enabled and a checkmark appea
56. MULTI is selected all scanned images can be Press the FORMAT key combined into a single file or one file can be created for each page pages 2 to 6 FORMAI 1 You will return to the base screen and the selected format will appear in the file type and file creation method display The format selection screen appears Select the file type with the V or A key When the file type is set to JPEG the file creation method can only be set to SINGLE To open the scanned image without using the software program in the accompanied CD ROM the recipient must have a viewer program that can open the image TIN j The selected file type is ALL PAGES 1FILE highlighted format file type that was selected as explained above To set the file creation method press the lt 4 or gt If the recipient cannot open the image try key sending the image in a different format FORMAT PDF gt When SINGLE is selected a one page file is created for the scanned image 28 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION SETTING THE LIGHT SOURCE COLOR When scanning in black and white mode you can set the light source color For example if you do not wish to scan the red parts of an original set the light source color to RED will cause all colors to be scanned Select scan mode place the original step
57. Message alarm sounds Meaning of message Solution XXXXXX Line error An error prevented completion of the transaction Try the transaction again Maintenance required Call for service OK RETURN It is time for maintenance and inspection Contact your dealer Please return X original s START CONTINUE A misfeed occurred in the SPF Reload the indicated number of originals 13 amp Open TRAY xx and add xxxx paper OK RETURN A fax has been received but the paper tray does not have suitable paper Add paper LOADING PAPER in the Operation manual for general information and copier The paper tray is open Close the paper tray amp Remove paper from the output tray and press OK The upper part of the job separator is full of paper Remove the paper A job separator error occurred Press the CA key to clear the error Clear paper path A paper misfeed occurred in the output section Remove the misfed paper REMOVING MISFEEDS in the Operation manual for general information and copier Close the cover 88 A machine cover is open Close the cover Message alarm sounds Meaning of message Solution TROUBLESHOOTING Page amp Toner is low Toner is low Replace the toner cartridge REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES in the Operation manual for general in
58. Printing is disabled If CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS is enabled in the key operator programs printing will not be possible Consult the key operator Key operator s guide Problem Cause and solution TROUBLESHOOTING Page Printing does not take place DATA indicator is blinking There is no paper in the specified tray Load paper in the tray Operation manual for general information and copier FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is disabled Add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and then select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume Printing is slow Simultaneous use of two or more application software programs Start printing after quitting all unused application software programs The printed image is light and uneven The paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side of the paper Some types of paper have a front and a back side If the paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side toner will not adhere well to the paper and a good image will not be obtained The printed image is dirty You are using paper that is outside the specified size and weight range Use paper within the specified range Operation manual for general information and copier The paper is curled or damp Replace the paper During periods when the machine is not used for a long tim
59. Recycled paper 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 Invoice 8 1 2 x 11 Letter 8 1 2 X 11 R 8 1 2 x 13 Foolscap 8 1 2 x 14 Legal 11 x 17 Ledger A5 1 B5 B5R 4 A4R B4 A3 15 Ibs to 24 Ibs 2 56 g m to 90 g m2 250 sheets 20 Ibs 80 g m2 3 Load paper lower than the line on the tray Bypass tray Standard paper Recycled paper Thick paper Transparency film Labels 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Invoice to 11 x 17 Ledger A6R to 15 Ibs to 20 Ibs 56 g m to 80 g m 100 sheets 3 Max 54 Ibs 200 g m Envelopes Commercial 9 3 7 8 x 8 7 8 Commercial 10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 International DL 110 mm x 220 mm International C5 162 mm x 229 mm Load one sheet of these papers ata time to the bypass tray 5 sheets 1 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 5 can be used in tray 1 but cannot be used in other trays including trays in optional paper feeding unit 2 When making a large number of copies or prints using 24 Ibs 90 g m paper remove the output from the paper output tray when about 100 pages have been printed The output may not stack correctly if more than 100 pages are allowed to accumulate 3 The number of sheets of the paper which can be set changes with the weight of a paper The indicated numbers are for 20 lbs 80 g m2 paper 4 The trays are numbered 1 2 3 and 4 from the top Paper that can be used for automatic 2 sided printi
60. Sharp Middle East FZE i East P O Box 17115 Jebel Ali Dubai Telephone number for information 04 815311 2 COMPOSITION INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS Substance 1 Preparation X Ingredient CAS No Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK TWA NOHSC TWA Iron powder 7439 89 6 gt 90 Not listed Not listed Not listed Not listed Styrene Acrylate 29497 14 1 5 10 Not listed Not listed Not listed Not listed copolymer Carbon black 1333 86 4 lt 1 3 5mg m 3 5mg m Not listed 3mg m 79 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 2 4 Date Issued 1 2003 MSDS No F 31211 3 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products Human Health Effects There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests performed using toner When used as intended according to instructions studies do not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur Environmental Effects No data are available Specific Hazards Dust explosion like most finely divided organic powders Directive 1999 45 EC Europe Not classified as dangerous 4 FIRST AID MEASURES Route s of Entry Inhalation Skin Ingestion No No Possible but very unusual Inhalation Remove to fresh air If symptoms occur consult medical personnel Skin Contact Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed If irritation does occur consult medical personnel Eye Contact Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minute
61. The printed image is dirty You are using paper that is outside the specified size and weight range Use paper within the specified range Operation manual for general information and copier The paper is curled or damp Replace the paper During periods when the machine is not used for a long time remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a bag to prevent moisture absorption Operation manual for general information and copier You did not set sufficient margins in the paper settings of your application The top and bottom of the paper may be dirty if the margins are set outside of the specified print quality area Set the margins within the specified print quality area 35 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause and solution The paper size set in the printer driver is not the same as the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray If the Fit to Page setting is selected in Windows make sure that the paper size selected in the Fit To Paper Size drop down list is the same as the size of the paper loaded in the tray The image orientation setting in the printer driver is not correct The printed image Windows environment click the Paper tab in the printer driver is skewed or it setup screen and make sure that Image Orientation is set to the runs off the paper corre
62. Yes Yes Yes Negative Image No No Yes Yes Yes Fit To Page Yes Yes Yes No No Resident fonts 80 fonts 80 fonts 136 fonts 136 fonts 6 35 fonts Selectable download fonts bitmap TrueType Graphics bitmap TrueType Graphics bitmap Typet TrueType bitmap 1 Other functions Automatic configuration settings Yes Yes Yes No Yes 8 ROPM 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Overlay Yes Yes Yes No Job Control Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Watermark Yes Yes Yes Yes Job Compression No No Yes No Bitmap Compression No No Yes No 51 N up printing cannot be used in Windows NT 4 0 In Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 2 4 6 9 and 16 N up printing can be used 2 Only for models that support two sided printing 3 Pamphlet style printing is available in Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 4 custom paper size cannot be set in Windows NT 4 0 In Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 one custom paper size be set 5 Cannot be used in Mac OS X v10 1 5 6 In Windows NT 4 0 35 resident fonts are available 7 1 and TrueType can be selected in some versions of LaserWriter 8 Cannot be used in Mac OS X 9 Can only be used when the dual function board is installed 39 AR NB3 for network printer SHARP
63. and blinks during printing SCAN key indicator Press to select scan mode To connect a computer to the USB port on the machine and use the scanner function see the Operation manual for printer and scanner To use the machine as a network scanner see the Operation manual for network scanner that accompanies the optional network expansion kit 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 L 13 14 Display Shows various messages For more information see page 16 BACK key Press to return the display to the previous screen FAX STATUS key when the fax option is installed This key is used in fax mode For more information see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit OK key Press to enter the selected setting Copy number display The selected number of copies appears During copying this shows the remaining number of copies Numeric keys Use to select the number of copies INTERRUPT key INTERRUPT indicator Interrupts a copy run to allow an interrupt copy job to be performed Page 63 C key Press to clear the set number of copies or stop a copy run 5 6 7 8 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT 9 10 11 12 FAX STATUS COPY EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO OUTPUT DUPLEX y SCAN COLORMODE RESOLUTION ADDRESS FORMAT ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SC
64. button Enter the IP address and click the OK button The machine s IP address is changed If a password entry screen appears while the address is being changed enter the password bu Ga IND a be US and click the OK button The password for this machine has been Dee mum d Lucr e Loir ia initially set to Sharp Restart the machine Power off the machine and then power it back on M Select Search from the File menu 7 select the machine and then click the g The printer or printers connected to the network will be detected Click the Print Server Card Setup button enter your password in the password entry screen and click the OK button The Print Server Card Setup window will appear The password for the machine has been initially set to Sharp e If the Guest user checkbox is selected the settings can be viewed but not configured If the machine is not found make sure that Click the TCP IP tab Note the machine is powered on and that your computer and the machine connected to the network and then search again 22 SETUP A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT Configure the settings and then click the Update button js sure to ask your network administrator for the correct IP address subnet mask and default gateway to be ente
65. can be set A single copy can be made even if 0 is displayed 2 f you enter the wrong number press the C key and enter the correct number The limit for the number of copies can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide Important note when making a large number of copies If the number of sheets output to the center tray exceed its maximum capacity 250 sheets when a job separator tray kit is not installed 150 sheets when job separator tray kit is installed during a copy job the copy job will stop temporarily If this happens promptly remove the copies and press the OK key to resume copying The copy job will step each time the number of sheets in the center tray reach its maximum capacity Before starting a long copy run remove any sheets that remain in the center tray During output of the copy job exercise care as the job may stop frequently due to the center tray becoming full 49 COPY FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE If you loaded a non standard size original or the original size was not correctly detected set the original size manually Perform the following steps after placing the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass 2 Standard sizes The following sizes can be detected correctly 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B4 4 A5 If a non standard size original is placed including special sizes
66. in System Preferences and select Ethernet in Show Click the AppleTalk tab and make sure that Make AppleTalk Active is selected In Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 open Chooser from the Apple menu and make sure that Active is selected Printing is not possible if Active is not selected Ethernet is not selected for Connect via for AppleTalk Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 Open AppleTalk from the Control Panels and make sure that Ethernet is selected in the Connect via menu Printing is not possible if Ethernet is not selected Problems during printing Problem Cause and solution TROUBLESHOOTING The machine does not receive print data The DATA indicator does not blink The machine is set to off line mode Press the PRINT key to select printer mode and then select ONLINE with the A key Your machine is not selected correctly in the application for the print job In the dialog box that appears after you select Print from the File menu in the application make sure you have selected the machine as the printer Copying or scanning is in progress or a fax is being printed when the fax option is installed Wait until copying scanning or fax printing is finished Has the printer driver been installed correctly Install the appropriate printer driver For the procedure for installing the printer driver see the Software setup guide which accompanies the mach
67. printer or fax mode while in scanner mode or using H Use the V or A key to select the scanner mode while in copy printer or fax desired scan destination mode see OPERATION IN COPY PRINT SCAN AND FAX MODES in 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT in the Operation manual for general information and copier 23 Button Manager is a software utility that allows the scanner function to be used by means of the SCAN key on the machine The Button Manager software allows you to assign a destination application and scan settings to each of the six destinations on the machine To scan using the machine s operation panel settings must be configured in the Control Panel after Button Manager is installed To install Button Manager and configure settings see SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER in 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide Setup window To view Help for a setting click the button in the upper right hand corner of the Button Manager setup window Scan Button Destination Settings screen and then click the setting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Heute 1 Tab 5 OK button Select the desired destination The tabs contain Click to save your settings and close the dialog scan settings for each of the scan destinations box SC1 through SC6 on the machine 6 Cancel button 2 Application Selection area Click this butt
68. see HECEIVING FAXES page 28 A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size paper can only be loaded in tray 1 regardless of the mode A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 paper cannot be loaded in tray 2 or in the optional 250 sheet paper feed unit or 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit For the procedures for loading paper in the trays see the Operation manual for general information and copier N PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OPERATION PANEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Y PEED M SETTING SHIFT SYMBOL 5 qum or Page pallet page 82 Display page 10 This key displays the base screen and the function setting screen BACK key In a setting or programming screen this key is used to move back to the previous screen FAX STATUS key page 26 This is used to cancel a fax transmission or a stored fax transmission OK key This key is used to enter a setting that has been selected with the arrow or other keys W A 4 Numeric keys These are used to enter fax numbers sub addresses passcodes and numerical settings See BOXES AND SUB ADDRESSES PASSCODES REQUIRED FOR F CODE TRANSMISSION on page 48 C key This is used to clear a mistake when entering fax numbers sub addresses passcodes and numerical settings One digit is cleared each time the ke
69. so that Sharp can try to help assure complete satisfaction of all the warranty rights to which you are entitled from the authorized dealer AR M162 AR M207 SHARP SHARP ELECTRONICS CORPORATION Sharp Plaza Mahwah New Jersey 07430 1163 www sharp usa com SHARP ELECTRONICS OF CANADA LTD 335 Britannia Road East Mississauga Ontario L4Z 1W9 SHARP CORPORATION This manual has been printed using a vegetable based soy oil ink to help protect the environment Printed on 100 post consumer recycled paper IN CHINA KS1 TINSE1333QSZZ SHARP OPERATION MANUAL for printer and scanner DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM Page e INTRODUCTION 1 8 2 dias 3 e PRINTER SHARING 11 EU 15 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 26 TROUBLESHOOTING 28 SPECIFICATIONS 32 INTRODUCTION This manual describes the printer and scanner functions of the digital multifunctional system Note For information on loading paper replacing toner cartridges clearing paper misfeeds handling peripheral devices and other copier related information please refer to Operation manual for general information and copier that accompanies the machine For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual please refer to the separate Software setup guide For information on the ope
70. the correct digit s CSS BENDING OPTIONS If you specified a Rapid key or Speed Dial number in v SERIAL POLLING step 6 that has a sub address programmed the SUB ADDRESS TX sub address will appear Go to the next step without SUB ADD POLLING entering a sub address 9 Press the OK key B Press the OK key ok OK 53 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES Enter a passcode maximum 20 digits itl Press the OK key with the numeric keys WXYZ 0 9 e Characters that be entered are numbers and spaces However the initial character cannot be a space f you make a mistake press the C key and re enter the correct digit s If the other machine has not programmed passcode omit the passcode and go to the next step If you specified a Rapid key or Speed Dial number in step 6 that has a passcode programmed the passcode will appear Go to the next step without entering the passcode OK O Press the START key After communicating with the other machine your machine will print the received document 2 To cancel the operation During communication Cancel as explained in Cancelling a fax transmission on page 26 While the job is stored Cancel as explained in Cancelling a stored transmission job on page 27 Only one F code polling operation with a timer setting page 34 can be stored 54 F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION F Code confi
71. with the scan mode V or A key Perform this operation from the KO base screen of scan mode FUNCTION J When the SPECIAL B W THRESHOLD acc FUNCTION key is pressed the LIGHT SOURCE special function menu appears VOID AREA To select scan mode see step y PAPER SIZE SET 1 on page 20 29 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION L H Press the OK key B Press the OK key OK The set value is stored and you return to the base screen B W THRESHOLD 1 254 The default setting is 128 White becomes stronger as the displayed value approaches 1 Black becomes stronger when the displayed value approaches 254 ENABLING SCANNING MARGINS VOID AREA When this function is enabled margins void areas that are not scanned are created around the edges of the machine s maximum scanning area Select scan mode place the original steps 1 to 3 on page 20 and then follow the procedure below The factory default setting for the void area is ON enabled If you need to change the void area setting follow these steps Void area 7 64 2 5 mm from the top and bottom edges 1 8 3 0 mm from the left and right edges Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key in Press the OK key scan mode Perform this operation from the base screen of scan mode When the SPECIAL To select scan mode see step 1 on page 20 Select ON or OFF with the V or 2 Select VOID
72. 13 This lets you select transmission methods for the This is used to configure basic settings for the network scanner function and configure settings SMTP DNS and LDAP servers for Scan to E mail 5 Security 2 Passwords page 14 Port numbers can be changed or disabled for The administrator can establish passwords to security purposes protect the Web site Enter the password that you EUR T If HTTP is disabled it will not be possible pes 19 2 ns E 2 d Note open the Web page To open the Web PaSSWOrg Cam SELTOr Me agMINSHAtOr an page in this case the network expansion kit must be reset 3 Clock Adjust How to reset the network expansion kit This is used to set the time in the machine Make sure the time is set correctly when performing Scan to E mail 6 Services page 13 This is used to configure advanced SMTP and DNS This setting does not appear on models that have Nn g P server settings as needed for each transmission method the fax function If your model has the fax function see the Operation manual for 7 LDAP page 13 facsimile to set the time at the operation panel This is used to configure advanced settings for of the machine global address searches 11 BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING Click Network Scanning in the menu frame and configure the required settings A password is required
73. 28 INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY 5 30 USING THE PPD FIL E 31 Installing the resident font information only when the PPD file is installed in Windows 95 98 31 SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 32 APPLET ALK SETTINGS 32 INSTALLING THE PPD FILE nane kr pi a cu Rc RR CR ERE E RE EC S S E FER Ei Re di 32 INSTALLATION INMAC OS net eit Y eR Ea 32 INSTALLATION IN MAC OS 8 6 0922 34 INSTALLING THE SCREEN FONTS MAC OS 8 6 9 2 2 34 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER ah ah na rh aan hare bia uai E AR KE i 35 MAC OSX V10 2 TO 10 34 eet eite apetece 35 e MAC OS7CV10 1 5 at endum hibernis n He 37 MAC OS 8 0 09 2 2 nei dataset e De ete cepe ens dte poete Dieta Deb niet 38 gizieiii iB t lesipl c 39 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER uicit eden ke x iR up aiu Dew cuu rcd 42 INSTALLING ACROBAT READER ed 42 CH
74. 34 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER Follow the steps below to configure the machine s printer driver MAC OS X V10 2 TO 10 3 4 sure that the machine is 7 Click the machine s model name in the powered on list uu rae pu 2 Select Applications from the Go m menu E wese rn d Caria 7 AMKT acia dE The name of the machine that appears is the EE name that was entered in the AppleTalk settings Seren when the network settings were configured Unless the name was changed when configuring Double click the Utilities folder the settings it will be SCxxxxxx where is a sequence of characters that varies depending on your machine uw enter icon Select Sharp in the Printer Model menu Mac OS X v10 3 to 10 3 4 double click the Printer Setup Utility icon The PPD file selection window appears The Printer List window appears Poway desta Teeri 31 2 If this is the first time you are installing has m printer driver on your computer a KS p confirmation message will appear Click the ur Add button 3 Takeria Wta g Click Add g Select the PPD file for your model cuu Pem gt a m Pom z appt a 1 Lord Bore pmm i f Select AppleTalk in the me
75. 5 24 8 Enter the fax number of the destination with the numeric keys Example of a Rapid key ENTER DIAL GHI JKL MNO Up to 50 digits can be entered for the fax number If you need to insert a pause between any of the digits press the REDIAL PAUSE key The pause appears as a hyphen To set the duration of the pause see PAUSE TIME page 96 g Press the OK key OK Enter the name of the destination see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 Up to 36 characters can be entered for the name If you press the OK key without entering a name go directly to step 13 In this case a destination name will be assigned automatically 63 PROGRAMMING itl Press the OK key OK O Enter search characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 2008 KEY WORDS START ENTER Up to 10 search characters can be entered Only Uppercase characters should be used in KEY WORD to arrange the addresses in alphabetical order The search characters function as a keyword if you need to search for the destination when sending a fax Page 21 To finish the storing procedure press the START key If you wish to program an option such as an F code chain dialling transmission speed or international transmission mode press the OK key
76. 600 dpi is performed In addition to automatic exposure adjustment two exposure modes can be selected TEXT for text only originals and PHOTO for photographs The exposure can be adjusted to five levels in each mode e Photo mode allows clear copying of originals with delicate halftones such as monochrome photos and color photos Enhanced copying features The zoom function can be used to reduce or enlarge copies from 2596 to 40096 in increments of 196 When the SPF is used the zoom copy ratio range is 5096 to 200 Up to 999 copies can be made of an original scanned just once This can be changed to a maximum of 99 copies in the key operator programs The key operator programs allow functions to be selected and managed to meet your specific needs For example access to the machine can be controlled by enabling audit mode The optional dual function board can be installed to enable use of rotation copy and other convenient functions 12 112 121 m m Erase copy Margin shift 2 1 4in1 E Ense Back Card shot Rotation copy XY zoom copying Dual page copy When the dual function board is installed Sort function when the dual function board is installed Copies of multiple original pages can sorted into sets CLO Laser printer function color scanner
77. 74 76 and 79 A document received from a relay request machine is initially stored in the box of your machine Your machine the relay machine also prints the document thus the document is first stored as a print job and then as transmission jobs to each of the programmed end receiving machines The document data is automatically cleared after transmission to all end receiving machines is completed Transmission to the end receiving machines cannot be stopped or cancelled USING THE F CODE RELAY REQUEST FUNCTION your machine requests a relay broadcast Ask the operator of the other F code machine the relay machine to create an F code relay group box that contains the end receiving machines to which you wish to send a fax and ask for the sub address SUB and passcode SID of that box When you dial the relay machine to send the fax enter the sub address and passcode after the fax number The fax will be stored in the relay machine s memory box and the relay machine will call each of the programmed end receiving machines and relay the fax to those machines If a passcode SID is not programmed in the box enter only the sub address when dialling To dial the relay machine use the same procedure as in F CODE TRANSMISSION F CODE CONFIDENTIAL 4 TRANSMISSION page 55 59 CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE This chapter explains convenient functions that can be used when sending a fax connecting an extension phone and o
78. ADDRESS FORM PROGRAM M ERASE EJDUAL PAGE COPY The special modes screen will appear 66 Select 2in1 4in1 with the V or A SPECIAL MODES PAGE COPY g Press the OK key OK The 2 in 1 4 in 1 OK CHANGE selection screen will appear Select 2in1 or 4in1 with the V or A key 9 1 2111 O The settings for 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 will appear Jg Select the layout with the V or A key 2 For the layouts that can be selected see 2 in 1 copy layouts or 4 in 1 copy layouts on page 66 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS Select the borderline setting with the 4 or gt key O 2in1 DEUM Select solid line broken line or none Press the OK key OK You will return to the base screen Select other copy settings as needed and then press the START key 3 The copy ratio will be set automatically If you placed the originals in the document feeder tray copying will start after all originals are scanned If you placed the first original on the document glass go to the next step When the START indicator lights replace the original with the next original and then press the START key Repeat step 13 until all originals have been scanned Copies will be output each time two origina
79. ANVANDS PA ANNAT S TT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANV NDAREN UTS TTAS F R OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM VERSKRIDER GR NSEN F R LASERKLASS 1 CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 CAUTION INVISIBEELASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET UND ADVERSEL LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL OG SIKKERHEDSLAS BRYTES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL PPNAD OCH SP RRAR AR SICHERHENSVERRIEGELUNG UDERERUCKT NICHT DEM STRAN AUSSETZEN VARNING GRKOPPLADE STRALEN AR FARLIG BETRAKTA EJ STRALEN USYNLIG LASERSTR LING VED BNING NAR SIKKERHEDSAFBRYDERE ER AVATTAESSA JA SUQJALUKITUS QHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NAKYMATONTA ADVARSEL UDE AF FUNKTION UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALING VARO ALA KATSO SATEESEER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Improper installation may damage this product Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the machine is moved 1 The machine should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection 2 Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded For the power supply requirements see the name plate on the back of the main unit 2 Connect the machine a po
80. AREA with the V or A key key A key VOID AREA SPECIAL FUNCTION B W THRESHOLD LIGHT SOURCE Press the OK key OK The setting is stored and you return to the base screen 30 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATION When using the document glass the original should be placed face down in the far left corner of the glass with the top edge of the original at the left edge of the glass When using the SPF the original should be placed face up in the middle of the document feeder tray with the top of the original to the right Document glass Scanning result Long horizontal originals of size 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 A3 or B4 can only be placed as shown below For this reason the scanned image will be rotated 90 when viewed on a computer Document glass Scanning result 6 de ENTERING CHARACTERS Characters are entered by pressing the numeric keys on the operation panel The letters entered with each numeric key are shown below Characters that can be entered ABC DEF Directly entering an e mail Searching for an address on an address LDAP server GHI JKL MNO 4 8 6 PQRS
81. Barcode font kit AR PF1 Yes Flash memory kit AR PF2 Yes Yes Can be installed Cannot be installed 1 The network expansion kit AR NB3 must be installed 2 The facsimile expansion kit AR FX11 must be installed 40 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS FEEDER For the names of the parts of the RSPF SPF see PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS page 12 Specifications Model AR SP6N AR RP6N Weight 15 Ibs to 24 Ibs 56 g m to 90 g m Acceptable Original sizes 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 11 x 17 A5 to A3 originals Up to 40 sheets thickness 11 64 4 mm or less for 8 1 2 x 14 B4 or larger originals up to 30 sheets oa 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 1 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 Detectable original sizes A5 B5 BSR A4 A4R B4 When installed on AR M162 16 pages min When installed on AR M207 20 pages min Weight 11 1 Ibs 5 0 kg 12 0 Ibs 5 4 kg Dimensions 22 61 64 W x 17 9 64 D x 5 1 4 H 583 mm W x 435 mm D x 133 mm H Capacity Original exchange speed 1 Two sided scanning is not possible 2 During one sided copying 250 SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT 2 X 250 SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT The 250 sheet paper feed unit provides a tray that can hold 250 sheets 20 Ibs 80 g m of plain paper The 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit provides two trays that can each h
82. F code public f you selected DELETE in step 9 follow the steps box that you wish to delete with the V in Deleting an F code public box which follows e Editing an F code public box Select the name of the F code public box that you wish to edit with the V or A key If not all letters of the box name appear press the s key to display all letters Press the key once again to return to the original screen If not all letters of the box name appear press the s key to display all letters Press the s key once again to return to the original screen 1 Select DELETE with the V or A key Press the OK key You will return to step 11 If you OK Edit the name of the F code public box O wish to delete another public box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on repeat steps 11 through 14 To page 82 exit press the BACK key See step 9 of PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES page 77 If you do not wish to edit the name go to the next step 80 PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY You can print lists showing programmed information settings and communication activity The following lists can be printed ACTIVITY REPORT This report shows information on your most recent transmissions and reception
83. No sort 64 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS Place the originals the document g When the START indicator lights feeder tray or the first original on the replace the original with the next document glass original and press the START key If the originals are placed in the document feeder tray sort Repeat step 6 until all originals mode will be automatically 2 have been scanned selected This can be changed to no sort in the key operator programs See the Key If the first original i 41 lass no Then enerdinals have been 1 7 press the READ END key sort mode will be automatically selected 2 Press the OUTPUT key DUPLEX SCAN DUPLEX SCAN Copying will start f the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned Memory is full will appear in the display To start copying the originals that have been scanned to that point press the START key To cancel the copy job press the CA key e The optional memory board AR SM5 can be The output mode selection screen will appear Select NO SORT or SORT with the installed to increase the number of originals that can V or A key or with the OUTPUT be scanned The memory can be expanded up to a maximum of 272 MB the amount expanded is 256 MB Offset function This function offsets each set of copies from the previous set in center tray making it easy
84. Not including toner cartridge Dimensions 23 15 64 W x 23 7 16 D x 18 15 32 H 23 15 64 W x 23 7 16 D x 20 31 64 H 590 mm W x 595 mm D x 469 mm H 590 mm W x 595 mm D x 520 mm H Operating conditions Temperature 59 F to 86 F 15 C to 30 C Humidity 20 to 85 Noise level Sound Power Level LwA 1B 10dB Copying 6 3 B or less Standby 4 0 B or less Noise emission measurement in accordance with ISO 7779 Emission concentration measured according to RAL UZ62 Edition Jan 2002 Ozone Dust 0 02 mg m or less 0 075 mg m or less Styrene 0 07 mg m or less Output tray specifications Output method Face down output Output tray capacity 20 Ibs 80 g m 250 sheets When the job separator tray kit is installed 150 sheets in center tray 100 sheets in top tray The maximum number of pages that can be held varies depending on ambient conditions in the installation location the type of paper and the storage conditions of the paper Printer function scanner function fax function specifications See the Operation manual for printer and scanner and the Operation manual for facsimile Some discrepancies may exist in the illustrations and content due to improvements to the machine 74 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 1 4 Date Revised Aug 18 2003 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 01211 1 PR
85. OK e Select RAPID SPEED GROUP or CHANGE DELETE with the V or A key To store an Rapid key or Speed Dial number select RAPID SPEED and press the OK key GROUP Next follow the steps in CHANGE DELETE Storing a Rapid keys and Speed Dial numbers at right To store a group key DIAL select GROUP and press the OK key Next 4 RAPID SPEED follow the steps in Storing a group key on y CHANGE DELETE page 67 To or delete a Rapid DIAL key Speed Dial number or group key select RAPID SPEED CHANGE DELETE GROUP and press the OK v Next follow the steps in Editing and deleting auto dial numbers on page 68 PROGRAMMING Storing Rapid keys and Speed Dial numbers To store a Rapid key or Speed Dial number follow steps 1 through 6 on pages 62 to 63 and then follow the steps below m Press a Rapid key 01 to 50 or press the SPEED key If you are storing a Rapid key press the Rapid key that you wish to use 01 to 50 If you press a Rapid key that has already been programmed a warning message will appear f you are storing a Speed Dial number press the SPEED key and then enter the desired Speed Dial number 000 to 299 with the numeric keys V 2 SP REDIAUPAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING L
86. ONLY NEVER PRINTS NEVER PRINTS Normally the settings indicated by shading above are selected u Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select LIST PRINT SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key Select LIST SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key Select PRINT SELECTION with the V or key and then press the OK key a c N Select the type of transmission with the V or A key and then press the OK key TRANSMISSION BROADCAST ORIGINAL IMAGE PRINT SETTING RECEPTION or CONF RECEPTION can be selected Q Select the desired print setting with the V or A key and then press the OK key If you selected TRANSMISSION select ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY or NEVER PRINTS If you selected BROADCAST select ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY or NEVER PRINTS f you selected ORIGINAL IMAGE PRINT SETTING select ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY or NEVER PRINTS If you selected RECEPTION select ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY or NEVER PRINTS If you selected CONF RECEPTION select ALWAYS PRINTS or NEVER PRINTS ORIGINAL IMAGE PRINT SETTING is used to have part of the first page of the transmitted document printed on the transaction report This program is not effective when the transaction report is set to not print out AUTO LISTING This program is used to have the activity
87. PAPER page 8 Border N Up Printing Border If you select the Border checkbox borderlines will be printed around each page gt PRINT FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER The printer driver can adjust the size of the print image to match the size of the paper loaded in the machine Follow the steps shown below to use this function The explanation below assumes that you intend to print a ledger or size document on letter or A4 size paper To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 The Fit To Paper Size setting is not available when N Up Printing is selected t PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE page 7 Click the Paper tab in the printer 4 Select the size of the paper Letter or driver setup screen A4 that is loaded in the machine from Fit to Paper Size Select the original size Ledger or A3 The size of the print image will be automatically of the print image in Paper Size adjusted to match the paper loaded in the machine Pang Sine Pang Site Ix Tz Uis 237 x 420 nm Paper Size Ledger or A3 Ledger hd or 83 w Fit To Paper Size Letter or A4 H Click on the Fit to Page checkbox Fil fo Paper Site Fi to Pape Sie Fitu Page Fin Page d or sn bd L Ledger or A3 size Letter or A4 size document paper Paper Size Fit To Paper Size PRINT ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEG
88. PLUS 10 96 and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control APC Caution Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure For North America SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This Digital Equipment is rated Class 1 and complies with 21 CFR 1040 10 and 1040 11 of the CDRH standards This means that the equipment does not produce hazardous laser radiation For your safety observe the precautions below Do not remove the cabinet operation panel or any other covers The equipment s exterior covers contain several safety interlock switches Do not bypass any safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into switch slots For Europe CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN INTERLOCKS DEFEATED AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM VORSICHT UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBR CKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN ADVARSEL USYNLIG LASERSTRALNING VED ABNING NAR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALNING VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE VARNING OM APPARATEN
89. Password The entered password is stored When establishing a password for the first time After setting the password turn the machine enter Sharp in Admin Password power off and then back on z Be sure to enter S in upper case When prompted to enter a password a user and harp in lower case passwords should enter user and an administrator should are case sensitive enter admin in User Name In Password the respective password for the entered user name should be entered For more information click Help in the upper right hand corner of the window 26 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE E MAIL PRINT FUNCTION An e mail account can be set up for the machine When this is done the machine will periodically check the e mail server for e mail and automatically print out any file attachments it receives This provides a means for printing a file from a computer that does not have the printer driver installed as the user can simply send the file to the machine as an e mail attachment Setting up the E mail print function To use the e mail print function the machine must have an e mail account Click Print port in the menu frame 3 Enter the information regarding the e mail environment Gareral The Print Port Setup For detailed information Click Help in the upper TEF page appears right hand corner of the window ae 8 Click Submit to store the entered information Print Port Setup Ra
90. Press the OK key SPECIAL FUNCTION Suus ORIG SIZE ENTER OK PAPER SIZE SET OQ AUTO TRAY SWITCHING PAPER SIZE SET v DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear When a checkmark does not appear in the checkbox the auto tray switching function will not operate 6 Press the A key The above screen appears in copy mode 2 Select PAPER SIZE SET with the V or A key SPECIAL FUNCTION PAPER SIZE SET OO ORIG SIZE ENTER 84x14 84X13 84X11 You will return to the paper size setting screen To re enable auto tray switching press the OK key in the screen of step 5 so that a checkmark appears 11x17 8 14 8 13 1 The paper size setting 04x11 screen will appear Press the V key repeatedly until AUTO TRAY SWITCHING appears PAPER SIZE SET AUTO TRAY SWITCHING Move the cursor to the lowest tray and then press the key again The above screen will appear 22 AUDITING MODE When auditing mode is enabled a count is kept of the pages printed by each account The page counts can be viewed in the display This function is enabled in the key operator programs For the counts in copy print and scan modes see the Key operator s guide For the counts in fax mode see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit NUMBER OF ACCOUNTS I
91. SHARP CORPORATION ARNB3 EN PRINTER SHARP SOFTWARE SETUP GUIDE DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM Page e INTRODUCTION e 1 5 e INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE M 7 e INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR 5 20 e TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION 39 Warranty While every effort has been made to make this document as accurate and helpful as possible SHARP Corporation makes no warranty of any kind with regard to its content All information included herein is subject to change without notice SHARP is not responsible for any loss or damages direct or indirect arising from or related to the use of this operation manual Copyright SHARP Corporation 2004 All rights reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under copyright laws Note This manual assumes that the personnel who are installing this product and the users of the product have a working knowledge of Windows and Macintosh computers For information on the operating system please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function Some of the windows that appear in this manual may vary depending on your computer type and settings n some regions the Key operator s guide cited in this manual is a separate manual and in other regions the Key operator s guide is included in the Operation
92. SHIFT selected 68 ERASING SHADOWS AROUND THE EDGES OF A COPY Erase copy This feature is used to erase shadows that appear around the edges of copies of books and other thick originals Edge erase The feature can also erase the shadow that appears down the center of books and other originals that open up Center erase Both the shadow lines around the edges of copies and the shadow at the center can be erased Edge Center erase Edge erase Center erase Edge Center erase Five selections are available for the erasure width 0 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 0 mm 5 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm The default setting is 1 2 10 mm Center erase Edge Center erase cannot be used in combination with dual page copy page 62 Edge erase cannot be used in combination with 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy page 66 Edge erase cannot be used when paper is fed from the bypass tray Edge erase cannot be used in combination with card shot page 71 Edge erase cannot be used when copying a special size original Note that if the width of the erasure is too large the edge of the image may be partially erased default setting for the erasure width can be changed See the Key operator s guide Place the original in the document Select ERASE with the V or A feeder tray or on the document glass key 7 NNSSSSNSSSSSSN SPECIAL MOD
93. Select 2 SIDED with the V or A key DUPLEX SCAN 6 Press the OK key The duplex original type selection screen appears DUPLEX SCAN BOOKLET 1 You will return to the base screen and the duplex scanning mode icon will appear 9 Continue from step 4 of BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES page 18 Booklet Tablet Two sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets and two sided originals that are bound at the top are tablets Duplex scanning is cancelled when the transmission is completed or when the Duplex scanning of two sided originals is only possible when RSPF is used Automatic scanning of both sides of an original is not possible when the document glass is used t Automatic scanning of both sides of an original longer than 11 x 17 is not possible The image of the back side of the original is rotated 180 degrees if needed at the time of transmission and thus there is no need to change the orientation at the receiving machine 22 To cancel duplex scanning select 1 SIDED in step 5 and then press the OK key When duplex scanning is enabled dual page scan page 43 cannot be enabled BASIC OPERATIONS Transmission settings memory transmission mode and direct transmission mode Transmission modes include memory transmission where the original is temporarily scanned into memory before transmission and direct transmission
94. Software CD ROM 2 to view the Readme file Using the machine in a macintosh environment To use the machine as a printer for the Macintosh the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N must be installed Install the PPD file needed to use the machine as a printer from the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit AR NB3 T Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit This CD ROM contains the software that is needed to use the machine in a Macintosh environment and the online manuals Operation Manual for network printer and Operation Manual for network scanner To open the online manual Operation Manual for network printer double click the AR NB3 Printer Manual folder the EnglishA folder and then the Printer Manual icon To open the online manual Operation Manual for network scanner double click the AR NB3 Scanner Manual folder the EnglishA folder and then the Scanner Manual icon For the procedure for installing the software see page 32 of this manual English A in North America English in Europe PPD file This file contains printer information necessary for printing Acrobat Reader 4 05 This program is used to view the online manuals on your computer screen To install Acrobat Reader see page 42 of this manual P Note The PPD file on the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit cannot be used when 2 the machine is connected
95. This means that transmission jobs can be stored in memory by performing a transmission operation while the machine is occupied with another transmission reception operation Up to 50 jobs can be stored in memory at once After transmission the scanned document data is cleared from memory You can check transmission jobs stored in memory in the fax job status screen Page 27 Note that depending on the number of pages stored in memory and the transmission settings it may not be possible to store 50 jobs in memory procedure for storing a transmission job is the same as the procedure in BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES on page 18 If you have not yet pressed the START key you can cancel a transmission job by pressing the C key If you have already pressed the START key see Cancelling a stored transmission job page 27 If the original is still being scanned after the START key is pressed you can press the C key to cancel the transmission e If you store a transmission job in direct transmission mode you will not be able to store any further transmission jobs After transmission the scanned document data is cleared from memory You can check transmission jobs stored in memory in the fax job status screen Page 27 If the memory becomes full during transmission of a stored transmission job If the memory becomes full while scanning the first page of a document the transmission job is automatically
96. Web browser on your computer The Web pages include both pages for users and pages for the administrator In the user Web pages users can monitor the machine directly print a file specified on a computer and select printer configuration settings In the administrator Web pages the administrator can configure the machine s e mail settings settings for print by e mail and passwords Only the administrator is allowed to configure these settings HOW TO ACCESS THE WEB PAGE AND VIEW HELP Use the following procedure to access the Web pages Help can be clicked at the bottom of the menu frame to view information on the various function settings that can be configured remotely over the network from the machine s Web pages For the settings of each function see the explanations in Help the Web browser your E Click the Help button at the bottom computer of the menu frame Agm Mibe Supported browsers To view information on a Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows function setting click the 5 1 or later Macintosh corresponding item in the Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later Help screen 2 In the Address field of your Web browser enter the IP address that has mean conPgureg 4 LZ finished close the Web pages abst blank Microseft lati you do not know the Edt address see When you have finished CHECKING THE IP using the Web pages 1 s 12 ADDRESS pag
97. amp One sided scanning in the SPF on the document glass 4 Two sided scanning in the RSPF 2 Displays the original size If a non standard size original is placed or if you wish to change the scanning size follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size 2 Standard sizes The following sizes are standard sizes B4 4 A5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 if the machine uses inch based paper sizes If a non standard size original is loaded including special sizes the closest standard size may be displayed or the original size may not appear at all MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE If you load an original that is not a standard size such as a long original or if the size is not detected correctly be sure to press the ORIGINAL SIZE key and set the original size manually Perform the following steps after placing the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass page 13 2 If a size is specified that is different from the actual original size when scanning two sided original the RSPF a scanning error or a cut off image may result Press the ORIGINAL SIZE key H Press the OK key AUTO SIDED q You will return to the base screen and the selected original size will appear in the original display FORMAT BROADCAST The original size selection screen appears Select the ori
98. and there is the same size of paper in another tray the machine will automatically switch to the other tray and continue printing PAUSING A PRINT JOB To pause a print job press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and then select OFFLINE with the W key The machine pauses the print job and then goes offline To cancel a print job press the C key c To resume printing select ONLINE with the A key 18 PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH WHEN PAPER FEED IS SET TO AUTO SELECT If Paper Feed is set to Auto Select in the Print window and the correct size of paper is not loaded in the machine the printing procedure will vary depending on the FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT page 31 setting in the key operator programs When FORCED OUTPUT OF When FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is disabled PRINT is enabled Add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key The closest size of paper in a tray other than the on the machine to switch to printer mode and select bypass tray will be used for printing BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume The print image is automatically rotated 90 degrees in the event that the paper is loaded in an orientation ote different from the print image except when the bypass tray is used HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER FEED SETTINGS There are two bypass tray settings in Paper Feed of the Print window When Bypass Tray is selected the print
99. are asked how the printer is connected select Connected to this computer and click the Next button ILI IS ux ll When the interface selection screen appears select USB If you are using Windows 2000 If you are using Windows 2000 and a warning message regarding the digital signature appears while the MFP driver files are being copied the warning message may appear several times be sure to click the Continue Anyway button When The MFP driver installation is complete appears click the OK button INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk click the Utility Software button in step 5 If you do not wish to install either go to step 10 9 Click the Button Manager or Sharpdesk button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button Follow the on screen instructions Click the Close button After the installation a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear In this case click the Yes button to restart your computer itl Connect the machine to your computer with the USB cable Page 44 Make sure that the machine is powered on The machine is found and a plug and play window appears Follow the on screen instructions If you using Windows 2000 If a warning message regarding the digital signature appears be sure to click the Yes button
100. be polled into one serial polling operation with a timer setting see Serial polling on page 38 SETTING UP A TIMER TRANSMISSION In Fax mode press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key NTN When the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is pressed the special function menu appears To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 QD If a time has been specified a checkmark appears in front of TIMER To cancel a specified time press the 69 key in the above display with TIMER MODE highlighted H Press the OK key TIME SETTING 00 25 TIME NOW 09 25 The current time appears in the screen If the current time is not correct press the CA key to cancel the operation and see DATE amp TIME SET page 99 to correct the time setting 34 4 Use the numeric keys to select the time at which you want the operation to take place AE Nr Select the time in 12 hour 1 2 format 8 6 Example For 13 25 enter 01 25 If you need to correct the entered time use the lt key to move back 5 Press the OK key OK The specified time is set Select AM or PM with the V or A key and then press the OK key ESS PM Select the day of the week with the V or A key O SELECT DAY NO SELECT DAYS TUESDAY v WEDNESDAY The selected day is highlighted If you select NO SELECT DAYS the transmission will be performed as soon as the sp
101. be possible In this event use a WINS server or do not use the machine in a DHCP environment Make sure that the LAN cable is Double click the Setup icon connected to the machine and then Power on the machine If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon Insert the network expansion kit select the language that you wish to use and Software CD ROM 1 into your click the Next button Normally the correct computer s CD ROM drive language is selected automatically H Click the start button click My 5 SOFTWARE LICENSE window Computer and then double click will appear Make sure that you the CD ROM icon understand the contents of the license In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click agreement and then click the Yes My Computer and then double click the button CD ROM icon g Read the message in the Welcome window and then click the Next button SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 7 Click the Administrator Tools button Click the Print Server Card Setup button If the machine is being used in a DHCP environment or the IP address has otherwise already been set go to step 15 LI cimmi DL Mi pump itam ISI Perera iie If the IP address has not been set the IP address is set to 0 0 0 0 a message will appear prompting you to set the IP address Click the Yes
102. be set to not print out in NOTICE PAGE page 31 of the key operator programs When the dual function board is installed The dual function board memory is used to temporarily hold print data when the ROPM function is used This memory is also used to temporarily store original image data during a copy job The proportion of memory allocated to the printer function can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide The memory can be increased by adding the optional memory modules For details contact your SHARP dealer When the dual function board is not installed A notice page such as The incorrect driver is chosen a normal output was not able to be executed will be printed if you attempt to print using the print driver for the dual function board Install the standard print driver as explained in 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide and select the standard driver when printing CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS There are several settings where the IP address must be entered or checked To check the IP address of the machine hold down the status button on the network expansion kit for at least 2 seconds to print out a Printer Setting List Status button How to reset the network expansion kit To reset the network expansion kit power on the machine while holding down the status button on the network
103. be sure to read the installation requirements and cautions sections of the Operation manual for general information and copier Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference including this manual the Operation manual for general information and copier and operation manuals for any optional equipment which has been installed FAX interface cable and Line cable These special accessories must be used with the device Notice for Users in Europe This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 1999 5 EC Dieses Ger t entspricht den Anforderungen der EU Richtlinie 1999 5 EG Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences de la directive 1999 5 CE Este aparato satisface las exigencias de las Directiva 1999 5 CE Quest apparecchio conforme ai requisiti delle direttiva 1999 5 CE Dit apparaat voldoet aan de eisen van de richtlijn 1999 5 EG Este equipamento obedece s exig ncias da directiva 1999 5 CE Denna utrustning uppfyller kraven enligt direktiv 1999 5 EC Dette udstyr overholder kravene i direktiv 1999 5 EF Dette produktet oppfyller kravene i direktiv 1999 5 EC T m laite t ytt direktiivi 1999 5 EY EEOTALO G aut q Odnyiac 1999 5 EE rou Eupwraikou KotvoBouAtou kat Tou ZuuBouA ou cihaz Parlamentosu Konseyi Direktifi 1999 5 nin gerekliliklerine uygundur Toto je v souladu s pozadavky sm rnice r
104. button ae Hep The preview image will appear If you placed the original on the document glass select Flatbed for the Paper source f you placed the original in the SPF select Document Feeder for the Paper source and specify the original size in Page size Ahan de pu oam arant E E m B caer E o TTT f an SPF is not installed on your machine the Paper source menu will not appear f you select Document Feeder for the Paper source and click the Preview button the top original in the SPF is previewed The previewed original is sent to the original exit area so you will need to return it to the SPF before starting the scanning job To view Help for a setting click the button in the upper right hand corner of the window and then click the setting 4 Click the Scan button e Scanning begins and the image is acquired into Paint Use Save in your application to select a file name and folder for the scanned image and save the image To cancel scanning after the Scan button has been clicked click the Cancel button or press the C key c or CA key on the machine operation panel SCANNING FROM THE SCANNER AND CAMERA WIZARD WINDOWS XP The procedure for scanning with the Scanner and Camera Wizard in Windows XP is explained here The Scanner and Camera Wizard lets you scan an image without using a TWAIN compliant or
105. by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment This operation manual is also used for the AR M162 J AR M207 J Notes Considerable care has been taken in preparing this manual If you have any comments or concerns about the manual please contact your nearest SHARP Service Department This product has undergone strict quality control and inspection procedures In the unlikely event that a defect or other problem is discovered please contact your dealer or nearest SHARP Service Department Aside from instances provided for by law SHARP is not responsible for failures occurring during use of the product or its options or failures due to incorrect operation of the product and its options or other failures or for any damage that occurs due to use of the product The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications PRODUCT CONFIGURATIONS This product series consists of the models indicated below The product configuration varies by model The explanations and illustrations in this manual generally use the AR M207 with the optional RSPF installed Appearance Copying speed Paper trays Optional trays 250 sheet paper feed unit AR D24 16 copies min One 250 x 1 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit AR D25 20 copies min Two 250 x 2 With the RSPF installed
106. cancelled If the memory becomes full while scanning the second page or a following page scanning stops In this case you can either press the C key to cancel the transmission or press the OK key to transmit only those pages which were completely scanned 24 BASIC OPERATIONS Quick On line When you use the SPF to send a multi page document and there are no previously stored jobs waiting or in progress and the line is not being used the machine dials the destination after the first page is scanned and begins transmitting scanned pages while the remaining pages are being scanned This transmission method is called Quick On line When a quick online transmission is being performed the message display shows READING DIALLING COMM SENDING in that order until scanning of the remaining pages is completed When all pages have been scanned READ END appears before the above messages appear If the receiving party is busy the quick online transmission will change into a stored transmission job memory transmission See Storing transmission jobs memory transmission on page 24 If the memory becomes full during a quick online transmission If the memory becomes full while scanning the first page of a document the transmission job is automatically cancelled If the memory becomes full while scanning the second page or a following page those pages which were completely scanned will be transmitted function in the key ope
107. card shot function cannot be used in combination with margin shift edge erase dual page copy 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy and XY zoom copy When card shot is used the rotation copy function does not operate Place the original on the document B Press the OK key glass OK CARD SHOT SIZE inch cw 3X gt The card shot screen appears The default values for the length and width that initially appear when this screen is displayed can be set in the key operator programs CARD SHOT DEFAULT in the ORIG SIZE ENTER Key operator s guide PAPER SIZE SET y DISPLAY CONTRAST Select X width with the V or A The special function nen will appear key and enter the width with the 4 or gt key and then do the same for the H Press the OK key length Y e CARD SHOT S au inch 5 AIF m ERASE EEIDUAL PAGE COPY The special modes Any number from 1 to 8 1 2 25 mm to 210 screen will appear f Note mm can be entered for the width and any number from 1 to 8 1 2 25 mm to 210 Select CARD SHOT with the V or mm can be entered for the length A key I a SPECIAL MODES Press the OK key j E 2in1 4in1 OK You will return to the base screen ICARD SHOT OK ADJUST T1 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS Press the START key The front side of the card is scanned g Turn the ori
108. cases where you need to send multiple images in one transmission try such measures as lowering the resolution mode Original image samples The original images shown below are samples to help you understand the above explanations Note that these images are smaller than the actual originals the actual originals are 8 1 2 x 11 or A4 Text original A Photo original B 36 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS There are several settings where the IP address must be entered or checked To check the IP address of the machine hold down the status button on the network expansion kit at least 2 seconds to print out a Printer Setting List Status button How to reset the network expansion kit To reset the network expansion kit power on the machine while holding down the status button on the network expansion kit Network scanner destination information and scanning settings will remain after the network expansion kit is reset however the network settings and network printer settings will revert to the factory default settings 37 5 SPECIFICATIONS For information on power requirements power consumption dimensions weight and other specifications that are common to all features of the machine refer to the Operation manual for general information and copier Type Color scanner Scanning resolution Primary scanning x Secondary scanning 75x75 100x100 150x150 200x200 300x300
109. checkbox A checkmark in the checkbox 1 indicates that YES is selected No checkmark indicates that is selected Note key operator programs that can be accessed depend on the machine and the options that are installed Mode Program Settings Explanation NETWORK ENABLE DHCP YES NO Enable this setting if the machine will use an IP address that is assigned by a DHCP server If DHCP is used the IP address assigned to the machine may change automatically on occasion If this happens printing will not be possible Change the port setting of the printer driver to the new IP address IP ADDRESS SETTINGS P ADDRESS SUBNETMASK DEFAULT GATEWAY If the machine will be assigned a permanent IP address use these settings to enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway t SPECIAL SETTINGS page 33 ENABLE TCP IP Select whether or not TCP IP protocol will be used ENABLE NetWare Select whether or not NetWare protocol will be used ENABLE EtherTalk Select whether or not EtherTalk protocol will be used ENABLE NetBEUI Select whether or not NetBEUI protocol will be used PRINTER NOTICE PAGE Select whether or not a Notice Page page 36 is printed when printing is not successful due to a memory full or other error FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT When no tray has the specified size of paper this setting is used
110. click the Continue Anyway or Yes button Click the Close button This completes the installation 17 SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable scanning from the operation panel of the machine To scan using the operation panel of the machine Button Manager must be linked with the destination that appears in the display Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to machine scanner events 2 If computers connected to both of the USB ports on the machine separate Button Manager settings are required for USB 1 and USB 2 when the dual function board is installed WINDOWS XP Click the start button click Control B Select Start this program and then Panel click Printers and Other select Sharp Button Manager G from Hardware and then click Scanners the pull down menu and Cameras HA Psiperties mi 2 Click the SHARP AR XXXX icon and EET REEE select Properties from the File 38 AMA menu coed H In the Properties screen click the Events tab 4 Select SC1 from the Select an eres event pull down menu A Pc perce 7 6 Click the Apply button H Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to link Button Manager to SC2 through SC6 Select SC2 from the Select an event pull down menu Select Start t
111. code sub address and passcode for F code confidential reception and a print passcode to print out received faxes are programmed in each box Up to 10 boxes can be programmed To check the contents of a programmed box print the following list PRINT REPORT SUB ADD SET LIST Page 81 To program an F code confidential box follow steps 1 through 6 on page 74 and then follow the steps below Select an unused box with the V or A key 1 Enter name for the F code confidential box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 S A CONF BX NAME Up to 36 characters can be entered for the name A box name must be entered Press the OK key OK itl Enter a sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 3 and 4 on page 65 PROGRAMMING Enter passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 5 and 6 on page 65 Enter the print passcode 4 digits with the numeric keys ENTER CONF CODE 0000 9999 The characters X and cannot be used The print passcode cannot be omitted Take care not to forget the programmed print passcode If you forget the passcode consult your Sharp dealer Press the OK key OK 75 PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMING AN F CODE RELAY GROUP This procedure is used to program an F code relay group box for rel
112. copying onto a paper size larger than 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 8 1 2 x 11 A4 the image will not be rotated 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A3 B4 A4 A4R and AS It Rotation of the image can be disabled in the key cannot be used for other sizes operator programs when reducing or enlarging a original See the Key operator s guide f the message Image edge loss is displayed part 2 Press the PAPER key to select the of the original image may be cut off desired tray If the bypass tray is selected Set the number of copies and press aeoe wem automatic ratio selection cannot the START key JC be used COLORMODE REf TION ADDRESS FORMI PROGRAM RE ADDRESS BROAD 0 9 WXYZ cancel automatic ratio selection press the AUTO key again When copying from the SPF automatic ratio selection mode will automatically disable after the START key is pressed and the original is scanned MANUAL RATIO SELECTION PRESET COPY RATIOS ZOOM a Place the original in the document 2 Press the ZOOM key feeder tray or on the document glass BURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO OUTP MODE RESOLUTION A ESS FORMAT ORIGINAL SS BROADCAST ORIGINAL Copy ratios that can be selected will appear H Select a preset ratio with the V or A key or set the ratio zoom with the lt 4 or gt key A key Select a larger preset rati
113. cover hold the Roller rotating 1 Be careful not to tear the misfed If the message does not clear check knob paper during removal again to make sure that no pieces of paper remain fusing unit is hot Do not touch the fusing unit when removing misfed paper Doing so may cause a burn or injury Do not touch the photoconductive drum green portion when removing the misfed paper Doing so may damage the drum and cause smudges on copies 31 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE Misfeed in B Open the front cover Lift the fusing unit release levers Push gently on both ends of the front cover The message A Clear paper path will be cleared and copying will be possible H Lower the right and left fusing unit When closing the front cover gently hold release levers and remove the misfed both ends paper When closing the side cover hold the handle f the message does not clear check again to make sure that no pieces of paper remain 2 Turn the roller rotating knob in the B Close the front cover and the side direction of the arrow cover Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal The fusing unit is hot Do not touch the fusing unit when removing misfed paper Doing so may cause a burn or injury Do not touch the photoconductive drum green portion when removing the misfed paper Doing so may damage the drum and cause smudges on copies Take care not
114. current copy run stops 2 If you press the INTERRUPT key when auditing mode is enabled Enter your account number will appear in the display Enter your account number using the numeric keys The pages copied during interrupt copying will be added to the count The interrupt copies will be offset from the of the entered account number See the previous copies Offset function Key operator s guide The offset function can be disabled in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide 2 When the copy run stops remove the A Copies made before the interrupt previous original s and place the copy job original s of the interrupt copy job B Interrupt copies C Copies made after the interrupt 3 Select copy settings as needed Soules When the copy job is finished press 5 INTERRUPT key to end interrupt mode and remove the original s The INTERRUPT indicator will turn off indicating that the interrupt function is no longer operating The copy settings will automatically revert to the settings selected for the copy run before the run was interrupted g Replace the previous original s and press the START key The interrupted copy run will resume 63 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS This chapter explains convenient copy functions that can be used when the dual function board 9 is installed Select convenient copy functions after pressing the COPY key
115. document feeder tray Return the originals to the document feeder tray and press the START key MISFEED IN THE BYPASS TRAY ll remove the misfed paper from the bypass tray The message A Clear paper path will be cleared and copying will be possible Grasp the side cover handle gently open and close the side cover WM 2 If the message does not clear check again Note to make sure that no pieces of paper remain 30 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE MISFEED IN THE MACHINE To remove a paper misfeed from the machine the bypass tray and then the side cover must be opened Check whether the misfeed occurred in A B or C below and then follow the misfeed removal procedure for that location 1 Open the bypass tray and then the 2 Determine where the misfeed side cover occurred If paper is misfed here go to Misfeed in B page 32 Location C If paper is misfed here go to Misfeed in C page 33 Location A If paper is misfed here go to Misfeed in A below Misfeed in A Open the front cover H Close the front cover and the side cover SSS Push gently on both ends of the The message A Clear paper front cover to open it path will be cleared and copying will be possible Turn the roller rotating knob in the 2 When closing the front cover gently hold 2 direction of the arrow to remove the both ends misfed paper iu the side
116. eie e ote 45 Q Quick on line 101 Quick on line transmission 25 110 R Rapid diallirig costes edes 16 Rov PER 103 Readc end iiss nsi GR Here ce 19 R call set etre 102 Recall setting 102 Received data print condition 104 Receiving party is 25 ad e 28 Automatic reception 28 Remote 61 Redialling eret tees 16 Relay Machine 5 ernia tnn 58 Relay request machine 58 Remote 61 98 Ros con Sot eignet ec 100 Resolution selecting 15 Ring timeout in auto 24 4 2 108 Rotate ceca se 100 S Scanning area of 12 Searching for a destination 21 Self diagnostic 89 Send mode nee ee eodd 101 Sender information ssssssssssssss 42 Sender s
117. for such purposes as distributing a report to company branches Up to 200 destinations can be selected When transmission to all destinations has been completed the document is automatically cleared from memory f you frequently use broadcasting to send faxes to the same group of destinations it is convenient to program those destinations into a group key Group key dialling is an automatic dialling function whereby multiple destinations Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and full fax numbers entered with the numeric keys are programmed into a Rapid key The procedure for programming group keys is explained on page 62 When a group key is used to send a fax the fax is broadcast transmitted to the destinations programmed in the group key For example if five destinations are programmed in a group key and the key is pressed for a broadcast transmission the broadcast transmission will have five destinations Sender PAPER COPY 2 SIDED SELECT RATIO IMAGE OUTPUT COPY RS JC JI Successive F RESOLUTION ADDRESS oe ransmission Destination 11 recipient 1 Select the broadcast The document is scanned transmission function into memory l Destination recipient Reception NS icis inne ee ead ne Coase cp 32 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC Press the OK key and then select the PROCEDURE FOR SENDIN
118. for additional information Area Country Name and Telephone Number U S A Sharp Electronics Corporation Sharp Plaza Mahwah NJ North Telephone number for information 1 800 237 4277 Emergency telephone number 1 800 255 3924 Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd Telephone number for information 905 890 2100 Emergency telephone number 1 800 255 3924 Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY Ltd Oceania No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N S W Telephone number for information 1300 13 50 22 Germany Sharp Electronics Europe GMBH Sonninstrasse 3 20097 Hamburg Telephone number to access MSDS 040 2376 2185 For more information 040 2376 2613 United Sharp Electronics U K Ltd Kingdom Telephone number for information 08705 274 277 France Sharp Electronics France S A Telephone number for information 01 49 90 34 00 Austria Sharp Electronics GMBH Europe Telephone number for information 01 727 19 0 Italy Sharp Electronics Italy S P A Telephone number for information 02895951 Spain Sharp Electronics Espana S A Telephone number for information 93 581 97 00 Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B V Telephone number for information 30 6359500 Sweden Sharp Electronics Nordic AB Telephone number for information 08 634 36 00 Switzerland Sharp Electronics Schweiz AG Telephone number for information 01 846 6111 Middle U A E
119. for receiving faxes 2 Date and time display automatic reception and manual reception This This shows the date and time shows the currently selected reception mode 3 Transmission mode display page 23 8 Original display page 14 There are three transmission modes memory transmission direct transmission and manual transmission This shows the currently selected This displays an icon to indicate the original scanning mode when an original has been placed transmission mode One sided original scanning in the SPF Document glass Two sided original scanning in the RSPF This also shows the size of the placed original 4 Exposure display page 15 This shows the exposure for scanning the original that has been selected with the RESOLUTION key 5 Resolution display page 15 This shows the resolution for scanning the original that has been selected with the RESOLUTION key The following functions operate even when copy mode is selected Automatic reception including F code confidential reception Timer Transmission Memory polled function Transmission of stored memory transmission jobs Voice calls voice calls can be answered but not placed Remote reception Manual reception Relay station function for F code relay broadcast transmission 10 BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCTION AUDITING MODE Accounts that can transmit faxes up to 50 can be established and transmission time and other informa
120. function machine is equipped standard with a USB 1 1 port and a parallel port A computer can be connected to these ports to use the machine as a printer or a scanner To use the machine as a printer or scanner the printer driver or scanner driver must first be installed as explained in the Software setup guide The scanning feature is only available when the computer is connected to the USB port and is running Windows 98 Me 2000 XP If the computer is running Windows 95 NT 4 0 or is connected to the parallel port only printing is available 10 MAIN FEATURES Fax function option Installation of the optional facsimile expansion kit enables the plain paper Super G3 laser fax function to be used Network connection option The optional network expansion kit AR NB3 can be installed to enable the machine to be used as a network printer and network scanner Environment and people friendly design Preheat and auto power shut off modes are provided to reduce power consumption when the machine is not in active use A universal design has been implemented in the product whereby the height of the operation panel and shape of the keys are designed to be usable by as many people as possible 11 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT This chapter contains basic information required for use of the machine Please read this chapter before using the machine PART NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5
121. in a different orientation than the paper the print image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to enable correct printing on the paper Other than the bypass tray When the dual function board is not installed Be sure to set each tray s paper size in Set Tray Status in the Configuration tab of the printer driver setup screen See CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER in 8 TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION in the Software setup guide When printing be sure to specify a tray other than Auto Select in Paper Source in the Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER SOURCE SETTINGS There are two bypass tray settings in Paper Source in the Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen When Bypass Tray is selected the print job is automatically printed on the paper in the bypass tray When Bypass Manual is selected the print job is not printed until paper is inserted into the bypass tray If paper is already in the bypass tray remove the paper and then re insert it to begin printing 4 THE PRINTER DRIVER FROM THE START BUTTON To change the printer driver settings follow the steps below Settings adjusted in this way will be the initial settings when you print from an application If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time of printing the settings will revert to the initial settings when you qu
122. is received or scanning is begun from a computer While auto power shut off is in effect pressing a key other than a mode key will have no effect 2 The preheat mode activation time and the Auto power shut off timer can be changed the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide 17 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT Default settings The machine is set at the factory to return all settings to the default settings one minute after a copy job is finished auto clear function or when the CA key is pressed When the settings return to the default settings any functions that were selected are canceled The auto clear time can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide In the default state the display shown below appears The default state of the display may vary depending on settings in the key operator programs Ready to copy The screen is that of the AR M207 when the RSPF is installed LOADING PAPER The message TRAY Add paper will be displayed when there is no copy paper in the selected paper tray lt gt is the tray number Load paper in the indicated paper tray PAPER The specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays are shown below Paper tray Paper type Paper size Capacity Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray of 250 sheet paper feed unit Tray of 2x 250 sheet paper feed unit Standard paper
123. key c or CA key on the machine nothing will appear in the preview Screen 6 Scan button Scanning in some regions Click to scan an original using the selected settings Before clicking the Scan button make sure the settings are correct To cancel a scanning job after the Scan button is clicked press the Esc key on your keyboard or the C key c or CA key on the machine 7 Close button Click to close the scanner driver setup screen 5 Preview screen 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 Preview window Click the Preview button in the Set up screen to display the scanned image You can specify the scanning area by dragging the mouse inside the window The inside of the frame that appears when you drag the mouse will be the scanning area To cancel a specified scanning area and clear the frame click anywhere outside the frame Rotate button Click to rotate the preview image 90 degrees clockwise This allows the orientation to be corrected without resetting the original Upon scanning the image file is created in the orientation shown in the preview window 4 5 Image Size button Click this button to open a dialog box that allows you to specify the scanning area by entering numbers Pixels mm or inches can be selected for the units of the numbers By initially specifying a scanning area numbers can be entered to change that area
124. key or dial a Speed Dial number a group key cannot be used To clear a mistake when entering a number with the number is indicated by an icon and a number To clear an entry press the C key 56 8 Press the OK key g Enter the sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys WXYZ 0 9 Characters that can be entered are numbers and spaces However the initial character cannot be a space f you make a mistake press the C key and re enter the correct digit s If you specified a Rapid key or Speed Dial number in step 7 that has a sub address programmed the sub address will appear Go to the next step without entering a sub address Press the OK key Enter the passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys WXYZ o a e Characters that can be entered are numbers and spaces However the initial character cannot be a space f you make a mistake press the C key and re enter the correct digit s If you specified a Rapid key or Speed Dial number in step 7 that has a passcode programmed the passcode will appear Go to the next step without entering the passcode Press the OK key Press the START key e Scanning begins If you are scanning from the document glass and have another page to scan change pages and press the START key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the key TRANSMISSIO
125. keys disabled by pressing the OK key once again to clear the checkmark After making the selection go to step 9 If a checkbox does not appear by a program press COPIER the OK key to display the settings screen for the PRINTER program J i L7 8 Press the OK key and follow the X will appear for each digit will enter instructions in the program screen The mode selection screen will appear OK To use another program for the same mode select the desired program with the V or A key To use a program for a different mode press the BACK key and select the desired mode Press the CA key to exit the key operator programs 33 4 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING If a problem or question arises try to solve the situation using the following information before contacting your authorized SHARP dealer Image transmission problems are explained here For image scanning problems see the Operation manual for general information and copier Problem Cause and solution The scanned image is clipped The original scan size setting is smaller than the actual original size Set the actual original size page 26 If you have intentionally set a smaller size than the actual original size place the original taking into account the guides for the set original size For example if the actual size is 8 1 2 x 11 A4 and you selected 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 for the size sett
126. long narrow glass dirty Clean the document glass or the scanning glass for the SPF CLEANING THE MACHINE in the Operation manual for general information and copier Transmission does not take place at the specified time Is the machine s clock set to the correct time Setthe clock to the correct time DATE amp TIME SET on page 99 Printing does not take place after reception Does an error message appear regarding adding paper replenishing toner or a misfeed This means that printing is not possible Restore printing capability as instructed by the display message Printing will begin WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED on page 88 A received fax prints out blank Was the wrong side of the original scanned in the transmitting machine Check with the operator of the transmitting machine The received image is faint Is the original faint Ask the other party to re send the fax using a suitable exposure setting The received image is distorted Were line conditions poor due to thunder or another reason Ask the other party to send the fax again A dial tone is not heard through the speaker Is the volume set to low Set the speaker volume to middle or high SPEAKER VOLUME on page 97 The machine does not ring Has the ringer volume been turned off Set the ringer volume to low middle or hi
127. machine bears the expense phone charges of polling transmission Polling memory This feature allows your machine to automatically send a document previously scanned into memory when another machine calls and polls your machine 2 Permits polling of 1 Polling request transmission 4 Document data is automatically sent to other machine 3 Document data previously scanned into memory The machine that requests transmission bears the expense phone charges of the call 36 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS USING THE POLLING FUNCTION When used in conjunction with the timer transmission function page 34 only one polling job can be stored 2 If the other machine is using polling security see Restricting polling access polling security page 41 your fax number sender s number must be programmed in the key operator programs see OWN PASSCODE SET on page 96 and your number must also be programmed in the other machine Fax mode press the SPECIAL B Press the OK key FUNCTION key NOW When the SPECIAL OK FUNCTION key is pressed the e special function menu appears To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 6 Enter the fax number of the other machine with the numeric keys press a Rapid key or specify a Speed Dial 2 Select SENDING OPTIONS with the number a group key cannot be used To clear a mistake when Y or A ad entering a full number with the SPECIAL FUNCTIO
128. manual for general information and copier The dual function board mentioned in this manual can be installed as an option on some models and is installed standard on other models For more information see 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES of the Operation manual for general information and copier Trademark Acknowledgments e Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation e Macintosh Power Macintosh Mac OS LaserWriter and AppleTalk are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc Agfa and the Agfa Rhombus are registered trademarks of Agfa Gevaert A G All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product impr
129. no pieces of paper remain 33 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE 4 MISFEED IN TRAY 2 2 Make sure that there is misfed paper in the tray before pulling it out Page 31 Also use the following procedure to remove misfeeds that occur in the 250 sheet paper feed unit and the 2 x 500 sheet paper feed unit the side cover B Gently push tray 2 into the machine Grasp the handle to open the Push the tray in completely side cover Remove the misfed paper Be careful not to tear the misfed paper during removal 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit AR D25 H If there was no misfed paper in step 2 pull out tray 2 and remove the misfed paper CN Be careful not to tear the misfed Side cover J paper during removal ENA L Re 4 ceny close the side cover STIL T The message Clear paper E 4 Si path will be cleared and copying will be possible 2 If the message does not clear check again to make sure that no pieces of paper remain 34 REPLACING THE CARTRIDGE When the toner replacement icon 2 appears little toner remains Obtain a replacement cartridge as soon as possible When the message A Add toner Can not copy or print appears in the display the toner cartridge must be replaced before copying can be resumed Follow the steps below to replace the toner cartridge progress may appear and copying will stop even though toner remains The m
130. of the paper can Document Style be printed on 1 Sided To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select 2 Sided 2 Sided Book Book or 2 Sided Tablet from Document Style in the Main tab 2 Sided T ablet To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 Pamphlet Style Tiled Pamphlet Paper sizes that can be used for two sided printing are Ledger Letter Legal Foolscap A3 A4 A5 B4 and The bypass tray cannot be used for two sided printing The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper Printing result 2 Sided Book 2 Sided Tablet Print data 12 The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the side they can be bound at the top PRINTING FROM WINDOWS Pamphlet style Pamphlet style prints two pages each on the front and back of each sheet of Document Style paper four pages total on one sheet so that the sheets can be folded down the O 1 Sided center and bound to create a pamphlet 25 ded Book This function is convenient when you wish to compile printed pages into a pamphlet gt LO 2 Sided T ablet To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select Tiled LAPO Pamphlet Style Pamphlet or 2 Up Pamphlet in Document Style in the Main tab Tiled Pamphlet wv The direction of opening of the pamphlet can
131. operating systems other than Windows XP Server 2003 and then SHARP Printer Monitor Select Help Administration Utility Select Help CHANGING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR SETTINGS Once installed the Printer Status Monitor normally runs in the background in Windows If you need to change the Printer Status Monitor settings follow the steps below Right click the Printer Status B Change the Printer Status Monitor Monitor icon on the task bar and settings as desired select Preferences from the pop up menu If the Printer Status Monitor icon does not appear on the task bar see STARTING UP THE PRINTER UTILITIES to start the Printer Status Monitor For information on the Printer Status Monitor settings see Printer Status Monitor Help Click the Help button in the preferences window F8 Preferences Sorter Status update Point netfication m be SHARAP moda E Hide detal F Delad Cem e PRINTER UTILITIES WINDOWS CHECKING THE PRINTER STATUS The Printer Status Monitor allows you to check whether or not toner and paper remain in the machine Right click the Printer Status Bg Check the current status of the printer Monitor icon on the task bar and in the screen that appears If you wish select SHARP AR XXXX Status from to know more detailed status the pop up menu information click the Detail button Tere Tool
132. paper select or auto image function has been selected In this case the image of the original will be rotated To use the bypass tray select it manually Do not place originals of different sizes together in the document feeder tray This may cause misfeeds 46 The center tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets 150 sheets when the job separator tray kit is installed About one minute after copying ends Auto clear page 18 activates and restores the copy settings to the default settings The setting for Auto clear can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide To cancel a copy job in progress press the C key Differences in copy conditions may cause the position of the printed copy image to vary even the copies are of the same original on the same paper For more information see Points concerning the position of the printed copy image on page 47 4 Set the number of copies B Press the START key to begin copying The copies are delivered to the center tray The default output mode for copying from the SPF is sort mode Page 64 The output mode can be changed using the automatic sort selection setting in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide The center tray can hold a maximum of 250 sheets 150 sheets when the job separator tray kit is installed About one minute after copying ends Auto clear page 18 activates and
133. port USB 2 2 Interface cables Parallel cable Shielded bi directional IEEE1284 cable max length 10 feet 3 m Please purchase a commercially available parallel cable USB cable Shielded twisted pair cable max length 10 feet 3 m Please purchase a commercially available USB cable For connection to the USB 2 0 port the cable must support USB 2 0 1 Print speed during printing of the second sheet and following sheets when using 8 1 2 x 11 A4 plain paper and performing continuous one sided printing of the same page excluding use of offset output 2 When the dual function board is installed 32 SPECIFICATIONS Scanner specifications Type Flatbed color scanner Scanning method Document glass SPF RSPF Light source Cold cathode fluorescent lamp Resolution Basic 600 dpi x 600 dpi Setting range 50 dpi 9600 dpi Original types Sheet media books Effective scanning area 11 45 64 297 mm Lengthwise x 17 431 mm Width Scanning speed Color Black and White light source color selected 2 88 msec line Grayscale Black and White 0 96 msec line Scanning colors Black and white 2 value Grayscale Full Color Protocol TWAIN WIA Windows XP only STI Interface port USB 1 1 port USB 1 USB 2 0 port USB 2 When the dual function board is installed Drop out color Yes Supported operating systems Windows 98 W
134. program that has not been stored or clear the program page 73 and then select it 7 Press the OK key 8 Enter a program name see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 PROGRAM NAME ABCDE Up to 36 characters can be stored for the name of the program A program name must be entered g Press the OK key PROGRAMMING Select the program that you wish to 8 Edit the program name see store with the V or A key ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 CS See step 8 of STORING A PROGRAM If you do not wish to edit the program name go to the next step X CANCEL START ENTER 9 A transmission method cover sheet message resolution exposure settings dual pages sender s name and transmission settings be stored Select the stored setting that you wish transmission method must be stored The storing to edit with the V or A key procedure cannot be completed unless a See steps 10 and 11 of STORING A transmission method is stored PROGRAM For the procedures for selecting each of the settings If you do not wish to edit the stored settings refer to the explanations of the settings press the START key and then press the To cancel a setting selection select the setting that BACK key to exit you wish to cancel and then press the key Some sett
135. quantity of data and a prolonged scanning time When selecting the scan preferences lower the resolution or specify a suitable scanning area The scan resolution will vary depending on the scanning area and how much memory in the machine is free For example if a letter or A4 original is scanned in full color at 300 dpi with only the standard memory installed the machine will scan the original in full color at 150 dpi and the scanner driver will enhance the resolution to 300 dpi To scan a ledger or A3 original in full color at 600 dpi without using enhancement the dual function board and the 256 MB memory option are required When you ready to begin scanning click the Scan button Scanning begins and the image is acquired into the application that you are using In the application assign a file name and save the file To cancel a scanning job after the Scan button has been clicked press the Esc key on your keyboard or the C key c or CA key on the operation panel 17 5 SCANNER DRIVER SETTINGS The scanner driver setup screen consists of the Set up screen which lets you select scan settings and the Preview screen which shows the scanned image For details on the scan settings click the Help button in the preview screen to display Help Set up Screen 1 1 2 Press T aces Fs nube Scanning Position menu Scanning S
136. ratios zoom 52 Normal copying Copying from the document glass 45 Copying from the 46 One sided copies of two sided originals 60 Placing the original Document glass 2 2 242 2 4 4 2 45 46 Reducing or enlarging a copy 52 Removing the document cover 47 Selecting the original size 50 Selecting the tray 2 49 Setting the number of copies 49 Two sided copies of two sided originals 59 Two sided copies using the bypass tray 61 Two sided copying of one sided originals 57 Using the bypass tray to copy a special size original 51 XY zoom copying decetero eed 54 Copying starting Document glass 45 cle 46 Troubleshooting Misfeed removal Bypass eet re ede 30 In the 31 aiio aec feeit desde de nd 29 Tray du ERE EE 33 Auc 34 PrODIOITE iiie e ene et cete ts 25 85 gt
137. reception from the programmed fax numbers the ANTI JUNK FAX setting must be enabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key Select ENTER JUNK FAX with the V or A key and then press the OK key 2 3 4 Select ENTER with the V or A key and then press the OK key b Enter a 2 digit control number from 01 to 50 with the numeric keys to identify the fax number that will be entered in the next step and then press the OK key 6 Enter the fax number that you wish to block with the numeric keys and then press the OK key To delete a number follow these steps Before deleting a number use the LIST PRINT program on page 95 to check the control number that identifies the fax number 01 to 50 that you wish to delete The control number must be entered to delete the fax number The fax number will not appear in the display If the wrong control number is accidentally entered a fax number other than the fax number that you wish to delete will be deleted 1 Select DELETE in step 4 and then press the OK key 2 Select the 2 digit control number 01 to 50 that identifies the fax number that you wish to delete with the W or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select DELETE with the Y or A key and then press the OK key POLLING SECURITY These settings are used for the
138. rerit teneri 68 Mu Sep 28 Misfeed remowval eese 29 a Bypass tray inneren 30 the 444 1 42424222 31 Ee aay ee 29 e Tray Tunesien exits 33 e PRAY catio Rn es 34 N Normal copying Copying from the document glass 45 Copying from the 46 Numeri Keys i tne edo ecient 14 Offset f nction 5 ee 63 65 OK n rabie en 14 ONLINE 14 Operation in copy print scan and fax modes 16 Operation 12 14 Original 2 13 46 Original 22411 29 OUTPUT KGy eii o pecie Poi Here tee 15 P RH etg dug dian 18 PAPER KOY 15 Parallel ports iet e Certes 12 Part names and functions 12 Photoconductive drum 22 4422 13 POoWet Off iiae cete deeds 17 uo igo e 17 Power save modes sse 17 eret enel 12 17 Preheat mode 1 17 Press the INTERRUPT 63 PRINT key indicator 2 14 Problemi etie ar ERU ER RULES 25 Product configurations 22422 3 R READ END 1
139. saving the image and then click the Next button JPG BMP TIF or PNG can be selected for the format To begin scanning click the Next button 4 When scanning ends the following screen will appear Select the next task you wish to perform and then click the Next button If you are ready to end the session click Nothing I m finished working with these pictures tg Se ee umm ins H Click the Finish button The Scanner and Camera Wizard closes and the scanned image is saved in the specified folder 22 SCANNING USING THE KEYS ON THE MACHINE The procedure for scanning using the SCAN key is explained in the following When scanning is performed by this method the previously specified application will automatically start and the scanned image will be acquired into the application Scanner mode cannot be used in the following situations A problem has occurred in the machine such as a paper misfeed or an open cover The key operator programs are being used The tray paper size is being set During copying or printing During scanning of an original for a fax transmission when the fax option is installed f the machine is in copy mode press the SCAN key to switch to scanner mode and clear the previously set copy settings The following applications have been set at the factory Place the original s that you wish to scan for e
140. scale Document glass scale wait until the machine has ai 5 returned to normal operation r S Va and then place the original E When transmitting a small original such as a postcard be sure to press the ORIGINAL SIZE key and set the original size Page 14 The difference between 4 8 1 2 x 11 A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R This manual uses both 4 8 1 2 x 11 and A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R to indicate paper and original sizes The R is used to distinguish the orientation of originals and paper R is used for this purpose for other sizes as well Example Difference between the orientations of A4 8 1 2 x 11 size and A4R 8 1 2 x 11 R size 4 8 1 2 x 11 indicates an original placed as 8 1 2 x 11 R indicates an original placed as follows follows Vertically oriented Horizontally oriented Top Top o Document feeder tray Document glass Document feeder tray Document glass CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed the original size is automatically detected Stand b 100 automatic original detection function and displayed in the original display Make sure Y that the size has been detected correctly MAY 10 MON 10 25 1 When an original is placed an icon appears to indicate the original scanning mode AZ MEMORY amp AUTO
141. select whether or not the machine will automatically re attempt the call if the transmission fails due to a line error Normally the machine is set to make 1 recall attempt at intervals of 1 minute If you do not wish to have recalling take place set the number of attempts to 0 steps 6 and 7 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select RECALL SET ERR with the V or key and then press the OK key If you do not wish to change the recall interval setting go to step 6 4 Select RECALL INTERVAL with the V or A key and then press the OK key D Enter the recall interval 00 to 15 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key The recall interval can be set from 0 to 15 minutes After finishing step 5 if you do not wish to change the number of recall attempts press the BACK key to exit 6 Select RECALL TIMES with the V or A key and then press the OK key 7 Enter the number of recall attempts with the numeric keys and then press the OK key The number of recall attempts can be set in each country are shown in the following table Country Differentiation Table United Australia and Kingdom New Zealand The number of 0to5 Oto 1 recall attempts If you do not wish to have recalling take place set the number of attempts to O f the recall interval is se
142. select the paper tray for which the paper size is being changed Example Tray 2 O PAPER SIZE SET 111 8 11 Jem 5 1 gt PAPER SIZE SET ox BERE 1175 xui 84x13 v 84x11 The cursor moves to the paper size selection position on the right 6 Press the V or A key to select the paper size Example Selecting 8 1 2 x 14 size o PAPER SIZE SET 11x17 H17 NA 82 13 v 87 11 To change the size of another paper tray press the 44 key and then repeat steps 4 to 6 7 Press the OK key OK A message asking you to confirm the new paper size setting will appear 8 Press the OK key OK The selected paper size will be stored and the display will return to the base screen Affix the paper size label for the paper size selected in step 6 to the label position on the right end of the tray 21 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT DISABLING ENABLING AUTO TRAY SWITCHING When auto tray switching is enabled and paper runs out during copying or printing the job will continue using paper from a different tray if that tray has the same size of paper in the same orientation This function does not operate when using the bypass tray or when a fax is being printed This function has been enabled at the factory If you prefer to disable the function follow the steps below Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key B
143. set up Button Manager 11 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE INSTALLATION METHOD 3 Use this procedure to install the software in the following environments 1 The printer is connected by USB cable 2 Windows version Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Note install this software you must have administrator s rights 1 Make sure that the USB cable is not connected to the machine If the cable is connected a Plug and Play window will appear If this happens click the Cancel button to close the window and disconnect the cable f Note cable will be connected in step 11 E Insert the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine into your computer s CD ROM drive H Double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon Follow steps 4 through 7 in INSTALLATION METHOD 2 B If you wish to install the MFP driver click the MFP Driver Printer Scanner button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button Suse es I Cuse de 0 ed zi Ge g Click the Next button 12 The files required for installation of the MFP driver are copied if MFP Driver was selected in Step 5 Follow the on screen instructions When you
144. the E 3 FAX key If auditing mode has been enabled for the fax function in the key operator programs a message will appear prompting you to enter your account number when you switch to fax mode Enter your account number 5 digits with the numeric keys See ACCOUNT CONTROL on page 98 Bg Place the original s in the document feeder tray or on the document glass Using the SPF page 13 Using the document glass page 13 If you are using the document glass to send multiple pages place the first page first 2 You cannot place originals both in the and on the document glass and send them in a single fax transmission Check the original size If the original is not a standard size or the size was not detected correctly press the ORIGINAL SIZE key ORIGINAL SIZE AUTO 2 SIDED IMAGE OUTPUT COPY FORMAT BROADCAST When the ORIGINAL SIZE key is pressed the size selection screen appears See MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE page 14 to set the original size If needed adjust the resolution and exposure settings Page 15 PAPER COPY EXPOSURE SELECT RATIO To adjust the resolution and exposure settings press the RESOLUTION key See SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS on page 15 18 B Dial the fax number GHI JKL 0123456789 R MEMORY amp AUTO STANDARD The entered number appears in the message display Up to 50 di
145. the F code standard as established by the ITU T Operations such as relay broadcast transmission and confidential transmission previously could only be performed with another Sharp fax machine however F Code communication makes it possible to perform these operations with fax machines of other manufacturers that support F Code communication Before using the functions explained in this chapter make sure that the other fax machine supports F Code communication and has the same functions as your machine Note that the other machine may use different names for some functions The ITU T is a United Nations organization that establishes communications standards It is a department of the International Telecommunication Union ITU which coordinates global telecommunications networks and services BOXES AND SUB ADDRESSES PASSCODES REQUIRED FOR F CODE TRANSMISSION Boxes can be created in the memory of fax machines that support F Code communication These boxes are used to store faxes received from other machines and documents to be transmitted when a polling request is received Up to 30 boxes can be created for a variety of purposes and a name can be assigned to each box A sub address that indicates the box s location in memory must be programmed and if desired a passcode can also be programmed to control access to the box A sub address must be programmed however a passcode can be omitted 7732123 Sub address location in memo
146. the RSPF and the Single pass feeder as the SPF Unless specific mention is made both the RSPF and the SPF are referred to simply as SPF Wherever appears in this manual please substitute your model name for XXXX n some regions the Key operator s guide cited in this manual is a separate manual and in other regions the Key operator s guide is included in the Operation manual for general information and copier The Dual function board cited in this manual can be installed as an option in some models and is pre installed standard in other models For detailed information please refer to 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES in the Operation manual for general information and copier Trademark Acknowledgments Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Macintosh Power Macintosh Mac OS LaserWriter and AppleTalk are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Acrobat Reade
147. the correct FTP server information is configured in the Web page The size of the scanned image file exceeds the limit set in Maximum Size of E mail attachments in the Web page Reduce the number of original pages scanned into the file or change the limit set in Maximum Size of E mail attachments The memory became full during scanning Scan less pages lower the resolution or change the color mode so that the file size is smaller and try scanning again The maximum number of destinations of a global address search has been exceeded Increase the number of search characters to narrow the range of the global address search IF YOUR E MAIL IS RETURNED If a Scan to E mail transmission is not successful an e mail informing you of this fact is sent to the return address configured in the SMTP server If this happens read the e mail and determine the cause of the error and then repeat the transmission 35 TROUBLESHOOTING IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO E MAIL Be careful not to send image data files that are too large Your mail server s system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission If this limit is exceeded the e mail will not be delivered to the recipient Even if there is no limit and your e mail is successfully delivered a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden on the recipient s network depending on t
148. the paper well before loading it The guides on the bypass tray do not match the width of the paper Adjust the bypass guides to the size of the loaded paper The bypass tray extension is not pulled out When loading a large size of paper pull out the bypass tray extension The bypass paper feed roller is dirty Clean the roller 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 paper is loaded in tray 2 or in the 250 sheet or 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 size paper must be loaded in tray 1 or the bypass tray Problem TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE Cause and solution The original size is not automatically selected or the copy is not made on paper that matches the size of the original Was the SPF or document cover opened completely when the original was placed on the document glass Open the SPF completely and then place the original on the document glass Close the SPF or document cover The original is curled or folded The original size cannot be correctly detected if the original is curled or folded Straighten the original The original has many solid black areas If the original includes solid black areas the original size may not be detected automatically Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key and select ORIG SIZE ENTER to specify the original size The machine is directly exposed to sunlight Install in a location that is not exposed to sunlight
149. then connect the cable Turn the machine power on first and then turn on your computer The machine is found and a plug and play window appears If you are using a parallel cable go to step 16 If the following message appears on your computer screen close it r 2 HE MPTED Pain iplis ius GEI 7 5 papri rere mr 6E PTT 1 romala mcn na If a warning message regarding the A window regarding HI SPEED USB aution Windows logo test appears while the MFP Device will then appear Close the window driver files are being copied the warning This message appears when the machine s message may appear several times be USB mode is not set to Hi Speed mode sure to click the Continue Anyway button For information on switching the USB 2 0 mode see the Key operator s guide When The installation of the SHARP software is SHARP AR XXXX will appear in the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box Select Install the software automatically Recommended click the Next button and follow the on screen instructions Click the Button Manager or Next If a warning window appears regarding the Sharpdesk button Windows logo test be sure to click the To view information on the software click the Continue Anyway button Display Readme button Follow the on screen instructions In
150. three times in a row During that time operation of the machine will not be possible 19 SENDING AN IMAGE BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE E Make sure the machine is in scan B If needed select the resolution setting mode page 27 RESOLUTION 100dpi When the SCAN indicator is lit the machine is in scan mode EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM If the indicator is not lit press the SCAN key If auditing mode has been enabled for the scan function in the key operator programs a message will appear prompting you to enter your account number when you switch to scan mode Enter t number five digits with th i d 6 If needed select the format page 28 2 Place the original s the document FORMAT feeder tray or on the document glass i i Q For detailed information on placing an original see 4 60 LINE DATA COPY EX The initial factory setting is 150dpi COPY FUNCTIONS of the Operation manual for p general information and copier MULTI If you are using the document glass to send multiple ALL PAGES 1FILE pages place the first page first The initial factory setting is PDF 2 You cannot place originals in both the document feeder tray and on the document 2 Information on the destination can be glass and send them in a single transmission stored in the Web page The sender name is normally set to the name stored in Rep
151. to access this screen Page 14 These settings should only be configured by the network administrator For explanations of each of the items click Help in the menu frame 1 Network Scanning the menu frame The Network Scanning setup page appears Functinn Submit Prot 150 2 Select the transmission methods that you wish to use Select the scanner delivery methods that you want to use In the Enable Scanner Delivery to field click the checkbox next to each method that you want to use so that a checkmark appears in the checkbox All transmission methods are initially selected factory default settings Simming tu Scanner Detvery icc mr ikera mas raai mE imeem Shee off Alecia Pie namin habe mimi Sub peci H Configure the Advanced Setup settings Select advanced functions that can be used for Scan to E mail If you wish to BCC a copy of a Scan to E mail transmission to an e mail address select the Bcc checkbox and enter the e mail address 12 4 Set a limit for the size of image files To prevent the transmission of excessively large files by Scan to E mail you can set a size limit If the image file created from the scanned image is larger than the set limit the image file is discarded The limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB in increments of 1 MB The factory default setting is Unli
152. to one or more These are used to select items and move through recipients using Scan to E mail or Scan to FTP pages the FORMAT key enables you to temporarily override the individual file format settings file 18 START key This is used at the following times 1 When starting transmission 2 When scanning an original 8 When configuring and storing settings type compression mode stored for each recipient and send the image to all of the recipients using a single file format setting 14 ORIGINAL SIZE key page 26 This is used to set the size of the original to be e When the auto power shut off function Hense f Note activates all lights except the mode key 15 DUPLEX SCAN key page 25 indicators go off For information on auto Press this key to use the duplex scan function power shut off see the Operation when the RSPF is installed manual for general information and copier 16 SPECIAL FUNCTION key For information on the keys and indicators This key is used to select a special transmission which are used for the copy function and function configure function settings and access other functions see OPERATION the key operator programs PANEL in the manual for each function 17 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION SCAN MODE BASE SCREEN The base screen of scan mode is displayed by pressing the SCAN key from the base screen of copy mode print mode or fax mode Base screen
153. to select whether or not the print job will be printed on the closest size of paper OUTPUT TRAYS CENTER TRAY UPPER TRAY Specifies the output tray When the printer driver is used to print the setting in the printer driver has priority This setting is only available if a job separator tray is installed USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS BASIC PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING SETTINGS Follow the steps below to access the key operator settings for the network and printer functions d Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key 6 Press the OK key PRINTER VINOTICE PAGE The special function screen OK will appear FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT v OUTPUT TRAYS The settings of the Select KEY OPERATOR PRG with 2 mode will the V or A key m 7 Example The above screen shows the settings when SPECIAL FUNCTION printer mode is selected PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST 7 Select the desired program with the TOTAL COUNT V or A key e A checkbox appears to the left of several of the programs To enable a function make a checkmark appear press the OK key To cancel a selection press the OK key once again to remove the checkmark and disable the function Go to step 9 When the OK key is pressed for a program that does not have a checkbox the settings for the program appear The key operator code entry screen will appear Press the
154. to separate sets of copies The offset function can be disabled in the key operator programs See the Key operator s Press the OK key guide You will return to the base Offset function enabled Offset function disabled Screen C C 222 FD copy as needed and press the START key If you placed the originals in the document feeder tray in step 1 copying will start If you selected SORT in step 3 and placed the first original on the document glass follow steps 6 and 7 Note that if you selected NO SORT in step 3 copying will begin 65 COPYING MULTIPLE ORIGINALS ONTO A SINGLE SHEET OF PAPER 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy Multiple originals can be copied onto a single sheet of paper in a selected layout This function is convenient when you wish to present multiple pages in a compact format or show a view of all pages in a document One of two layouts can be selected for 2 in 1 copy and one of four layouts can be selected for 4 in 1 copy Border line selections are solid line broken line or none 4 in 1 copy 2 45 27 5 2 in 1 copy 12 2 l 2 Pattern 1 Pattern 2 54 24 45 42 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 2 in 1 copy layouts 4 in 1 copy layouts
155. via e mail to the administrator of the machine or the dealer Information setup SMTP setup Machine identification information for the status and The status and alert e mail functions use SMTP alert e mail functions is configured in the Information Simple Mail Transport Protocol to send e mail The Setup screen The entered information will be following procedure is used to set up the e mail included in status and alert e mail messages environment This must be done by the system administrator or other person familiar with the network Click Information in the menu frame Services in the menu frame Device Setup The Information Setup r Screen will appear Security The Services Setup screen will appear Genet Proteggi Linie Enter the machine information B Click SMTP For detailed information click the Help button in the upper right hand corner of the window 4 Services Sotup 205 WII NIME ere H Click Submit to store the entered information Enter the information required set up the e mail environment For detailed information click the Help button in the upper right hand corner of the window 4 Click Submit to store the entered information 29 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE Status message setup Alerts message setup Use the status message function to send the current Use the alert message function to send alert counter in
156. when a PostScript error occurs This setting only appears when the PS3 expansion kit is installed When the printer driver is used and the same settings are configured both in the printer driver and in the above screens the settings configured in the printer driver override the settings in the above screens If a setting is available in the printer driver use the printer driver to configure the setting Configuring the printer condition settings Click Condition Settings in the menu Make a selection for the setting in the frame screen that appears Device The Default Settings For detailed descriptions of the condition settings n screen of the Condition see Printer condition settings page 24 Settings appears If you Admin Made wish to select a setting in 4 Click Submit to save the entered the Default Settings information Help screen go to step 3 2 Click the desired setting Condition settings Sema Ez 23 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE Printer condition settings Factory default settings are indicated in bold Default settings Item Settings Description Copies 1 999 This is used to select the number of copies Orientation Portrait Landscape This sets the orientation of the printed page Select Portrait when the image is longer in the vertical direction or Landscape when the image is longer in the horizontal
157. where the original is transmitted directly without being scanned into memory There are two types of memory transmission Storing a transmission page 24 where all pages of the original are scanned into memory before transmission begins and Quick online transmission page 25 where the destination is dialled after the first page is scanned and the remaining pages are transmitted as they are scanned During a memory transmission it may happen that the memory becomes full while the originals are being scanned See If the memory becomes full during transmission of a stored transmission job on page 24 and If the memory becomes full during a quick online transmission on page 25 The number of pages that can be stored in memory varies depending on the content of the pages the transmission settings and whether memory has been added If there are too many pages and memory transmission is not possible you can press the COMM SETTING key to Switch from memory transmission to direct transmission When direct transmission is used transmission begins after the current job is completed allowing you to give priority to a transmission job As such direct transmission is a convenient means of performing an interrupt transmission when there are a large number of stored transmission jobs To switch between memory transmission and direct transmission see the following Faxing by direct transmission 2 When transmission is performed manually using an ext
158. will not be transmitted SELECTING THE COLOR MODE After placing the original you can select an appropriate color mode for the original type Place the original in the document feeder tray or on the document glass steps 1 to 3 on page 20 and then follow the steps below The factory default setting for the color mode is COLOR To change the color mode follow these steps P the ICOLOR COLOR Select this mode for color originals ress the key GRAY Select this mode for a black and white photograph or when a monochrome image is COLOR MODE needed B W Select this mode when you wish to scan a photo in monochrome or when you wish to make text clearer oe The color mode selection Press the OK key screen appears 3 Y ill return to the b 2 Select the color mode with the V or 2 2 screen and the selected mode U i will appear the color mode y The selected mode is display highlighted SELECTING THE RESOLUTION The scanning resolution can be selected After selecting scan mode and placing the original steps 1 to 3 on page 20 perform the procedure below The factory default setting for the resolution is 150dpi e mail FTP mode If you need to change the resolution follow these steps Press the RESOLUTION key Bg Select the resolution with the V or A key RESOLUTION TH RESOLUTION DATA COPY EXPOSURE PAPER SCAN Two sided sc
159. with all applicable rules or order under 76 769 EEC 16 INFORMATION NFPA Rating USA Health 1 Flammability 1 Reactivity 0 WHMIS Legislation Canada This product is not a controlled product List of R phrases R11 Highly flammable References IARC 1996 IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans Vol 65 Printing Process And Printing Inks Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds Lyon pp 149 261 H Muhle B Bellmann O Creutzenberg C Dasenbrock H Ernst R Kilpper J C MacKenzie P Morrow U Mohr S Takenaka and R Mermelstein 1991 Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats Fundamental and Applied Toxicology 17 pp 280 299 The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this product under normal conditions However all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with caution Although certain hazards are described herein we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which exist 78 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 1 4 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 31211 1 PRODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION Product Name Supplier Identification AR 202ND AR 202DV AR 202SD AR 202SD C Black Developer Sharp Corporation 22 22 Nagaike cho Abeno ku Osaka Japan Local suppliers are listed below Please contact the nearest supplier
160. 00 B Continue from step 6 of BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES on page 19 2 cancel broadcast transmission To cancel a broadcast transmission when selecting destinations press the CA key To cancel transmission after the transmission procedure has been completed follow the procedure in CANCELLING A FAX TRANSMISSION page 26 number or group key is indicated by an icon and a number To clear an entry press the C key 33 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME TIMER TRANSMISSION This feature enables you to set up a transmission or polling operation to be performed automatically at a specified time up to a week in advance This is convenient when you will be out of the office or for transmission at off peak nighttime rates A combined total of 50 timer transmission and memory transmission jobs can be stored memory After a timer transmission is performed the information image destination etc is automatically cleared from To perform a timer transmission the original must be scanned into memory It is not possible to leave the original in the SPF or on the document glass and have it scanned at the specified time of transmission The date and time is set in the machine using the key operator programs See DATE amp TIME SET on page 99 Only one polling timer operation can be set up at a time If you wish to set up multiple timer polling operations combine the machines to
161. 00 dpi without using enhancement the dual function board and 256 MB memory option are required You have not specified a suitable value for the B W Threshold setting Ifyou are using TWAIN compliant application and are using White Red Green or Blue for Light Source in the TWAIN driver make sure that the B W Threshold setting is appropriate A larger threshold value makes your output darker while a small threshold value makes it lighter To adjust the threshold automatically click the Auto Threshold button on the Image tab of the Custom Settings or Professional screen Problem Cause and solution TROUBLESHOOTING Poor scanning quality The brightness and contrast settings are not suitable If you are scanning with a TWAIN compliant application and the resulting image has unsuitable brightness or contrast for example it is too bright click the Auto Brightness Contrast Adjustment button on the Color tab of the Custom Settings or Professional screen You can also click the Brightness Contrast button to adjust the brightness and the contrast while viewing the scanned output image on the screen If you are scanning with a WIA compliant application or the Scanner and Camera Wizard click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture or the Custom settings button and adjust the brightness and contrast Quick Scan has been selected With the dual function board insta
162. 06 25 Editing deleting F code confidential boxes 77 F code public polling memory boxes 80 F code relay 79 gt Group 69 Progam S a a i pet etes 72 Rapid Keys aee Iren 68 Speed dial numbers 68 End sound length 2 22 221 97 Enter junK fax 106 Entering characters 82 Exposure 2 2424 4 42 21 15 Extension phone connection 60 F RU er Eaa 10 Fax print hold tao teens 30 Fax reception 103 Fax transmission 4 242 2222 23 Rotate TX shea eds 100 Speed 212121 20 Storing transmission jobs memory transmission 24 Faxing a two sided original 22 F code confidential transmission F code confidential reception 55 F code confidential transmission 55 F code polling memory F code pollirig 53 F code polling
163. 1 The base screen appears The address search screen appears perform another search repeat steps 2 through 8 B Enter the search characters Multiple destinations can be selected for a Scan to E mail transmission Maximum of 20 OR RC To enter characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS Continue from step 9 of BASIC page 31 TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 21 If you make a mistake press the C key to clear the mistake 24 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION TRANSMITTING A TWO SIDED ORIGINAL Follow these steps to automatically transmit a two sided original This is only possible on models that have an RSPF installed 2 Do not use an original that is not a standard size 11 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 11 8 1 2 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B4 A4 AR B5 BSR or A5 Otherwise a scanning error or cut off image may result 1 Make sure the machine is in scan Select 2 SIDED with the V or A mode key When the SCAN indicator is lit the machine is in scan mode If the indicator is not on press the SCAN key If auditing mode has been enabled for the scan function in the key operator programs a message will appear prompting you to enter your account number when you switch to scan mode Enter your account Press the OK key number five digits with the numeric keys Page 19 m 7 The duplex original type 2 Place the original s in the document u
164. 18 2003 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 01211 Chronic Effect In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner a mild to moderate degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92 of the rats in the high concentration 16mg m exposure group and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22 of the animals in the middle 4mg m exposure group but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest 1mg m exposure group the most relevant level to potential human exposures 12 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION No data are available 13 DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS Waste from Residues Waste material may be dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal state and local environmental regulations Contaminated Packaging Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal state and local environmental regulations 14 TRANSPORT INFORMATION UN Classification None Not classified as hazardous for transport 15 REGULATORY INFORMATION US Information TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA SARA Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act Title III 302 Extreme Hazardous Substance None 311 312 Hazard Classification None EU Information 1999 45 EC and 67 548 EEC Symbol amp Indication Not required R Phrase Not required 76 769 EEC All chemical substances in this product comply
165. 2 x 8 1 2 paper to receive faxes load 5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 paper in tray 1 of the machine and set the paper size to A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Only tray 1 can be set to A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size f you receive a fax that is larger than the loaded paper the fax will be automatically reduced before printing or it will be divided and printed on two sheets of paper See RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION on page 104 Note that if the loaded paper is B5 or smaller the width and length of the image may not allow the fax to be printed n fax mode printing is not possible on 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 sizes Among INCH sizes only 8 1 2 x 11 and 8 1 2 x 11 R can be used for printing If your machine uses inch based paper sizes A3 B4 B5 B5R and A5 size paper cannot be used in fax mode Among AB sizes only A4 and A4R can be used for printing f the paper runs out while a fax is being printed printing will automatically continue using the closest size of paper in another tray f you change the size of paper loaded in a tray change the tray s paper size setting Faxes cannot be printed correctly if the actual paper size is different from the paper size setting Be sure to set the tray s paper size setting to the same paper size as the paper loaded in the tray For example if you receive an 11 x 17 size fax when B4 8 1 2 x 14 paper is loaded in the tray and the tray s paper size setting is AS 11 x 17 t
166. 4 22 2 15 Transmission using F codes F code confidential transmission 55 F code pollifig tte 53 F code polling 50 F code relay broadcast transmission 58 Troubleshooting Alarm sounds 2 date Gee Rer 88 Communication activity report viewing 88 Problems and 90 Receiving party is 25 Transaction report is printed 86 Transmission error 25 Warning message is displayed 88 111 AR FX11 SHARP PRINTED IN CHINA TINSE1364QSZZ SHARP NETWORK EXPANSION KIT OPERATION MANUAL for network scanner 1 1 sCONTENTS piers 2 e BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION 3 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION 15 eKEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 32 e TROUBLESHOOTING 34 eSPECIFICATIONS 38 INTRODUCTION The optional network expansion kit AR NB3 enables the machine to be used as a network scanner To use the network scanner function the dual function board AR EB9 must be installed in the machine Use the machine s USB 2 port to conne
167. 5 Reducing or enlarging a copy Automatic ratio 52 Preset copy ratios zoom 52 XY zoom copying 54 Removing the document cover 47 Replacing the toner cartridge 35 Reversing 4 24222111 13 29 Right side COVER nee eene 13 29 Roller rotating 13 31 32 Hotatior 64 One sided copies of two sided originals 60 Two sided copies of two sided originals 59 S SCAN key 14 Selecting the tray esee 49 Setting the number of copies 49 SIde COV f redierit bdo 13 Side cover 13 SPECIAL FUNCTION 15 Specifications 73 el ets 46 Acceptable 47 37 Original misfeed 2 22222 29 Two sided copying of one sided originals 57 Standard 51265 50 START ndiCator octets eate teen 15 START Key rri ode ie ecce 15 46 Storage
168. 50 F code relay broadcast transmission F code relay broadcast transmission 59 F code relay request transmission 59 Forwarding 46 Forwarding 0 4 4222 46 Fw RX data eid ted 105 Ew station Set oe ede de beet exigent 105 G Group diallitig 2 5 16 l Image rotation 2 2 1 2 25 Index print ae hen ea eines 106 Initial 96 Key operator programs 92 L 2 4 LINE STATUS indicator 28 Lithium battery sinensis re eem 5 Long originals 2 ence Eire tet 12 Memory transmission 4424 2 2 24 On hook dialling eene 16 Operation panel sss 8 Original SiZe iode e RUE D M 14 Original Sizo S srini ertet Perte 12 Own number 42 Own passcode 96 P Page counter set cene ettet 101 Paper slZ6S 5 xii BLISS 7 Passcode uu uper ek 48 Pase eee es 18 96 Placing the 2422 41 13 Polling function 36 Polling memory
169. 6 A job number 3 digits appears in the display with READ END when memory transmission is performed If you make a note of this number after performing a broadcast transmission you can use the number to check the results of the transmission in the transaction report or activity report If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while an original is being scanned in the SPF the machine will stop and an original misfeed will occur After power is restored remove the original as explained in ORIGINAL MISFEED IN THE SPF in the Operation manual for general information and copier 19 BASIC OPERATIONS TRANSMISSION BY AUTO DIALLING RAPID DIALLING AND GROUP DIALLING Fax numbers can be dialled by automatic dialling Rapid dialling and group dialling instead of pressing the numeric keys Follow the steps below to send a fax using an auto dial number To use an auto dial number the name and fax number of the destination must first be stored See page 16 for information on auto dialling and page 62 for information on programming auto dial destinations Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES page 18 E Press the Rapid key or group key for the desired destination The name programmed for the group can be displayed by pressing the group key 1234567 BE H Contin
170. 7 FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER 8 ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES 9 PRINTING WATERMARK e 9 OUTLINE OF THE PRINT STATUS WINDOW 10 PRINTER SHARING SHARING THE PRINTER USING WINDOWS gt lt ttes 11 SHARED PRINTER SETTINGS 12 e CLIENT aii siiin 13 SCANNING 15 SCANNING FROM A TWAIN COMPLIANT 16 SCANNER DRIVER SETTINGS 18 SCANNING FROM A WIA COMPLIANT APPLICATION WINDOWS XP 20 SCANNING FROM THE SCANNER AND CAMERA WIZARD WINDOWS XP 21 SCANNING USING THE KEYS ON THE MACHINE Io ee e REA 23 BUTTON MANAGER 24 BUTTON MANAGER SETTINGS 25 N KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST 26 USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 27 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING eee 28 e PRINTING PROBLEMS tranne 28 SCANNING PROBLEMS 30 SPECIFICATIONS PRINT This chapter explains the basic procedure for printing and how to select printer driver settings for various purposes Paper that can be used and the procedures for loadin
171. A FAX PROGRAM RESOLUTION ADDRESS BROADCAST ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCA 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 13 LINE STATUS indicator when the fax option is installed This key is used in fax mode For more information see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit 14 FAX key indicator when the fax option is installed LINE indicator DATA indicator This key is used in fax mode For more information see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit 15 EXPOSURE key Use to select the exposure mode AUTO TEXT or PHOTO be selected Page 48 16 PAPER key Use to manually select a paper tray Page 49 17 ZOOM key Press to select a reduction or enlargement copy ratio Page 52 18 AUTO key Press to have the copy ratio selected automatically Page 52 19 OUTPUT key Only effective when the dual function board is installed Use to select the sort function Page 64 24 25 26 27 20 DUPLEX key only on models that support two sided printing Select the two sided copying mode Page 56 21 Arrow keys Press to move the highlighting which indicates that an item is selected in the display 22 SPECIAL FUNCTION key Press to select special functions 23 ACC C key Press the end the use of
172. ADDRESS BOOK Perform steps 1 to 6 of BASIC B Press the key TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 20 selected destination To cancel the selection press the DESTINATION SELECT the checkmark prise To select multiple v ADDRESS SEARCH an The address selection Press the OK key screen appears OK Press the OK key selected for a Scan to E mail transmission Maximum of 20 Only one destination can be selected for a Scan to FTP or Scan to Desktop transmission 4 LISTSDETATL X SELECT ON OFF Continue from step 9 of BASIC 7 TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 21 4 Change tabs as needed with the 44 or gt key and select the desired a To cancel the transmission while destination with the V or A key Reading appears or before the key is e 4 USER pressed press the C or CA key If the power is turned off or a power failure occurs while a document is being scanned in the SPF the machine will stop and a document misfeed will occur After the power is restored remove the document as explained in ORIGINAL MISFEED IN THE SPF in Operation The USER tab changes as follows each time you manual for general information and press the gt key copier USER S ABCD S EFGHI 2 JKL MN 2 OPQRST S UVWXYZ S USER ABCD To move backwards through the tabs press the lt 4 key You can switch between information on the selected destinatio
173. AKER VOLUME x TX RX END SOUND TX RX END SOUND LENGTH EXTENSION TEL DISTINCTIVE RING REMOTE RECEPTION ACCOUNT CONTROL ACCOUNT SET DATE amp TIME SET AUTO SUMMER TIME SETTING DISABLE FAX PRINT HOLD SENDING FUNCTION RES CON SET AUTO REDUCE TX ROTATE TX PAGE COUNTER SET SEND MODE QUICK ON LINE TX PRINT STATION IN RCVD DATA ACC NAME PRINT RECALL SETTING BUSY RECALL SET ERR RING TIMEOUT IN AUTO TX AUTO COVER SHEET RCV FUNCTION FAX RECEPTION LIGHT RINGS AT RX TRAY SELECTION RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION AUTO RCV REDUCE TO REGULAR SIZE DUPLEX RECEPTION 8 1 2x11 RX REDUCE FW RX DATA RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET INDEX PRINT EARLIER OUTPUT ANTI JUNK FAX ENTER JUNK FAX POLLING SECURITY POLLING SECURITY POLLING PASSCODE MODE 93 PROCEDURE FOR USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs can be accessed from any mode copy fax print and scan mode When the setting is completed you will return to the previous mode Faxes cannot be sent or received while a key operator program is being used key operator program cannot be used while a fax is being sent or received while a voice call is being made or while a received fax is being printed INITIAL PROCEDURE 1 Press the SPECIA
174. ANGING TO ENTRY MODE Open the Rapid key overlay to enter alphabetical characters When the Rapid key overlay is open When the Rapid key overlay is open characters can be entered To toggle between upper case and lower case letters press the SHIFT key 37 3 39 4 SPEAKER REDIAL PAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING K L M N 0 SHIFT SYMBOL SPACE 2 4 When the Rapid key overlay is closed Closing the Rapid key overlay stores characters that have been entered to that point CHARACTER ENTRY KEYS To enter characters use the character entry keys on the operation panel The characters entered by each key and key functions are as follows Character entry key Characters and function A B C D E F G H J K L M N 5 0 V lt lt gt lt N Character entry key SP SHIFT SYMBOL SPACE Numeric C CLEAR a v 4 gt PROGRAMMING Characters and function Use to enter special characters Use to toggle between upper case and lower case letters Use to enter symbols Use to enter a space or a hyphen The display toggles between a space and a hyphen each time you press the key Use to enter numbers 1 through 0 Clears the character selected wit
175. ANNER FEATURE To use the Network Scanner feature settings for the SMTP server DNS server and destination addresses must be configured To configure the settings use a computer that is connected to the same network as the machine to access the machine s Web server The Web page can be viewed with your Web browser Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows 5 1 or later Macintosh or Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later HOW TO ACCESS THE WEB PAGE AND VIEW HELP Use the following procedure to access the Web pages Help can be clicked at the bottom of the menu frame to view information on the various function settings that can be operated remotely over the network from the machine s Web pages For the settings of each function see the explanations in Help ll the Web browser on your Click Help under the menu frame computer H Admin Mibe Supported browsers For an explanation of a Internet Explorer 5 5 or later Windows function or setting in the 5 1 or later Macintosh Web page click the Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later corresponding item in the Help screen 2 the Address field of your Web browser enter the IP address of the machine To check the IP address DEM see CHECKING THE IP 4 Be Edt Mew Feste ADDRESS page 37 When you have finished using the Web page click the close button in the top right corner of the page AMI me 192 188 1 28
176. AX STATUS key H Press the OK key COMM 0123456789 The transmission is cancelled MEMORY TX No XXX When a transmission is in progress the job being i transmitted is displayed note f you do not wish to cancel the If the displayed job is not the job that you wish to Po MES cancel it is likely that the job to be cancelled is the OK press stored job waiting for transmission Press the v You can pees inte BACK key to display the fax status selection screen Activity Report CANCEL will appear in and then follow the procedure in Cancelling a stored the column of the report transmission job on page 27 to cancel the job Additional information on the display When transmission is not in progress the curngliranerussion f Note following fax status selection screen COMM appears 0123456789 FAX STATUS B WESS C P XXX No XXX D TX RX RESERVE v TX RX COMPLETED A Destination name The name of the destination appears if programmed B Transmission method name Press the C key In the case of a timer transmission the timer icon appears at the beginning of the transmission method name Job cancelled C Number of pages currently transmitted Appears during sending D Document number The document number assigned at the time o
177. BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL When the bypass tray is being used for copying and an original that is placed on the document glass is detected as being a special size the display will prompt the user to set the original size To make a copy in this type of situation follow the steps below Load paper in the bypass tray and B Press the OK key place the original on the document glass If SIZE INPUT was selected in step 4 2 Touch the PAPER key and then SILE INPUT __ select the bypass tray SIZE inch M POSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO OK ORIG SIZE 21 PA L I The size entry screen appears and is ready for entry of the width of the original If you selected AB in step 4 the screen will be A message will appear asking you whether you wish to f Note E for you to enter width in set the original size or make the copy without setting it To make a copy without setting the original size press If other than SIZE INPUT was selected in step 4 the START key To set the original size go to You will return to the base screen Go to step 8 step 3 Select X width with the V or A key H Press the OK key 6 and enter the width with the 4 or P key and then do the same for the length Y O SIZE INPUT SIZE inc nch The original size selection screen appears with SIZE INPUT selected
178. CED TRANSMISSION METHODS SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION BROADCAST TRANSMISSION 32 USING BROADCAST TRANSMISSION 33 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AT A SPECIFIED TIME TIMER TRANSMISSION 34 SETTING UP TIMER TRANSMISSION 34 TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION ennt 36 USING THE POLLING FUNCTION 37 USING POLLING MEMORY 39 INCLUDING SENDER INFORMATION ON FAXES 42 A DIVIDED ORIGINAL DUAL PAGE SCAN caren ee e d Let d 43 ADDING A COVER SHEET MESSAGE TO A FAX 5 15510 44 USING SETTINGS STORED AS A PROGRAM 45 45 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES TO ANOTHER MACHINE WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE FORWARDING FUNCTION 46 USING THE FORWARDING FUNCTION 46 4 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MACHINES SUPPORTING F CODES 48 BOXES AND SUB ADDRESSES PASSCODES REQUIRED FOR F CODE TRANSMISSION 48 CREATING A BOX FOR F CODE 5 49 F CODE POLLING MEMORY 50 HOW F CODE POLLING MEMORY WORKS 50 USING F CODE POLLING MEMORY
179. CODES PROCEDURE FOR F CODE POLLING Make sure that a document has not been placed in the document feeder tray or on the document glass and then follow the steps below You must know the sub address SEP and passcode PWD of the other machine s F code polling memory f Note box Serial polling selecting multiple fax machines to be polled using a group key Rapid keys and Speed Dial numbers is not possible when using F code polling 1 In Fax mode press the SPECIAL g Enter the fax number of the other FUNCTION key machine with the numeric keys or When the SPECIAL ress a Rapid key or dial a Speed Dial m NO 7 FUNCTION key is pressed the number a group key cannot be used special function selection To clear a mistake when entering a number with the keys press the C key jj to clear one digit at a time 2 Select SENDING OPTIONS with the A destination selected with a Rapid key or Speed Dial V or A key number is indicated by an icon and a number To clear try the C key SPECIAL FUNCTION an entry press the C key FAX PRINT HOLD Press the OK key TIMER MODE 4 OK H Press the OK key Enter the sub address up to 20 digits with the numeric keys WXYZ 0 8 Characters that can be entered are numbers and spaces However the initial character cannot be a space If you make a mistake press the C key and re enter
180. Check the toner cartridge Check to see if the toner cartridge has been installed properly Remove paper from the output tray The number of sheets in the output tray center tray or top tray has and press OK reached the limit Remove the paper A Load lt x gt paper into tray lt gt The paper size specified for the tray is different from the actual size Page 21 Memory is full The memory became full while scanning the originals Press the START key to copy only the originals that have been scanned or press the CA key to cancel the job X Tray number lt gt Size of paper that should be loaded 28 REMOVING MISFEEDS When a misfeed occurs during copying the message A Clear paper path and the location of the misfeed will appear Check the location and remove the misfeed the machine taking care not to touch the photoconductive drum the green part Any scratches or damage to The paper may tear when you remove a misfeed In this event be sure to remove all torn pieces of paper from ote the surface of the drum will cause dirty copies First check the misfeed location 4 See below Page 31 Page 31 30 Page 33 S Page 34 Page 34 Page 34 Page 34 Misfeed locations in the optional 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit The illustration shows misfeed locations in the AR M207 when the RSPF is i
181. E THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS FACSIMILE Lithium battery A lithium battery in the machine is used to retain settings and programmed information such as auto dial numbers page 62 When the battery dies settings and programmed information will be lost so please keep a record of this information See PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY on page 81 life of the battery is approximately 5 years when the power switch is kept continuously off When the battery dies please contact your local Sharp dealer or authorised service representative for assistance in disposing of this battery The machine will not operate once the battery dies Please note In the event of a thunderstorm remove the power cord from the power outlet to ensure safety Information will be retained in memory even if the power cord is unplugged TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS A FACSIMILE IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The AC power outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the t
182. ECIAL 4 add cover sheet select COVER FUNCTION key SHEET with the 4 or gt key To When the SPECIAL add a message select the desired FUNCTION key is pressed the message with the V or A key special function menu appears select fax mode see step 1 SENDING MENU on page 18 oe mm MESSAGE E CONFIDENTIAL v PLEASE DISTRIBUTE COVER SHEET gt SPECIAL FUNCTION If you do not wish to add a cover sheet select NO CVR SHEET TIMER MODE If you do not wish to add a message select NO SENDING OPTIONS MESSAGE ex LT B Press the OK key H Press the OK key To cancel the cover sheet selection press the key instead of the OK key in step 3 44 USING SETTINGS STORED AS A PROGRAM This function allows you to store the steps of an operation including the destination and scanning settings into a program This function is convenient when you frequently send documents such as a daily report to the same destination Up to nine programs can be stored When storing a program a name maximum 36 letters can be assigned to the program For information on storing editing and deleting programs see STORING EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS on page 72 The following settings can be stored in a program 1 Transmission method Normal transmission page 18 broadcast transmission page 32 polling page 36 serial polling page 38 F code transmiss
183. ECKING THE IP ADDHES 9e c an add nea can din uni 43 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS s eeeeeeeeeeeesee eene entes nnn nnne 43 CONNECTING TO A COMPUTER aine san anus ara eiiam aui aic na uin nn aa aan 44 o INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE BEFORE INSTALLATION HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Before installing the software see HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS on page 43 to make sure your computer meets the hardware and software requirements INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT AND USEABLE SOFTWARE The software that can be installed varies depending on your operating system version and type of connection to the machine MFP Driver Button Printer driver Scanner driver Manager Sharpdesk Windows 98 Me 2000 XP USB 2 0 connection Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP Parallel connection Available Available Available Available 2 3 Not Available Not Available Available 4 1 Windows 98 Me does not support USB 2 0 A USB 2 0 connection can be used in Windows 98 Me however the performance will be the same as USB 1 1 The print speed based on USB 2 0 specifications can only be attained if your computer is running Windows 2000 XP you are using a cable that supports USB 2 0 and the cable is connected to a USB 2 0 port on your computer If the connection is made through a hub the hub must support
184. ER FUNCTION VARIOUS SERVER SETTINGS The procedures for using Quick Setup are explained here Quick Setup is used to quickly configure only the required settings for SMTP DNS and LDAP servers These settings are normally configured first SMTP server SMTP is used to transmit e mail that is sent using Scan to E mail or Scan to FTP Hyperlink To use these transmission methods your SMTP server settings must be configured DNS server If you entered a host name in Primary SMTP Server or Secondary SMTP Server of SMTP you must also configure your DNS server settings You will also need to configure your DNS server settings if host names will be entered in Hostname or IP Address when storing destinations for Scan to FTP Scan to FTP Hyperlink or Scan to Desktop LDAP server If mail addresses are managed on your network by an LDAP server the e mail addresses stored in the LDAP server can be used for Scan to E mail To allow the machine to use the e mail addresses in the LDAP server the LDAP server settings must be configured in the Web page Configuring SMTP DNS and LDAP server settings HT Click Quick Setup in the menu frame When you completed all of the entries click Submit The entries will be stored Hetwork Setup Sep E Enter the required information in SMTP DNS and LDAP For explanations of each setting click Help in the upper right hand corner of the window
185. ERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES in the Operation manual for general information and copier e f you are using Windows XP you also select WIA SHARP AR XXXX to scan using the WIA driver SCANNING FROM A WIA COMPLIANT APPLICATION WINDOWS XP page 20 Depending on your system SHARP MFP TWAIN G 1 0 32 32 or WIA SHARP AR XXXX 1 0 32 32 may appear the E x above select source screen Click the Preview button Select Acquire Image from the File menu The preview image will appear The scanner driver setup screen will appear DUCENTE EDEN reset the original and click the Preview button again f the preview image is not oriented correctly click the Rotate button in the preview screen This rotates the preview image 90 degrees clockwise allowing you to correct the orientation without resetting the original x Preview screen page 19 f you inserted multiple pages in the SPF the machine previews only the top page of the originals and then sends it to the original exit area Return the previewed original to the SPF before starting the scanning job 16 5 id Specify the scanning area and select the scan preferences For information on specifying the scan area and selecting the scan preferences see scanner driver Help t SCANNER DRIVER SETTINGS page 18 Scanning a large area at high resolution results in a large
186. ES LI MARGIN SHIFT IN The edge erase settings screen will appear B Press the OK key OK ADJUST OK ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST The function screen appears with SPECIAL MODES The edge erase settings selected screen will appear H Press the OK key g Select the desired erase mode with the V or A key O EDGE CENTER or EDGE CENTER can be ERASE selected EFIDUAL PAGE COPY The special modes screen will appear 69 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 4 Select the erasure width with the lt d or gt key O If you select 0 0 mm the printed result is the same as Q when OFF is selected 8 Press the OK key OK You will return to the base screen g Select other copy settings as needed and the START key To cancel an edge erase setting return to the edge erase settings screen and select OFF 70 CARD SHOT When copying a card this function allows you to print the front and back sides of the card next to each other a single sheet of paper This function creates 2 in 1 images of the front and back side of the card and centers them on the paper Original Copy CARD CARD Front of card ni CARD Back of Example Example Portrait Landscape 8 1 2 x 11 size 8 1 2 x 11 size Paper cannot be fed from the bypass tray
187. Factory default settings are indicated in bold Mode Program Settings Explanation SCANNER DISABLE USB SCAN YES NO Select whether or not scanning from a computer and scanning from the machine are disabled when a USB connection is used When YES is selected USB scanning is disabled INITIAL COND COLOR MODE This is used to change the FORMAT default settings for the color mode format and resolution RESOLUTION For more information see STORING SCANNING SETTINGS page 26 32 USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key B Select the desired mode with the V or A key MODE SELECT KEY OP CHANGE COPIER PRINTER The special function screen will appear Press the OK key 2 Select KEY OPERATOR PRG with g t 2 SCANNER SPECIAL FUNCTION BADI SABLE USB SCAN PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST he V or A key TOTAL COUNT The settings of the selected mode will appear H Press the OK key Example The screen when SCANNER is selected Enter key operator Select the desired program with the V or A key KEY OPERATOR CODE The key operator code entry screen appears If a checkbox appears to the left of the program name the program is enabled by pressing the OK Enter the key operator code with the key to make a checkmark appear The program is numeric
188. G FAXES next destination by entering a full fax page 18 number or pressing an auto dial key After entering a full number with 2 Press the BROADCAST key the numeric keys press the OK key to complete the entry ENTER STATION If you pressed an auto dial key in step 3 it is not necessary to press the OK key You can immediately press another auto dial key for the next destination Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select the remaining destinations COPY AUTO 2 5 RATIO IMAGE OUTPUT The destination selection If you need to delete a number for which Screen appears Note entry has already been completed by pressing the OK key use the lt q or gt H Enter a full fax number with the ieee a numeric keys or press an auto dial If the selected destinations exceed the key Rapid key Speed Dial number or display range of the message screen group key to select the first M and check the destinations destination Page 20 Destinations can also be selected using To clear a mistake when the address directory and the REDIAL entering a full number with the key Note however that the REDIAL key 7 jnumeric keys press the C key can only be used to select the first to clear one digit at a time destination it must be used before any other destinations are selected If you use two group keys that have 50 stations each the total number of destinations entered will be 1
189. G MODE nnm 19 SENDING AN IMAGE 20 BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE 20 SELECTING A DESTINATION USING THE ADDRESS KEY nim im 22 TRANSMITTING A TWO SIDED ORIGINAL 25 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL 26 STORING SCANNING SETTINGS 26 MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING cid 26 SELECTING THE COLOR MODE 27 SELECTING THE 27 SELECTING THE FILE 28 SETTING THE LIGHT SOURCE COLOR 29 ADJUSTING THE THRESHOLD VALUE 29 ENABLING SCANNING MARGINS VOID AREA ELE 30 IMAGE ORIENTATION AND STANDARD ORIGINAL PLACEMENT ORIENTATION 31 ENTERING CHARACTERS 31 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 3 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST 32 USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 33 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING ssssssssssssssssessssssessessees 34 MAXIMUM 35 DISPLAY 35 IF YOUR E MAIL IS RETURNED 35 IMPORTANT POINTS WHEN USING SCAN TO E MAIB iere ae 36 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS 37 SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION When the n
190. INT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume Note that if the AUTO TRAY SWITCHING setting is selected in the PAPER SIZE SET accessed by pressing the SPECIAL FUNCTION key and there is the same size of paper in another tray the machine will automatically switch to the other tray and continue printing PAUSING A PRINT JOB To pause a print job press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and then select OFFLINE with the key The machine pauses the print job and then goes offline To cancel a print job press the C key c e To resume printing select ONLINE with the A key WHEN PAPER SOURCE IS SET TO AUTO SELECT If Paper Source is set to Auto Select in the Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for a print job is not loaded in the machine the printing procedure will vary depending on the FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT setting page 31 in the key operator programs When FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is disabled Add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume When FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is enabled The closest size of paper in a tray other than the bypass tray will be used for printing If the print image is in a different orientation than the paper the print image will be automatically rotated 90 f Note deg
191. IO 30 o POWER OFF 17 o MISFEED IN THE MACHINE 6 31 LOADING 18 MISFEED IN TRAY 1 33 O PAPER ct 18 MISFEED IN TRAY 2 34 19 REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGE 35 1 us CHECKING THE TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT 36 e DISABLING ENABLING AUTO TRAY CLEANING THE MACHINE 37 220 000000 22 CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND AUDITING MODE eene 23 SPF DOCUMENT 37 e NUMBER OE AGCOUNTSIRORUDISING CLEANING THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED Er 23 pu 37 USING AUDITING 23 CLEANING THE TR ANSEER CHARGER ee ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST 39 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 40 REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER SINGLE PASS 41 250 SHEET PAPER FEED UNIT 2 X 250 SHEET PAPER FEED 41 DUAL FUNCTION 42 STORAGE OF 42 PROPER 5
192. ION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FAX STATUS BACK OK DEF 1 3 GHI INO 4 6 PORS WXYZ PAPER COPY 2 SIDED 7 9 COPY EXPOSURE SELECT RATIO IMAGE OUTPU COPY ae 3L 9I CLA vm ar E RESOLUTION ADDRESS enm JRIGINAL SIZE UPLEX SCAI 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 14 MODE SELECT keys step 1 on page 18 21 DUPLEX SCAN key page 22 These are used these keys to change modes Press this key to use the duplex scan function 15 FAX key FAX indicator LINE indicator DATA indicator 22 SPECIAL FUNCTION key Press to switch to fax mode The base screen of This key is used to select a special transmission fax mode will appear in the display or reception function configure function settings The LINE indicator lights up during transmission and to store auto dial numbers or reception of a fax When a fax has been received the DATA indicator blinks When there is fax transmission data in memory the DATA indicator lights up 24 START key 18 PROGRAM key page 45 This is used at the following times Press this key to use a program 1 When starting transmission 17 RESOLUTION key page 15 2 When scanning an original This key is used to select resolution and 3 When starting manual reception 4 exposure settings When configuring and storing settings 23 Arrow key
193. ION Each received image is printed at actual size when possible When not possible the image is automatically reduced before printing e DIVISION Each received image is printed at actual size If necessary the image is split onto multiple sheets of paper 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select REDUCTION or DIVISION with the V or A key and then press the OK key AUTO RCV REDUCE TO REGULAR SIZE When you receive a fax that includes the sender s name and number the received image is slightly larger than the standard size This setting lets you select whether or not the received image is automatically reduced before printing to fit the standard size Normally this setting is enabled Standard sizes are sizes such as A4 and B5 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select AUTO RCV REDUCE TO REGULAR SIZE with the V or key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled f this setting is disabled no reduction and the recei
194. ION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select 8 1 2x11 RX REDUCE with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is turned on and a checkmark appears in the checkbox If this procedure is performed when the setting is turned on the checkmark is cleared and the setting turned off Reduction takes place when the setting is turned on and does not take place when the setting is turned off If this setting is turned off part of the image may be cut off FW RX DATA This setting is used to select whether or not received faxes are forwarded to a fax machine programmed as explained in RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET page 105 in the event that the machine cannot print the faxes The setting is initially disabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select FW RX DATA with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled This program only operates when the fax Note number of the machine that is to receive the forwarded faxes is programmed RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET When a problem prevents the machine from printing a received fax the fax forwarding
195. ITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select EXTENSION TEL with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox If this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled 97 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS DISTINCTIVE RING This program can only be activated in Australia and New Zealand If multiple telephone numbers have been assigned to your telephone line the number called can be identified by its ringing pattern By using one number for voice calls and another number for faxes you can tell which type of call you are receiving by the ringing pattern You can set your machine to automatically receive faxes when your fax number is called by setting the pattern that corresponds to your fax number Six selections are available Normally OFF is selected 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select DISTINCTIVE RING with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Select STANDARD or one of PATTERN 1 to PATTERN 5 with the V or A key and then press the OK key REMOTE RECEPTION Only when an extension phone is connected When a call is received on an extension phone connected to the machine fax reception can be activated by entering a 1 d
196. If you pressed the START key you will return to step 7 If you wish to store another Rapid key or Speed Dial number repeat steps 7 to 13 If you have finished storing auto dial numbers press the BACK key f you pressed the OK key go to the appropriate page for the option that you wish to program To program F code settings see F code settings which follows To select CHAIN DIAL go to Chain Dialling on page 65 To set the TRANSMISSION SPEED go to Transmission speed setting on page 66 To set the INTERNATIONAL TRANSMISSION MODE go to International transmission mode setting on page 66 About the setting options When storing and editing Rapid keys and Speed Dial numbers you can also select the setting options below Chain dialling cannot be combined with any of the other setting options When you select a setting option a checkmark appears in the setting option screen uw A sub address and passcode can be stored for F code communication See below Chain Dialling e You can enable or disable Chain Dialling for a Rapid key or Speed Dial number Page 65 e Transmission speed You can set the transmission speed to 33 600 bps maximum speed 14 400 bps high speed 9600 bps middle speed or 4800 bps low speed The initial setting is 33 600 bps maximum speed Page 66 International transmission mode The international transmission mode ca
197. K 0FF amp ON 2 Scanned original size Transmitted document A3 Two A4 pages A4R Two A5 pages Inch based machine Scanned original size Transmitted document 11 x 17 Two 8 1 2 x 11 pages 8 1 2 x 11 R Two 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 pages Dual Page Scan is selected when a checkmark appears in the DUAL PAGES checkbox To cancel the selection when a checkmark appears press the OK key in the next step so that a checkmark does not appear Press the OK key B Place the original on the document glass page 13 and perform the transmission operation If you have more originals to scan after pressing the START key and scanning the first original change originals and press the START key Repeat until all originals have been scanned Press the key See steps to 8 of Using the document glass on page 19 43 ADDING COVER SHEET MESSAGE A FAX TRANSMISSION This function automatically attaches an A4 8 1 2 x 11 cover sheet to your fax transmissions The cover sheet shows the date and time the destination name the sender s name and fax number and the number of pages in the transmission A message can also be added to a transmission One of the following messages can be selected CONFIDENTIAL PLEASE DISTRIBUTE URGENT PLEASE CALL BACK IMPORTANT Your machine The receiving machine Cover sheet no messa
198. L Follow the steps below to automatically transmit both sides of a two sided original This is only possible on models that have an RSPF installed Do not use an original that is not a standard size A3 B4 A4 A4R A5 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R A4 A4R if the machine uses inch based paper sizes Otherwise a scanning error or cut off image may result 1 Make sure that the machine is in fax mode 257 When the machine is in fax LRE DEA Copy Mode the FAX key indicator is dlit If the indicator is not on press the FAX key If auditing mode po has been enabled for the fax L function in the key operator programs a message will appear prompting you to enter your account number when you switch to fax mode Enter your account number five digits with the numeric keys See ACCOUNT CONTROL on page 98 Place the original s the document feeder tray See USING THE SPF on page 13 H Check the original size ORIGINAL SIZE FORMAT soia POLSA When the ORIGINAL SIZE key is pressed the size selection screen appears If the original size was not correctly detected see MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE page 14 and set the correct original size Press the DUPLEX key 2 SIDED E OUTPUT COPY The duplex mode selection screen appears Booklets and tablets CA key is pressed
199. L FUNCTION key B Select FAX with the V or A key 1 C SPECIAL FUNCTION PRINTER SCANNER Select KEY OPE PRG with the V To use a key operator program for copy mode select g or A key COPIER SPECIAL FUNCTION Press the OK key DISPLAY CONTRAST TOTAL COUNT OK KEY OPE PRG Select setting for the desired H Press the OR Key program as explained on the following pages Programs for the following functions are available LIST PRINT SET page 95 INITIAL SETTING page 96 SENDING FUNCTION page 100 RCV FUNCTION page 103 POLLING SECURITY page 107 Enter the five digit key operator code With tha keys Press the key to exit the i programs O m To move back to the previous screen press the BACK key To cancel a program before it is completed press the CA key See ENTERING CHARACTERS page 82 for the procedure for entering letters As you enter each digit changes to X f make a mistake press the C key and re enter the number f this is the first time you are programming the key operator code enter the factory default code See KEY OPERATOR CODE NUMBER FACTORY SETTING in the Operation manual for general information and copier 94 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE FAX FUNCTION LIST PRINT SET This program is used to print lists showing cu
200. LECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE page To make a copy of a small original such 50 as a card follow the procedure in USING THE BYPASS TRAY TO COPY A SPECIAL SIZE ORIGINAL page 51 To use the bypass tray select it manually 4 Set the number of copies If you are making two or more copies each of multiple original pages you can select the sort function to collate the copies into sets Page 64 45 COPY FUNCTIONS B Press the START key to begin copying The copy will be delivered to the center tray Copying from the SPF Open the SPF and make sure that an original has not been left on the document glass Gently close the SPF Adjust the original guides to the size of the original s H Place the original s face up in the document feeder tray The original size appears in the display and the most suitable paper size is automatically selected Insert the stack into the document feeder tray until it stops f the original is a non standard size or the size was not detected correctly see SELECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE page 50 e If the auto paper select function has been disabled in the key operator programs see the Key operator s guide use the PAPER key to select the desired paper size To copy onto paper of a different size press the PAPER key and select the desired paper size different orientation from the original may be selected if the auto
201. LESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING If the software does not install correctly or if you need to remove the software check the following items on your computer Troubleshooting information can also be found in the README files for each of the software programs To view a README file for a software program click the Display Readme button in the software selection window that appears during installation Removing the software To remove a printer driver or a utility that has been installed using the installer follow the procedure below Windows environment MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 the start button and then click Control Panel 1 Insert the Software CD ROM 1 into In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 click the your CD ROM drive Start button select Settings and then click Control Panel Double click the CD ROM icon 7 on the desktop and double click the 2 Click Add or Remove Programs Mac OS folder In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 Double click the Installer icon 5 double click the Add Remove Programs icon H Select the driver or utility that you Select Remove from the Install menu wish to remove from the list and click and then click the Remove button the appropriate button to remove it There is no remove tool for Mac OS X e For more information see the manual or help The PPD file for Mac OS X has been copled files for your operatin
202. M drive H Double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon Follow steps 4 through 7 in INSTALLATION METHOD 2 ae od 5 If you wish to install the driver 9 When the interface selection screen click the MFP Driver Printer Scanner appears select Parallel and click the button Next button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button ILI IS ul ll Sabe Lowe I Del Estas Lo Pree 5 lhe orre i ieia gt A RD Me qum cl z CETTE E antics Iz g Click the Next button 14 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE EI m E Select the printer port and click the Click the Sharpdesk button Next button Select LPT1 for the printer port To view information on the software click the Display Readme button Follow the on screen instructions 2 n Windows 95 4 0 the Button Manager button does not appear Lii Bei COP irum arid cipi 88 n iii imni Fui n Windows 98 2000 do not select the Button Manager button Button Manager ee is not supported when a parallel cable is used When the Finish screen appears um c 17 click the Close button If LPT1 does not appear another printer or When Now co
203. MMING AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL BOX step 12 on page 75 Editing an F code confidential box step 18 on page 78 PROGRAMMING AN F CODE RELAY GROUP step 12 on page 76 Editing an F code relay group step 15 on page 79 PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES step 12 on page 77 Editing an F code public box step 15 on page 80 Press the OK key When you press the OK key you return to the option setting screen and a checkmark appears to the left of F CODE To cancel the F code setting press the x key to remove the checkmark Return to step 13 page 64 PROGRAMMING Chain Dialling To set an auto dial number as a Chain Dial number complete steps 1 through 13 on pages 62 to 64 and then follow the steps below When a number is set as a Chain Dial Note number the destination fax number entered in step 8 on page 63 can be up to 48 digits long Select CHAIN DIAL with the V or A key OTHERS GUB ADDRESS START ENTER f checkmark appears to the left of CHAIN DIAL it is already selected To exit press the START key 2 Press the OK key OK e Select ON or OFF with the V or A key CHAIN DIAL Z If chain dialling was already selected in step 7 and you wish to cancel the selection select OFF 4 Press the OK key OK After you select and press the OK key you will return to the option set
204. N 4 Select the desired exposure with the 4 or gt key highlighted Use this setting for originals with normal size text like the text in this manual STANDARD Use this setting for originals with small letters or detailed drawings The original will be scanned at twice the resolution of Standard Use this setting for originals with intricate drawings or diagrams A SUPR LUE higher quality image will be produced than with the Fine setting Use this setting for originals with intricate drawings or diagrams This setting gives the best image coe quality However transmission will take longer than with the other settings Use halftone if your original is a FINE HALF photograph or has gradations of TONE colour such as a colour original S FINE HALF This setting will produce a clearer TONE image than FINE SUPER FINE U FINE HALF or ULTRA FINE used alone When halftone is selected transmission will take longer To set the exposure next press the 44 or key and go to step 4 RESOLUTION When the 44 or gt key is pressed the exposure display changes from AUTO to a 5 step display screen and the selected resolution will appear in the resolution display o RESOLUTION e STANDARD To select a light setting for a dark original such as a newspaper press the 44 key to move the setting toward 11 T
205. N AUDITING MODE Mode Number of accounts Remarks Same for copy print Copying printing and scanning counts are managed 50 maximum and scan modes under one account number Fax 50 maximum Fax counts are managed under one account number The same account number can be assigned to 1 and 2 USING AUDITING MODE When auditing mode is turned on the account number entry screen is displayed Enter your account number five digit identification number as explained below before performing a copy fax or scan operation Enter your account number account fax mode you can change to fax mode Enter your account after completing the copy operation and continue with the fax operation without number re entering your account number E ACCOUNT ITEM If you enter an account number for copy mode that has not been programmed for fax mode enter your account number for fax mode after you press the FAX key to As the account number is entered the hyphens change to fax mode change to asterisks X If you enter an incorrect een pelle essor number is eneret in digit press C key and re enter the correct digit step 1 the account number entry screen When a valid account number is entered the current fth t will in th When ACC SECURITY see the Key count of the account will appear in the message operator s guide in the key operator Enter your account number
206. N JU keys press the C key FAX PRINT HOLD TIMER MODE SPECIAL FUNCTION jj to clear one digit at a time A destination selected with a Rapid key or Speed Dial number is indicated by an icon and a number To clear an entry press the C key H Press the OK key OK Select POLLING with the V or A Press the START key key Polling reservation has been SENDING OPTIONS set appears in the screen After communicating with the other machine your machine prints the received fax SERIAL POLLING SUB ADDRESS TX 2 To cancel the operation During communication Cancel as explained in Cancelling a fax transmission on page 26 While the job is stored Cancel as explained in Cancelling a stored transmission job on page 27 37 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS Serial polling When performing serial polling an auto dial key that includes a sub address or passcode page 48 cannot be selected 1 Perform steps 1 to 3 of the polling procedure page 37 2 Select SERIAL POLLING with the V or A key SENDING OPTIONS POLLING About the steps that follow See steps 5 to 8 of the polling procedure page 37 Before pressing the START key in step 8 repeat steps 6 and 7 for each machine that you wish to poll When performing serial polling a group key can also be used in step 6 on page 37 38 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION ME
207. N USING F CODES PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX Faxes received in an F code confidential memory box are printed out by entering the 4 digit print passcode 0000 to 9999 that was programmed when the box was created 2 Make sure that a Transaction Report is set to print out in the key operator programs so that you will be informed when a confidential document is received See PRINT SELECTION CONF RECEPTION in LIST SETTING on page 95 Faxes received to an F code confidential memory box are automatically cleared after printing When a new fax is received to an F code confidential box while a previously received fax is still stored in the box the new fax is appended after the previous fax In fax mode press the SPECIAL B Press the OK key FUNCTION key NOY When the SPECIAL OK FUNCTION key is pressed the special function selection acc Screen appears To select fax mode see step 1 IS on page 18 6 Select the name of the F code confidential box with the V or A Select PRINT with the V or A SPECIAL FUNCTION SUB ADD CONF BOX SPECIAL FUNCTION GO CORD COMM SETTING B CORP C CORP y D CORP ORIGINAL STORE An icon appears next to each box that is holding received fax 7 Press the OK key OK If no faxes have been received to the F code confidential box No confidentia
208. NCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select OF RINGS AT RX with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Enter the number of rings 0 to 9 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key The number of rings can be set to any number from 0 to 9 PN If the number of rings is set to 0 the machine will receive faxes without ringing TRAY SELECTION This setting is used to select which output trays can be used for received faxes All output trays are initially enabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select TRAY SELECTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Select the tray that you wish to enable with the V or A key and then press the OK key The selected tray is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the tray is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the tray disabled 5 To enable another tray repeat step 4 To exit press the BACK key 2 The trays that be enabled will vary depending on the options that are installed The trays cannot all be disabled 104 RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION This setting determines the selection condition for paper when printing received documents Select either of the two conditions below REDUCTION is normally selected REDUCT
209. ND SUPPLIES in the Operation manual for general information and copier Some settings cannot be selected in some applications When Show TWAIN settings when scanning is selected only Menu name can be selected B Click the OK button This completes the settings 25 4 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs allow the administrator of the machine key operator to enable and disable functions to suit the needs of the workplace This chapter explains key operator programs for the printer and scanner functions For key operator programs that are common to all modes see the Key operator s guide For the initial key operator code set at the factory see PROGRAMMING A KEY OPERATOR CODE in the Key operator s guide KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST The key operator programs for the printer and scanner functions are shown in the following table Factory default settings are indicated in bold When ENABLE DISABLE appears in the Settings column of a program the program is enabled by pressing the OK key so that a checkmark appears in the checkbox A checkmark in the checkbox 1 indicates that ENABLE is selected No checkmark 1 indicates that DISABLE is selected Mode Program Settings Explanation Printer NOTICE PAGE ENABLE DISABLE Select whether or not a Notice Page page 30 is printed when printing is not successful due to a memory full or other error FORCED OU
210. NG AND MAINTENANCE in the Operation manual for general information and copier When performing a Scan to E mail transmission note the following points Be careful not to send image data files that are too large Your mail server s system administrator may have placed a limit on the amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission If this limit is exceeded the e mail will not be delivered to the recipient Even if there is no limit and your e mail is successfully delivered a large data file may take a long time to be received and place a heavy burden on the recipient s network depending on the recipient s network Internet environment If large image data files are repeatedly sent the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other unrelated data transmissions and in some cases may even cause the mail server or network to go down In cases where you need to send a large file or multiple images try lowering the resolution or reducing the scanned original size 21 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION SELECTING A DESTINATION USING THE ADDRESS KEY A destination can be selected using one of three methods Selecting from ADDRESS using ADDRESS ENTRY or ADDRESS SEARCH PSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO OUTI A checkmark appears by the Bg Press the ADDRESS key key once again to remove ADDRESS ENTRY destinations repeat steps 4 Multiple destinations can be
211. NS OUT OF PAPER DURING PEST tis bcne ddnde 18 PAUSING PRINT 18 WHEN PAPER FEED IS SET TO AUTO ciel 19 HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER FEED SETTINGS 19 JOB CONTROL FUNCTION MAC OS 8 6 9 2 2 MAC OS X V10 2 TO 10 3 4 19 N ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR USERS 21 DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A 22 PRINTER DEFAULT SETTINGS 23 ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR 25 PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE IPASSWORDE T ee 26 E MAIL PRINT 27 KEY OPERATOR 28 E MAIL STATUS AND E MAIL ALERT SETTIMANE EN nt co sic dE GE 29 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST 31 USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 32 BASIC PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING SET TENA REM ROMA 32 SPECIAL SETTINGS icis take 33 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 34 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS 37 SPECIFICATIONS PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS 38 PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS 39 1 PRINTING FROM
212. ODUCT AND COMPANY IDENTIFICATION Product Name Supplier Identification AR 202NT AR 202T 2025 AR 202FT AR 202ST C 2035 AR 016T 0165 AR 016FT 016 Black Toner Sharp Corporation 22 22 Nagaike cho Abeno ku Osaka Japan Local suppliers are listed below Please contact the nearest supplier for additional information Area Country Name and Telephone Number U S A Sharp Electronics Corporation Sharp Plaza Mahwah NJ North Telephone number for information 1 800 237 4277 America Emergency telephone number 1 800 255 3924 Canada Sharp Electronics of Canada Ltd Telephone number for information 905 890 2100 Emergency telephone number 1 800 255 3924 Australia Sharp Corporation of Australia PTY Ltd Oceania No1 Huntingwood Drive Huntingwood Blacktown N S W Telephone number for information 1300 13 50 22 Germany Sharp Electronics Europe GMBH Sonninstrasse 3 20097 Hamburg Telephone number to access MSDS 040 2376 2185 For more information 040 2376 2613 United Sharp Electronics U K Ltd Kingdom Telephone number for information 08705 274 277 France Sharp Electronics France S A Telephone number for information 01 49 90 34 00 Austria Sharp Electronics GMBH Europe Telephone number for information 01 727 19 0 Italy Sharp Electronics Italy S P A Telephone number for information 02895951 Spain Sharp Electronics Espan
213. OK key OK 30 BASIC OPERATIONS g Select ON with the V or A key 7 FAX PRINT HOLD GKO To disable fax print hold select OFF Printing received faxes held in memory To print received faxes that are held in memory when fax print hold is enabled follow the steps below 1 In Fax mode press the SPECIAL PRINT HOLD DATA with the 21 FUNCTION key V or A key Begin the following procedure from the base screen of Fax mode SS SIDED NOY Press the SPECIAL e FUNCTION key to display the special function menu To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 SPECIAL FUNCTION B Press the OK key Bg Select FAX PRINT HOLD with the ok V or A key TIMER MODE Select PRINT with the V or A SENDING OPTIONS key FAX PRINT HOLD o v CANCEL 7 Press the OK key OK O 31 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS This chapter explains advanced features that are designed for specific purposes and circumstances Please read those sections that are of interest to you SENDING THE SAME DOCUMENT TO MULTIPLE DESTINATIONS IN A SINGLE OPERATION BROADCAST TRANSMISSION This feature is used to send a fax to multiple destinations in a single operation The original to be transmitted is scanned into memory and then successively transmitted to the selected destinations This feature is convenient
214. OK key and follow the 4 Use the numeric keys to enter the key instructions in the program screen C operator code OK e To use another program for the same mode select the desired program with the V or A key To use a program for a different mode press the BACK key and select the desired mode To exit the key operator programs press the CA key B Select the desired mode with the V or A key MODE SELECT KEY OP CHANGE e X will appear for each digit entered The mode selection screen will appear 32 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS SPECIAL SETTINGS IP address settings This program is used to set the IP ADDRESS SUBNETMASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY The following Screen appears when this program is selected IP ADDRESS SETT INGS IP ADDRESS __0 _0 Enter the IP address subnet mask and default gateway These move the cursor up and down to select IP ADDRESS YILA keys SUBNETMASK and DEFAULT GATEWAY These move the cursor left and right keys These are used to enter Numeric keys numbers C key c Use this to cancel an entry This cancels an entry and BACK key returns you to the previous Screen This cancels the setting and returns the display to the base screen of the mode that was in effect before the key operator programs were entered CA key This cancels t
215. ON USING THE INSTALLER The software programs installed and the steps for installation vary depending on the version of Windows you are running and the type of connection to your computer Refer to the following table for the appropriate procedure for your environment Windows version Windows Type of Windows 2000 98 Me Windows 95 NT 4 0 USB cable connection standard installation INSTALLATION METHOD 1 pages 8 to 9 INSTALLATION METHOD 3 pages 12 to 13 INSTALLATION METHOD 4 pages 14 to 15 INSTALLATION METHOD 2 pages 10 to 11 USB cable connection custom installation Parallel cable connection custom installation Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 are not supported INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE INSTALLATION METHOD 1 Use this procedure to install the software in the following environments 1 The printer is connected by USB cable 2 Windows version Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Windows XP The following procedure uses Windows XP as an example Follow the same steps to install the software on other operating systems f Note To install the software you must have administrator s rights Standard installation only when using a USB cable The procedure for a standard installation of the software is explained below The standard installation procedure is normally used when the machine is connected by a USB cable and you wish to insta
216. P Server R Drivers Printer 2003 EnglishA PPD 2KXP Click Add a printer in Printer Tasks es ee SA English A in North America English in Europe e In Windows 95 98 4 0 2000 double click the Add Printer icon Add Printer Wizard will appear Installing the resident font information only when the PPD file is installed in Windows 95 98 Me If you have installed the PPD file in Windows 95 98 Me and will be using the resident fonts you must install the resident font information Follow the procedure below to install the resident font information e f you are using Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 the resident font information is f Note automatically installed when the PPD file is installed Before installing the resident font information be sure to install the PPD file Insert the network expansion kit Follow the on screen instructions Software CD ROM 1 into your computer s CD ROM drive B After the resident font information has Double click My Computer and been installed restart your computer then double click the CD ROM icon If printer resident fonts cannot be specified 2 an application the resident font information has not been installed or the H Double click the Drivers folder the B cdi nue 8 Printer folder the EnglishA folder for regions other than the U S double click the English folder the
217. PS Display Font and click the Next button Do not select PS Printer Driver The PS printer driver for the machine is installed from the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit AR NB3 B Follow the on screen instructions 30 USING THE PPD FILE The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS driver of the operating system Install the PPD file as needed Use the Add Printer Wizard in Windows to install the PPD file Be sure to read the Readme file Readme txt before installing the PPD file The Readme file is in the EnglishA or English folder For the location of the folder see step 4 Click the start button click Control Follow the on screen instructions Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and then click Printers When you are asked to specify the path of the and Faxes PPD file enter the path as follows In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 click the Substitute the letter of your CD ROM drive for Start button select Settings and then click R in the following paths Printers In Windows Server 2003 click the Start button Operating system PPD file path and then click Printers and Faxes Windows 95 98 Me R Drivers Printer EnglishA PPD 9XME 2 Insert the network expansion kit Windows NT 4 0 R Drivers Printer Software CD ROM 1 into your EnglishA PPD NT40 computer s CD ROM drive Windows 2000 X
218. Printer Tasks In Windows 95 98 Me 2000 double click the Add Printer icon The Add Printer Wizard will appear Juda Qu ree Select the printer to be shared in the network and then click the Next button If you are using Windows 95 98 Me select the printer to be shared click the OK button and then click the Next button The contents of this window will vary depending on your network environment B Select A network printer or a printer 8 Select settings in the Default Printer attached to another computer and screen and then click the Next then click the Next button button In Windows 95 98 Me 2000 select Network printer and then click the Next button Click the Finish button 13 PRINTER SHARING Settings in Windows NT 4 0 If your operating system is Windows NT 4 0 configure settings as follows in the printer properties after installing the printer driver For the procedure for installing the printer driver see 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide E Click the Start button select 5 Enter of server connected to Settings and then click Printers machine name of shared printer and click the OK button 2 Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer driver icon and select Properties from the File menu The printer properties will appear
219. Printers and Faxes Go to step from the File menu i LI Sle 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware Delete and click Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Printers Close H Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer driver icon and select Properties In Windows NT 4 0 select Document from the File menu f Note Defaults to open the printer driver setup Screen Set Up Faxing Create Shortcut In Windows 95 98 Me click the Setup Delete tab Rename Properties A Gereral Datat Sharing Sawl Close The printer driver setup screen will appear PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 7 i Click the Printing Preferences button in the General tab The printer driver setup screen will appear t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 7 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS To view Help for a setting click the button in the upper right hand corner of the window and then click the setting Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen When a restriction is in effect an information icon 2 will appear next to the setting Click the icon to view an explanation of the restriction 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Tab The settings are grouped on tabs Click on a tab to bring it to the front Checkbox Click on a checkbox to activate or deactiv
220. RE LICENSE will appear when you install the software from the CD ROM By using all or any portion of the software on the CD ROM or in the machine you are agreeing to be bound by the terms of the SOFTWARE LICENSE The explanations in this manual are based on American English and the North American version of the software Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version ABOUT THE CD ROMS This product includes CD ROMs that are provided standard with the machine and CD ROMs that are provided with the optional network expansion kit AR NB3 For Windows E CD ROM provided standard with the machine There are two CD ROMs that are provided with the machine Software CD ROM 1 MFP driver Printer driver Scanner driver Button Manager Sharpdesk Desktop Document Management Software Software CD ROM 2 Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 Software CD ROM 1 This CD ROM contains a wizard type installer for installation of the utilities below and the online manual Operation Manual for printer and scanner For the procedure for installing the software see page 7 of this manual MFP Driver Printer driver The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine There are two types of printer drivers for the machine a standard printer driver and a printer driver that is used when the dual function board is installed When the dual f
221. REES The print image can be rotated 180 degrees mage rierdation This feature rotates the print image 180 degrees to enable correct printing on paper C Pons that can only be loaded in one orientation 5 Landecape To use this function select the image orientation in Image Orientation on the F Flashes 100 Paper tab and then click on the Rotate 180 degrees checkbox To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 Printing result Landscape Landscape Rotate 180 degrees L Rotate 180 degrees f Note procedure for loading paper is explained in the Operation manual for general information and copier PRINTING A WATERMARK You can print a watermark such as CONFIDENTIAL on your document To print a watermark open the printer driver setup screen click the Watermarks tab and follow the steps below To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 How to Print a Watermark From the Watermark drop down list select the watermark that you wish to print for example CONFIDENTIAL and start printing Watermark None v TOP SECRET Watermark CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT ORIGINAL COPY You can enter text to create your own custom watermark For details on watermark settings view printer driver Help t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 6 Print sample OUTLINE OF THE PRINT STATUS WINDOW When printing b
222. RP dealer When the dual function board is not installed notice page such as The incorrect driver is chosen a normal output was not able to be executed will be printed if you attempt to print using the print driver for the dual function board Install the standard print driver as explained in 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide and select the standard driver when printing increase the amount of memory in the machine SCANNING PROBLEMS Problem Cause and solution Page The document glass or the underside of the document Operation manual for cover SPF is dirty general information Clean regularly and copier The original is smudged or blotchy Use a clean original You have not specified a suitable resolution Make sure that the resolution setting in the scanner driver is appropriate for the original You are scanning a large area for example an entire 11 x 17 or A3 document at high resolution Ifyou attempt to scan a large area at high resolution and there is insufficient Poor scanning memory in the machine to hold the scanned data scanning will take place at quality a lower resolution and the scanner driver will enhance the data to make up for the lower resolution However the quality of the enhanced image will not be as high as if scanning took place at the higher resolution To scan ledger or A3 original in full color at 6
223. Required Enter the name of the destination up to 36 characters Initial Optional Enter initial text for the destination maximum of 10 characters When the destination list is displayed in the destination control screen the initial text is used to group the destinations Custom Index Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired page 5 allowing convenient grouping of destinations Drop down list Select a custom index for the destination to be stored User checkbox When this is selected the destination is stored in the user tab of the address book Page 22 Hostname or IP Address required 1 Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server maximum of 127 characters User Name Optional Enter the login user name for the FTP server maximum of 32 characters Password Optional Enter the login password for the FTP server maximum of 32 characters Directory Optional If you wish to specify a destination directory on the FTP server enter the directory maximum of 200 characters Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e mailed Checkbox 2 When you send a scanned file to an FTP server you can have a transmission notification automatically sent to the file recipient by e mail To have transmission notifications sent select the checkbox The FTP server name will appear in the transmission notification as a hyperlink E mail Destination Select the recip
224. SHARING THE PRINTER USING WINDOWS NETWORKING The machine can be used as a shared printer in a Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP network environment Note that the Windows network environment must already be established ENNK Print server as explained here is a computer that is directly connected to the machine and a Client is any other computer that is connected to the same network te SHARED PRINTER SETTINGS page 12 te CLIENT SETTINGS 13 11 PRINTER SHARING SHARED PRINTER SETTINGS Settings on the computer to which the machine is directly connected Follow the steps below to use the computer directly connected to the machine as a print server If your operating system is Windows 95 98 Me start from step 1 If your operating system is Windows NT 4 0 2000 or XP open the control panel and then start from step 6 f Note For information on the settings refer to your operating manual or to the help files for your operating system Click the Start button point to Configure the settings for sharing and Settings and then click Control then click the OK button Panel For information on a setting click the button at the top right of the dialog box and 2 Double click the Network icon 2 then click the setting to display Help 2 If the Network icon does not appear e CLIENT SETTINGS page 13 Windows Me click view all Control Panel options H Click th
225. SHARP MODEL AR M162 AR M207 DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL for general information and copier Page PART 1 GENERAL INFORMATION e BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT 12 e TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE 24 e PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES 40 PART 2 COPIER OPERATION e COPY FUNCTIONS 45 CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS 64 e APPENDIX m T3 Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain the maximum benefit from the product Before installing this product be sure to read the cautions and installation requirements sections Be sure to keep all operation manuals handy for reference AR M207 including this manual the Operation manual for general With the RSPF installed information and copier and operation manuals for any optional equipment which has been installed Caution For complete electrical disconnection pull out the main plug The socket outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be easily accessible FOR YOUR RECORDS To protect against loss or theft record and retain for reference the machine s serial number located on the back of the unit Model Number Serial Number Date of Purchase Place of Purchase Authorized Sharp Copier Service Department Number WARNING FCC Regulations state that any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved
226. SPEED SETTING amp 2 Select the symbol that you wish to enter with the V A lt gt keys SYMBOL To move to the next page move the cursor to the bottom line and press the W key To move back to the previous page move the cursor to the top line and press the A key You can also change pages by pressing the key when the cursor is at the right end of the bottom line or the lt q key when the cursor is at the left end of the top line H Press the OK key The symbol selected with the cursor is entered and you return to the character entry screen If the Rapid key overlay is opened or closed while a symbol is being selected the symbol currently selected with the cursor is entered and you return to entry mode PROGRAMMING Entering special characters Special characters are entered with the Rapid key overlay opened Press the SP key j SPEC 5 T 49 50 XYZ 5 SPEED COMM SETTING To move to the next page move the cursor to the bottom line and press the W key To move back to the previous page move the cursor to the top line and press the A key You can also change pages by pressing the gt key when the cursor is at the right end of the bottom line or the 44 key when the cursor is at the left end of the top line H Press the OK key The s
227. Select the desired transmission speed with the V or A key H Select the desired mode with the V or A key TX SPEED INTERNATIONAL TX 14400bps 9600bps v 4800bps Press the OK key 4 Press the OK key OK OK 2 If you select speed other than 33 600 bps maximum speed a checkmark will appear 2 If you select a setting other than OFF next to TX SPEED when you return to the f Note checkmark will appear next to option setting screen This setting is not INTERNATIONAL TX when you return to effective for polling transmission the option setting screen To remove the checkmark and return the To remove the checkmark and return the transmission speed setting to 33 600 bps international transmission mode to OFF maximum speed press the key press the key B Return to step 13 on page 64 B Return to step 13 on page 64 66 Storing a group key To store a group key follow steps 1 through 6 on pages 62 to 63 and then follow the steps below Press a Rapid key 01 to 50 Press the Rapid key 01 to 50 that you wish to program as a group key If you press a Rapid key that has already been programmed a warning message will appear Group key dialling is an automatic dialling function where by multiple destinations Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and full fax numbers entered with the numeric key
228. T 95 RECALL SET ERR 102 LIST SETTING 95 RING TIMEOUT IN AUTO TX 103 INITIALSETTING AUTO COVER SHEET 103 PAUSE TIME 96 RCV FUNCTION CCT OWN PASSCODE SET 96 FAX RECEPTION LIGHT 103 SPEAKER VOLUME 97 OF RINGS AT RX 104 TX RX END SOUND 97 TRAY SELECTION 104 TX RX END SOUND LENGTH 97 RECEIVED DATA PRINT CONDITION 104 EXTENSION TEL 97 AUTO RCV REDUCE TO REGULAR SIZE 104 DISTINCTIVE RING 98 DUPLEX RECEPTION 105 REMOTE RECEPTION 98 8 1 2x11 RX REDUCE 105 ACCOUNT CONTROL 98 FW RX DATA 105 ACCOUNT 4 SET 98 RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET 105 DATE amp TIME SET 99 INDEX PRINT 106 AUTO SUMMER TIME SETTING 99 EARLIER OUTPUT 106 DISABLE FAX PRINT HOLD 100 ANTI JUNK FAX 106 SENDING FUNCTION ENTER JUNK FAX amp 106 RES CON SET 100 POLLING SECURITY AUTO REDUCE TX 100 POLLING SECURITY 107 ROTATE TX 100 POLLING PASSCODE MODE 107 PAGE COUNTER SET 101 SEND MODE 101 QUICK ON LINE TX 101 PRINT STATION IN RCVD DATA 101 ACC NAME PRINT 101 92 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM MENU The key operator programs are accessed via the following menu structure Refer to this menu when enabling or disabling the settings that are explained beginning on page 95 Some programs contain an additional level of settings a settings screen Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 2 FAX SETTINGS LIST PRINT SET LIST PRINT 8 LIST SETTING INITIAL SETTING PAUSE TIME 2 OWN PASSCODE SET 5 SPE
229. THODS USING POLLING MEMORY This function sends a document previously scanned into memory to a receiving machine when the receiving machine calls and polls your machine If desired you can restrict polling to fax machines whose fax number you have programmed in your machine See Restricting polling access polling security on page 41 The machine has memory boxes which are memory used for the regular polling memory function F code polling memory F code confidential transmission and F code relay transmission see BOXES AND SUB ADDRESSES PASSCODES REQUIRED FOR F CODE TRANSMISSION on page 48 The polling memory function explained here uses a memory box called the PUBLIC BOX 2 When using the polling memory function do not set the reception mode to MANUAL See SETTING THE RECEPTION on page 61 Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box This section explains how to scan a document into the Public Box If other documents have already been stored in the Public Box the new document will be appended to those documents If the previous documents are no longer needed they can be replaced Follow steps 1 to 4 of BASIC B Select MEMORY POLLING with the PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES V or A key page 18 and then follow the steps a SELECT READING below ORC MBENORY POLLING Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key v S A M POLL ORIG ROM Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key to display the special funct
230. TION bata 1 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS BASIC PRINTING enne 3 IF THE TRAY RUNS OUT OF PAPER DURING PRINTING D NI T RT 4 PAUSING A PRINT 4 WHEN PAPER SOURCE IS SET TO AUTO SCELERI Le ana a Dd RM NE 4 HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER SOURCE SETNING c 4 AUDITING 5 OPENING THE PRINTER DRIVER FROM THE START BUTTON 6 PRINTER DRIVER 5 5 7 TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS THAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING 8 PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE 10 FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER 11 ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES 12 PRINTING WATERMARK 2 12 PRINTING TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK 13 PRINTER 0 22 22 4 0 14 BEFORE USING THE PRINTER STATUS MONTOR 14 USING THE PRINTER UTILITIES 15 STARTING UP THE PRINTER UTILITIES 15 USING THE PRINTER UTILITIES 15 CHANGING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR SETTINGS ss 15 CHECKING THE PRINTER STATUS 16 n 2 Z lt Q D gt gt Z O o I BASIC 17 IF THE TRAY RU
231. TPUT OF ENABLE DISABLE When no tray has the specified size of paper PRINT this setting is used to select whether or not the print job will be printed on the closest size of paper Scanner DISABLE USB SCAN Select whether or not scanning from a computer and scanning from the machine are disabled when a USB connection is used When YES is selected USB scanning is disabled 26 USING THE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS Follow the steps below to access the key operator settings for the printer and scanner functions ET Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key 6 Press the OK key m Or The special function screen OK PRINTER e MINOTICE PAGE FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT The settings of the selected mode will Select KEY OPERATOR PRG with appeal the V or A key Example The above screen shows the settings when SPECIAL FUNCTION printer mode is selected PAPER SIZE SET Select the desired program with the DISPLAY CONTRAST V or A key TOTAL COUNT amp KEY OPERATOR PRG QNS A checkbox appears to the left of several of the 4 Enter key operator programs To enable a function make a checkmark appear press the OK key To cancel a selection press the OK key once again to remove the checkmark and disable the function Go to step 9 KEY OPERATOR CODE When the OK key is pressed for a program that does not have a checkbox the settings f
232. The machine is not selected correctly in the application from which you are printing Inthe dialog box that appears after you select Print from the File menu in the application make sure you have selected the machine as the printer Copying or scanning is in progress or a fax is being printed when the fax option is installed Wait until copying scanning or fax printing is finished Has the printer driver been installed correctly Follow these steps to check and see if the printer driver is installed 1 Click the start button the Control Panel Printers and Other Hardware and then Printers and Faxes If you are using Windows 95 98 Me 2000 click the Start button point to Settings and select Printers 2 Make sure that the machine s printer icon appears If the icon is shown but you still cannot print the printer driver may not have been installed correctly In this case delete the software and then reinstall it In Windows 2000 XP make sure that the machine s printer icon is selected Software setup guide The machine is not correctly connected with your computer Check both ends of the printer cable and make sure you have a solid connection For information on cables see SPECIFICATIONS page 32 The port setting is not correct Printing is not possible if the printer driver port setting is not correct Set the port correctly Software setup guide
233. USB 2 0 USB 2 0 Hi Speed can be used when the dual function board is installed 2 When the machine is connected using a parallel cable the Print Status Window can only be used when the parallel port is set to ECP mode 3 The printer driver that is installed varies depending on the type of connection between the machine and your computer 4 Sharpdesk can be installed when using a parallel cable however the machine s scanner function cannot be used Windows 95 and Windows NT 4 0 are not supported INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE The scanner feature only works when using a USB cable If an error message appears follow the instructions on the screen to solve the problem After the problem is solved continue the installation procedure Depending on the problem you may have to exit the installer In this case click the Cancel button to quit the installer and then reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem When installing Sharpdesk if Internet Explorer 5 5 or later is not installed on your computer see the Internet Explorer installation procedure in the Readme file Readme txt in the root folder of the Software CD ROM 2 If you are only going to install Sharpdesk after installing Internet Explorer for example when the other components have already been installed perform a custom installation follow steps 2 through 7 in INSTALLATION METHOD 2 and then install only Sharpdesk in steps 11 and 12 INSTALLATI
234. V USA Personal Protective 15mg m Total Dust 5mg m Respirable Dust 10mg m Total Dust 3mg m Respirable Dust Equipment Respiratory Protection Not required under intended use Hand Protection Eye Protection Skin Protection Not required under intended use Not required under intended use Not required under intended use Other Protective Equipment Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long term exposure as with any non toxic dust 9 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES Appearance Physical State Solid Form Powder Color Black Odor odorless Ph Not applicable Boiling Melting Point Not applicable Flash Point C Not applicable Ignition Point C No data Explosion Properties No data Density g cm 7 8 bulk density 2 0 Solubility in Water Negligible 10 STABILITY AND REACTIVITY Stability Stable Hazardous Reactions Dust explosion like most finely divided organic powders Conditions to Avoid Materials to Avoid Electric discharge throwing into fire Oxidizing Materials Hazardous Decomposition Products CO CO and Further Information None 11 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION Acute Toxicity Ingestion oral Inhalation Eye irritation Skin irritation Skin sensitizer Mutagenicity Carcinogenicity LDso gt 2500mg kg Rats No data No data Not an irritant Rabbits No
235. WIA compliant application 1 Place the original s that you wish to Select the Picture type and Paper scan on the document glass or in the source and click the Next button SPF If you placed the original on the document For information on placing an original for glass select Flatbed for the Paper source scanning see 4 COPY FUNCTIONS in the If you placed the original in the SPF select Operation manual for general information and Document Feeder for the Paper source and copier specify the original size in Page size You can click the Preview button to display the 2 Click the start button the Control preview image Panel Printers and Other Hardware and then Scanners and Cameras Click the SSHARP AR XXXX icon and then click Get pictures in Imaging Tasks The Scanner and Camera Wizard will appear f an SPF is not installed on your machine the Paper source menu will not appear If you select Document Feeder for the Paper source and click the Preview button the top original in the SPF is previewed The previewed original is sent to the original exit area so you will need to return it to the SPF before starting the scanning job To adjust the resolution picture type brightness and contrast settings click the Custom settings button Ke hri Daria Word 21 5 g Specify a group name format and folder for
236. WINDOWS This chapter explains the basic procedure for printing in Windows and how to select printer driver settings BASIC PRINTING The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad Before printing make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine 2 Paper that be used and the procedures for loading paper are the same as for copying See the Operation manual for general information and copier Make sure that the ONLINE indicator 3 Select Print from the application s on the operation panel is lit File menu If the ONLINE indicator is not on press the PRINT The Print dialog box will appear key to switch to printer mode and then use the A key to select ONLINE Lay J Ready to print o o ONLINE DATA PRINT i v OFFLINE The status of the printer function is indicated by the ONLINE and DATA indicators above the PRINT key ONLINE indicator DATA indicator The machine is online Printing is possible There is print data in memory that has not been printed yet EET Printing is in on Blinking A print job is being progress or data is canceled being received The machine is There is no print E d offline data in memory o M Printing is not and print data is possible not being received prec Port 2 Start WordPad and open the d
237. Water Negligible 10 STABILITY AND REACTIVITY Stability Stable Hazardous Reactions Dust explosion like most finely divided organic powders Conditions to Avoid Materials to Avoid Electric discharge throwing into fire Oxidizing Materials Hazardous Decomposition Products CO CO and Further Information None 11 TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION Acute Toxicity Ingestion oral Inhalation Eye irritation Skin irritation Skin sensitizer Mutagenicity Carcinogenicity LDso gt 2500mg kg Rats No Data Not an irritant Rabbits Not an irritant Rabbits No sensitization Negative Ames Test In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen possible human carcinogen This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human evidence but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black and lung tumors Moreover a two year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats 77 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 4 4 Date Revised Aug
238. When a fax has been received by F code confidential fax reception an icon EP will appear in the base screen of fax mode message display 1 on page 10 The icon also appears in front of the box in the F code confidential box name screen in the display Step 6 on page 57 Print the received fax as explained in PRINTING A DOCUMENT RECEIVED TO AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL MEMORY BOX page 57 If received data cannot be printed If the machine runs out of paper or toner or a paper misfeed occurs or if the machine is printing a print or copy job received faxes will be held in memory until printing becomes possible The received faxes are automatically printed when printing is possible When received faxes are held in memory the DATA indicator at the upper right of the FAX key blinks You can also use the forwarding function to have another fax machine print the received faxes See FORWARDING FUNCTION on page 46 LOADING PAPER in the Operation manual for general information and copier The difference between vertically and horizontally oriented A4 and A4R paper 8 1 2 x 11 and 8 1 2 x 11 R paper is automatically adjusted at the time of reception so there is no need to load paper in both orientations However when a fax smaller than A4 8 1 2 x 11 is received the size of paper used to print the fax will differ depending on the orientation horizontal or vertical of the original in the sending machine f you wish to use 5 5 1
239. a S A Telephone number for information 93 581 97 00 Netherlands Sharp Electronics Benelux B V Telephone number for information 30 6359500 Sweden Sharp Electronics Nordic AB Telephone number for information 08 634 36 00 Switzerland Sharp Electronics Schweiz AG Telephone number for information 01 846 6111 Middle U A E Sharp Middle East FZE East P O Box 17115 Jebel Ali Dubai Telephone number for information 04 815311 2 COMPOSITION INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS Substance Ingredient Styrene Acrylate copolymer Carbon black Iron oxide Metal Complex dye Preparation X CAS No Proportion OSHA PEL ACGIH TLV MAK TWA NOHSC TWA 29497 14 1 85 95 Not listed Not listed Not listed Not listed 1333 86 4 5 10 3 5mg m 3 5mg m Not listed 3mg m 1309 38 2 1 5 96 Not listed Not listed Not listed Not listed 109125 51 1 lt 2 0 5mg m 0 5mg m Not listed Not listed 84179 66 8 EC NO 400 110 2 Symbol letter F R Phrase R11 75 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 2 4 Date Revised Aug 18 2003 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 01211 3 HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION Most Important Hazards and Effects of the Products Human Health Effects There are no anticipated carcinogenic effects from exposure based on animal tests performed using toner When used as intended according to instructions studies do not indicate any symptoms of fibrosis will occur Environmental Effects No data are avai
240. ach of the scan destinations 1 to 6 on the document glass or in the SPF If you wish to change a setting see BUTTON For information on how to place the original see MANAGER SETTINGS page 25 4 COPY FUNCTIONS in the Operation manual for general information and copier Scan Destination Application that starts SC1 Sharpdesk 2 Press the SCAN key SC2 Email SC3 FAX 5 4 OCR SC5 Microsoft Word SC6 Filing aH the OK key The SCAN key indicator lights up to indicate that the ess the OK key machine is in scanner mode and the destination selection screen appears in the display A name can be entered in Button Manager for each of the destinations SC1 to SC6 which will appear in the format SC1 XXXXX Ready to scan 2 When the dual function board is installed If computers are connected to both of the The selected destination USB ports on the machine the following appears screen will appear in the display In this case use the or A key to select the USB port that you wish to use and press the Press the START key OK key For the location of the ports see 1 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT the Scanning begins Operation manual for general information and copier INTERFACE SELECT The COPY key PRINT key or FAX key can be pressed in scanner mode to switch to the corresponding mode For restrictions on using copy
241. achine will feed toner for about 2 minutes When the START indicator lights up press the START key to resume copying When the toner cartridge replacement required icon 2 appears in the display little toner remains and thus copies may be faint Open the front cover 4 pressing down on the toner cartridge lock release lever insert the Not e During a long copy run or when copying originals with many dark areas the message Toner replenishment in ote Push gently on both ends of the toner cartridge along the guides all front cover to open it the way in If there is any dirt or dust on the toner cartridge remove it before installing the cartridge 2 Pull the toner cartridge out while pressing on the toner cartridge lock release lever g Remove the tape and then pull the X Toner cartridge When pulling out the toner shutter out of the toner cartridge Discard the shutter bag contained in the box of the new cartridge The toner cartridge replacement required icon 22 will no longer appear and copying will be possible After removing the toner cartridge do not shake it or tap it Doing so may cause toner to leak from the cartridge Close the front cover Putthe old cartridge immediately in the ERO Do not throw the toner cartridge into a fire Toner may fly and cause burns Store toner cartridges out of the reach of small children 2 Even after new toner cartr
242. ad the online manual on the Network Utilities CD ROM that accompanies the network expansion kit AR NB3 Use a network cable that is shielded 44 SOFTWARE SETUP GUIDE SHARP SHARP CORPORATION This manual has been printed using a vegetable based soy oil ink to help protect the environment Printed on 100 post consumer recycled paper PRINTED IN JAPAN 2004L DSC1 TINSE1339QSZZ
243. ady 1999 5 EC Seade vastab direktiivi 1999 5 EU n uetele Ez a berendez s megfelel az 1999 5 EK Ir nyelvnek Si ierice atbilst tehniskam prasibam pec 1999 5 EC direktivas Sis prietaisas atitinka direktyvos 1999 5 EC reikalavimus To urzadzenie spetnia wymagania dyrektywy 1999 5 EC Tento pr stroj je v sulade s poziadavkami smernice rady 1999 5 EC Ta oprema je v skladu z zahtevami Direktive 1999 5 EC This equipment works on the British analogue public switched telephone network This equipment has been tested according to the pan European TBR 21 regulation It will operate on all analogue telephone networks which comply with the TBR 21 Please contact your dealer or network operator if you are not sure whether your network operates according to TBR 21 E Important Notice for New Zealand Users General The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services In particular the higher speeds which this modem is capable of can only be achieved in ideal conditions This e
244. ain of the symbols in the character code list The factory default setting is PC 8 Font Select one internal or one expansion font This specifies which PCL font to use for printing One font can be specified from among the internal fonts and expansion fonts when the barcode font kit or the Flash ROM kit is installed The factory default setting is 0 Courier Line Feed Code CR CR LF LF FF FF CR CR LF LF LF FF FF CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF This specifies the line break code by means of a combination of the CR return code LF line break code and FF page break code The factory default setting is printing based on the transmitted code The setting can be changed by selecting one of four combinations PostScript settings Enable Disable This setting can be enabled to print 80 lines on A4 size paper with each line 10CPI font English characters When the setting is disabled a checkmark does not appear each line is 78 characters long PostScript Settings only appears when the PS3 expansion kit is installed Item Settings Description Print PS Errors Enable Disable When this setting is enabled an error description is printed each time a PostScript error occurs ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR In addition to the menus that appear for users other menus that can only be used by the administrator appear
245. an account and return the display to the account number entry screen Page 23 24 0 key Press during a continuous copy run to display the number of copies completed 25 READ END key When copying in sort mode from the document glass press this key when you have finished scanning the original pages and are ready to start copying Page 64 26 START key indicator Copying is possible when this indicator is on Press the key to start copying 27 CA key Clears all selected settings and returns the machine to the default settings Page 18 15 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT Display base screen Example Copy mode o 9 4 100 m The display shown is the AR M207 when the optional RSPF is installed display 1 Exposure display Indicates the selected exposure mode 2 Special function icon display Icons of enabled special functions will appear 3 Message display Messages are displayed regarding machine status and operation 4 Original size display The size of the placed original and the icon of the original scanning mode will appear One sided scanning in the SPF Scanning on the document glass amp Two sided scanning in the RSPF Icons appearing in the special function icon display che 5 Li m 1 sided to 2 sided Center erase copy copy 2 sided to 2 sided n Edge Center eras
246. and press the OK key f you make a mistake press the C key and then enter the correct number f you enter an account number that has not been programmed re enter the correct account number KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS Enter an account name up to 18 characters long and press the OK key See ENTERING CHARACTERS page 82 for the procedure for entering letters If you do not wish to change the account name press the OK key Press the OK key You will return to the screen of step 2 To change another number repeat steps 2 and 3 To exit press the BACK key in step 2 DATE amp TIME SET This setting is used to set the machine s internal clock to the current date and time 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 2 3 Select DATE amp TIME SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Enter the year 2004 to 2062 month 01 to 12 and day 01 to 31 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key For the year enter the last two digits of the year The range of days that can be entered for the selected month is displayed 5 Enter the time in 12 hour format with the numeric keys and press the OK key Enter a number from 01 to 12 for the hour and a number from 00 to 59 for the minute 6 Select or PM with the V or A key and then press the OK key
247. anning is not possible when Note coL OR MODE is set to COLOR or GRAY EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUT 100601 150dpi The resolution selection hes Screen appears highlighted 27 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION H Press the OK key Resolution p The default resolution setting is 150 dpi For typical text documents a resolution of You will return to the base 200 dpi or 300 dpi produces sufficiently screen and the selected legible image data A resolution of 200 resolution will appear in the dpi corresponds to the generally used resolution display FINE in fax mode For this reason the 600 dpi setting should only be used in cases where high clarity image reproduction is required such as an original that includes photographs or illustrations When an original is scanned at the maximum resolution 600 dpi the amount of memory available the original size the color mode and other setting conditions may cause the resolution to change For information on the setting conditions see MAXIMUM RESOLUTION page 35 BACK OK SELECTING THE FILE FORMAT After selecting scan mode and placing the original steps 1 to 3 on page 20 perform the procedure below The factory default settings are PDF for the file type and MULTI for the file creation method multiple scanned images are combined into one file If you need to change the file format follow these steps When
248. aper size setting Set the tray s paper size setting to the same orientation size as the paper loaded in the tray Wrinkles appear in the paper or the image disappears in places The size or weight of the paper being used is not within the specified range Use copy paper within the specified range The paper is curled or damp Replace it with dry copy paper During periods when the machine is not used for a long time remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a bag to prevent moisture absorption Paper misfeed 26 A paper misfeed has occurred See REMOVING MISFEEDS to remove the paper misfeed The size or weight of the paper being used is not within the specified range Use copy paper within the specified range The paper is curled or damp Replace it with dry copy paper During periods when the machine is not used for a long time remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a bag to prevent moisture absorption Paper is not loaded properly Make sure the paper is properly loaded A piece of paper remains in the machine after a paper misfeed was removed Remove all pieces of misfed paper Too much paper is loaded in the tray Ifthe stack of paper is higher than the indicator line on the tray remove some of the paper and reload so that the stack does not exceed the line Several sheets of paper stick together Fan
249. aper store the plate B in the slot at the left front of the paper tray H Push the pressure plate down Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks into place Fan the paper Fan the paper well before loading it If the paper is not fanned double feeds or misfeeds may occur Do not load paper higher than the line on the tray up to 250 sheets Make sure that the paper fits under the tab on the right side of the tray Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it When adding paper take the remaining paper out and combine it into a single stack with the new paper g Push the paper tray back in Push the upper paper tray in completely If the size of the loaded paper is different from the size shown in the display be sure to follow the procedure in CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE SETTING OF A TRAY page 21 to change the paper size setting of the tray 19 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT Loading paper in the bypass tray Open the bypass tray Pull out the bypass tray extension to load 8 1 2 x 14 and 11 x 17 B4 and A3 size paper H Insert the copy paper print side down all the way into the bypass tray Make sure that the print side of the paper is face down To prevent a misfeed verify once more that the bypass tray guides are adjusted to the width of the paper If you loaded paper in the bypass tray press Note PAPER key to se
250. are to be bound at the top reversing the orientations of the front and back images will result in a uniform orientation when the bound copies are viewed note that this may depend on the orientation of the originals 5 Press the OK key The duplex mode selection Screen appears H Select 2 to 1 with the V or A key or with the DUPLEX key D Set the number of copies and press COPY MODE g the START key To stop copying in the middle of a run press the C key 2 Do not touch an original A that is on the reversing tray Doing so may cause a misfeed 60 TWO SIDED COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY Follow the steps below to perform two sided copying manually Example Copying original A and original B onto both sides of the paper If you are using the AR M207 The AR M207 is equipped standard with an automatic two sided copying function that automatically turns over the paper If paper in Paper that can be used for automatic 2 sided printing on page 18 is used this enables easier two sided copying than using the bypass tray See TWO SIDED COPYING on page 56 original A H Turn the copy of original A over and without changing the position of the edge closest to you insert it in the bypass tray d amp
251. ate a function Print image This shows the effect of the selected print settings Drop down list Allows you to make a selection from a list of choices Check button Allows you to select one item from a list of options Image of paper trays The tray selected in Paper Source in the Paper tab appears in blue You can also click on a tray to select it lob Caria 7 dais Je resi 7 OK button Click this button to save your settings and exit the dialog box 8 Cancel button Click this button to exit the dialog box without making any changes to the settings 9 Apply button Click to save your settings without closing the dialog box Windows NT 4 0 does not have the Apply button The Apply button does not appear when you open this window from an application 10 Help button Click this button to display the help file for the printer driver The settings and the image of the machine will vary depending on the model If a tray or job separator tray option is installed see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER in TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION in the Software setup guide to configure the settings for the option For information on the printer function see PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS page 39 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS THAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING On models that have the two sided printing function both sides
252. ation Destination page 6 Store destinations for Scan to FTP Scan to FTP Hyperlink Scan to Desktop and Scan to E mail You can also edit or delete previously stored destination information Network Scanning changing custom index names This enables to change custom index names Click the Submit button to store the entered information as index names The custom index consists of six indexes A 6 character index name can be stored for each index allowing destinations to be grouped Admin Mode Click here to open the adminstrator Web page and enter the administrator user name and password x PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED THE WEB PAGE Passwords page 14 ABOUT WEB PAGE FOR ADMINISTRATOR page 11 THE BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION STORING DESTINATIONS To store scanning destinations click Destination in the Web page menu frame This screen can also be used to edit or delete stored destinations Page 10 A total of 200 destinations can be stored including E mail FTP Desktop and Group destinations Multiple e mail addresses can be stored as a group up to 100 Note that this may reduce the maximum number of destinations normally 200 that can be stored Image Send Management E mail See below FTP See page 7 Desktop See page 8 Group E mail See page 9 Click here to store destinations e Network Scannin Function e Submit Print Jo
253. atus Monitor button in this will appear Make sure that you window and follow the on screen instructions understand the contents of the license If you wish to install the printer administration agreement and then click the Yes utility click the Administrator Tools button in button this window and then click the Printer Administration Utility button and follow the Read the message in the Welcome on screen instructions window and then click the Next button l Click the Next button 8 Click the Custom installation button 28 SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 9 Select Shared Printer and click the Follow the on screen instructions Next button After the installation a message prompting For the port to be used select the f Note you to restart your computer may appear In machine configured as a shared this case click the Yes button to restart printer and click the Next button yourconpultor You can also click the Add Network Port button This completes the installation and select the printer to be shared the machine After installation see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER 2 DRIVER page 42 to check the printer driver settings If you installed the PS printer driver the PS f Note display font can be installed from the PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM that accompanied the PS3 expansion kit Page 30 2 If the shared printer does not appear the list check the se
254. ay broadcast of a received fax upon receipt of an F code relay request Up to 10 boxes can be programmed An F code sub address and passcode for reception of an F code relay request and the destinations to which the fax is to be relayed are programmed in each box To check the contents of a programmed box print the following list PRINT REPORT SUB ADD SET LIST page 81 To program an F code relay group box follow steps 1 through 6 on page 74 and then follow the steps below Select an unused box with the V or A key 9 Enter a name for the F code relay group box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 ENTER NAME 26 7 28 2 3 I I A B D E 31 32 3 Q 3 3 Xj G J DI I I Up to 36 characters can be entered for the name A box name must be entered 10 Press the OK key OK itl Enter a sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 3 and 4 on page 65 76 Enter passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 5 and 6 on page 65 Enter the relay destinations Enter full fax numbers with the numeric keys and or press auto dial keys Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys to select the destinations page 20 ENTER RX STATION To clear a mistake when entering a number with the numeric keys press the C key to clear one digi
255. b e Printer Test Page Storing destinations for Scan to E mail 1 Destination in the menu frame Enter the destination information of the Web page For each setting see the following table image Gend Management 3 Dexrlaatian Alana gantast be sprog ea mm dim zw Fait Destinatian Contre Cop esa eas Submit Punt Jub E mai pr When you have finished entering the information click Submit The entries will be stored To perform Scan to E mail the SMTP server settings must first be established Page 13 E mail destination information Item Description Name Required Enter the name of the destination up to 36 characters Initial Optional Enter initial text for the destination maximum of 10 characters When the destination list is displayed in the destination control screen the initial text is used to group the destinations Custom Index Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired page 5 allowing convenient grouping of destinations Drop down list Select a custom index for the destination to be stored User checkbox When this is selected the destination is stored in the user tab of the address book Page 22 E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the destination up to 64 characters If an LDAP server is being use
256. be selected with the Right Turning Pamphlet checkbox in the Advanced tab The following examples show how 8 pages are printed when Tiled Pamphlet is selected Printing result Right Turning Pamphlet Right Turning Pamphlet Print data Because four pages are printed on each sheet of paper blank pages are automatically added at the end when f Note the total number of pages is not a multiple of four When Tiled Pamphlet is selected printing will take place on paper that is twice the size of the paper size specified in the application When 2 Up Pamphlet is selected each page is reduced in the same way as for 2 Up and printed on the size of paper that is specified in the application PRINTING FROM WINDOWS PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE This feature allows you to reduce and print two four six eight nine or sixteen document pages on a single sheet of paper To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select the number of pages per sheet 2 Up 4 Up 6 Up 8 Up 9 Up or 16 Up in N Up Printing in the Main tab The order of the pages can be changed in the Order menu To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 2 The N Up Printing setting is not available when Fit to Page is selected FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER page 11 For example when 2 Up or 4 Up is selected the result will be as follows depending on the selected order
257. ber with the numeric keys and then press the OK key f you make a mistake press the C key and re enter the number To enter press the key 6 Enter your name and then press the START key See ENTERING CHARACTERS page 82 for the procedure for entering letters To clear the programmed fax number and name follow these steps 1 Select DELETE in step 4 and then press the OK key 2 Select DELETE with the W or A key and then press the OK key SPEAKER VOLUME This setting is used to adjust the on hook volume the ringing volume the line monitor volume the TX RX end sound volume the original scanning end sound volume and the tone output volume All volume settings are initially set to MIDDLE 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 2 3 Select SPEAKER VOLUME with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Select name of the volume that you wish to adjust with the V or key and then press the OK key Db Select the desired volume level with the V or A key and then press the OK key HIGH MIDDLE or LOW can be selected for the on hook volume HIGH MIDDLE LOW or OFF can be selected for volumes other than the on hook volume TX RX END SOUND This program is used to select the beep pattern that signals the end of transmission or r
258. blinking continues until fax is removed Job separator tray kit not installed Blinking start and stop timing PATTERN PATTERN 2 When fax is When printing received to of received fax memory starts Blinking starts Received fax Off no longer in memory When printing of received fax is completed Blinking of the LINE STATUS indicator also applies to the following cases Printing documents in the Public Box page 40 PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY page 81 When list is printed using LIST PRINT SET page 95 in the key operator programs 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 2 3 Select FAX RECEPTION LIGHT with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 or OFF with the V or key and then press the OK key If you do not wish the LINE STATUS indicator to blink select OFF 103 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS RINGS AT RX When the reception mode is set to auto this program is used to select the number of rings on which the machine automatically receives a call and begins fax reception See RECEIVING A FAX on page 28 Any number of rings from 0 to 9 can be selected Normally 2 is selected 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FU
259. can be Note stored Stored Rapid keys group keys and Speed dial destinations can be called up using a search name entered when the key or destination was stored Page 21 To prevent dialling a wrong number and sending a fax to an incorrect destination check the message display carefully when you store the number You can also check stored numbers by printing out the programmed information after storing the number page 81 16 2 BASIC OPERATIONS This chapter explains the basic procedures for sending and receiving faxes There are three basic methods for fax transmission memory transmission direct transmission and manual transmission When memory transmission is used the document is temporarily stored in memory before being transmitted When direct transmission or manual transmission is used the document is transmitted without being stored in memory The default transmission setting can be set to MEMORY TX or DIRECT TX using SEND MODE page 101 in the key operator programs To manually switch between MEMORY TX and DIRECT TX use the COMM SETTING key See Faxing by direct transmission on page 23 The following explanations generally assume that memory transmission is being used 17 SENDING A FAX BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES Make sure that the machine is fax mode U Y The FAX indicator is lit when the TIE m machine is in fax mode If the FAX d indicator is not lit press
260. cel dialling using the SPEAKER key when you need to redial the number Press the SPEAKER key or because transmission was interrupted press the SPEAKER key once again As the original is not stored in memory ENTER DIAL y when direct transmission and manual transmission are used the followin V gt g REDIAUPAUSE 8 functions cannot be used Broadcast transmission page 32 timer transmission page 34 F code relay broadcast transmission page 59 redial STANDARD page 102 image rotation page 100 duplex scanning dual pages and others When fax is sent by direct transmission When this key is pressed a message regarding Gr Rental ee volume adjustment will appear briefly followed by the after the connection with the receiving dial entry screen You can adjust the speaker volume medie cese To rena high middle or low by pressing the W or A key Note that this will not change the volume setting in the key operator programs Ringing will be heard from the speaker on the left side of the machine toward the back when the SPEAKER key is used for dialling QMANUAL S AUTO Storing transmission jobs memory transmission When the line is in use the transmission job is temporarily stored in memory When the current job and any previously stored jobs are completed transmission begins automatically This is called memory transmission
261. chine and other SHARP printers compatible with the Printer Administration Utility that are connected to the network Settings can also be changed via the utility n order to use the Printer Status Monitor and Printer Administration Utility the machine must be connected to ote To install the Printer Status Monitor and Printer Administration Utility see 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS in the Software setup guide To use the Printer Administration Utility in Windows 95 a system file must be updated See 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS in the Software setup guide and view the detailed information in the Software Selection window of the installer BEFORE USING THE PRINTER STATUS MONITOR To use the Printer Status Monitor to monitor the status of the machine the printing environment must be configured as explained below Printing via a server Install the software as explained in Using the machine as a shared printer via a server in 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS in the Software setup guide When the first print job is executed after starting up the Printer Status Monitor the machine s IP address is automatically set in the Printer Status Monitor Direct printing without a server Install and configure the software as explained in INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER STANDARD INSTALLATION in 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS in the Software setup guide This is no
262. ct SUB ADD SETTING with the g V or A key G ENTRY Z DIAL PROGRAM SUB ADD SETTING 74 Select S A CONF BOX S A RELAY GRP S A MEM POLLING or CHANGE DELETE with the V or A key To program an F code confidential box select S A CONF BOX and press the OK key Next S A RELAY GRP follow the steps in PROGRAMMING AN S A MEM POLLING F CODE CONFIDENTIAL y_CHANGE DELETE BOX on page 75 To program an F code relay group box select S A RELAY GRP and press the OK key Next follow the steps in PROGRAMMING AN F CODE RELAY GROUP on page 76 To program an F code public polling memory box select S A MEM POLLING and press the OK key Next follow the steps in PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES on page 77 confidential box Feode SU8_ADD_SETTING j S A CONF BOX relay group or F code 5 public box select CHANGE DELETE and S A MEM POLLING then press the OK CHANGE DELETE Next follow the steps in EDITING AND DELETING F CODE MEMORY BOXES on page 77 SUB ADD SETTING DEMO ESI SUB ADD SETTING S A CONF BOX S A RELAY GRP S A MEM POLLING CHANGE DELETE SUB ADD SETTING S A CONF BOX S A RELAY GRP S A MEM POLLING v CHANGE DELETE PROGRAMMING AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL BOX Follow the steps below to program an F code confidential reception box An F
263. ct programs can be used to select the method AUTO with the A key and for expressing halftones See the Key press the OK key operator s guide 48 COPY FUNCTIONS SELECTING THE TRAY By default the auto paper select function page 47 operates and thus the appropriate tray is automatically selected when the original is placed on the document glass or in the document feeder tray or when the original size is specified If you wish to use a tray other than the automatically selected tray for example you wish to enlarge or reduce the copy or use the bypass tray press the PAPER key to select the desired tray EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO COLORMODE ADDRESS FORI PROGRAM AE ADDRESS BROAD 2 f the desired paper size does not appear change the paper a tray to the desired paper size Page 21 Automatic ratio selection page 47 does not operate when the bypass tray is selected Auto tray switching If the tray runs out of paper during copying and there is another tray with the same size of paper and the same feeding orientation horizontal or vertical the other tray is automatically selected and copying continues Auto tray switching can be disabled if needed Page 22 SETTING THE NUMBER OF COPIES Press the numeric keys to set the number of copies o 9 The set number of copies appears in the display A maximum of 999 copies factory default setting
264. ct orientation On a Macintosh make sure that the correct orientation is selected in the application settings Operation manual Paper is not loaded properly for general Make sure the paper is correctly loaded information and copier The margins are not set correctly in the application Check the paper size and margin settings in the application Also make sure that the print settings are correct for the paper size A notice page is printed If you find that a notice page has been printed at the end of a print job the print data received from the computer has not been printed as specified Fix the problem as explained below and then try printing again What to do when a notice page is printed FEES okok kk Notice Page okokekokokokokokokeokokokokokokok ThelMC memory full error had occurred a normal output was not able to be executed Please refer to the operation manual for the solution method The above notice page is printed when a print job containing more data than can be held in the memory of the dual function board memory is sent If you printed using the printer driver remove the checkmark from ROPM in the Configuration tab of the printer driver setup screen to disable the ROPM function If you need to use the ROPM function select a lower resolution setting in the printer driver or increase the amount of memory 36 The Notice Page can
265. ct the machine to the network expansion kit The network scanner function cannot be used if the network expansion kit is connected to the USB 1 port on the machine Note This manual only explains the network scanner function that can be used when the optional network expansion kit is installed For information on copier functions adding paper and toner removing misfeeds using peripheral equipment and other general information please refer to the Operation manual for general information and copier that accompanies the machine For information on the network printer function please refer to the Operation manual for network printer in the network expansion kit AR NB3 For information on installing the drivers and software cited in this manual see the separate Software setup guide For information on the operating system please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows XP The screens may vary in other versions of the operating systems The explanations in this manual are based on American English and the North American version of the software Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version This manual refers to the digital multifunctional system equipped with the network function as the machine This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as
266. cters altogether To finish the storing procedure press the START key If you wish to program an option such as F code chain dialling transmission speed or international transmission mode press the OK key e If you pressed the START key go to step 5 f you wish to program another Rapid key or Speed Dial number repeat steps 5 to 11 To exit press the BACK key Editing to that point will be completed f you pressed the OK key go to the appropriate page for the option that you wish to edit To program F code settings follow the steps in F code settings on pages 64 and 65 To select CHAIN go to Chain Dialling on page 65 To set the TRANSMISSION SPEED go to Transmission speed setting on page 66 To set the INTERNATIONAL TRANSMISSION MODE go to International transmission mode setting on page 66 Deleting a Rapid key or Speed Dial number In step 3 on page 68 select DELETE with the V or A key I RAPID SPEED 2 Press a Rapid key 01 to 50 or the SPEED key e To delete a Rapid key press the Rapid key that you wish to delete 01 to 50 ES peces pen pni A B D E 31 32 3 9 3 I ua F G 1 J 7 To delete Speed Dial number press the SPEED key and then enter the Speed Dial number 000 to 299 that you wish to delete with the numeric keys
267. cument pages original has not been left on the and then insert the stack in the document document glass and then gently feeder tray so that the first page is face up close the SPF Insert the originals all the way into the document feeder tray Make sure the stack does not exceed the indicator line maximum of 40 sheets or 30 sheets of 90 g m 24 1 5 paper thickness 4 mm 5 32 or less TC i Do not load originals that are different ABjustthie original guides me f Note Sizes even if the widths are the same 2 document feeder tray to the width of This may cause misfeeds the document Use the SPF for long originals The document glass cannot be used When inserting a long original the original should be in contact with the surface of the document feeder tray If the original is not in contact with the surface of the document feeder tray an incorrect original size may be detected USING THE DOCUMENT GLASS Regardless of the size of the original place the original ll the SPF place the original face in the far left corner of the document glass Align the down on the document glass and upper left hand corner of the original with the tip of then gently close the SPF the amp mark Place the original in the appropriate position for its size as shown below Zu e f auto power shut off has activated press the FAX key Document glass
268. d Required you can click the Global Address Search button to search for an address on the LDAP server BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Storing destinations for Scan to FTP Image Gend Management tiation ET grinning Fabre Ebr Print Job aw Destination E mail estinations List Type Scanner Destiniatio Desktop 1 Destination in the menu frame Enter the destination information of the Web page For the settings see the following table Pangani arnt 12 2 Pre amid Hedin ue DR REP ki morari 2 Click FTP Lie you have completed all the entries click Submit The entries will be stored If you select the Enable Hyperlink to FTP server to be e mailed checkbox and select a previously stored recipient page 6 from E mail Destination an e mail will be sent to the recipient informing them of the file format and location of the scanned image data Scan to FTP Hyperlink A hyperlink to the file server to which the scanned image data was sent appears in the e mail and the recipient can click the hyperlink to go directly to the location where the image data is stored FTP destination information Item Description Name
269. d accounts up to 50 accounts can be created and to keep a count of pages transmitted by each account Using audit mode When auditing mode is enabled the account number entry screen is displayed Enter your account number five digit identification number as explained below before performing a scanner operation Enter your account number account 3 MH 1 Enter your account number five B When you have finished using scan digits with the numeric keys mode press the ACC C key Enter your account ESTE number ACCOUNT ITEM D As the account number is entered the hyphens change to asterisks X If you enter an incorrect digit press C key and re enter the correct digit After you enter your account number the base screen of scan mode page 18 appears f you enter an account number for copy mode has also been programmed for scan mode you can change to scan mode after completing the copy operation and continue with the scan operation without re entering your account number If you enter an account number for copy mode that has not been programmed for scan mode enter your account number for scan mode after you press the SCAN key to change to scan mode When ACC SECURITY is enabled in the key operator programs see the Key operator s guide the message Please see your key operator for assistance will appear for one minute if an invalid account number is entered
270. d as a network printer using the optional network expansion kit AR NB3 are explained in this chapter Refer to the following table for the installation procedure to follow depending on whether you are using a Windows environment TCP IP network or a Macintosh environment Operating system Procedure to follow Windows 1 SETTING THE IP ADDRESS OF THE MACHINE page 21 2 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE page 24 1 2 Macintosh INSTALLING THE PPD FILE page 32 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER page 35 About network environments There are several types of network environments Typical environments include the following Windows network environment UNIX network environment NetWare network environment Macintosh network environment This manual explains peer to peer and server client network connections in a Windows environment If the machine is used in a different network environment see the online manual Print Server Card User s Manual on the Network Utilities CD ROM Network connection examples Peer to peer Server client Computer running Windows AN Computer running Example Windows Server 2003 Windows environment Er 1 For the procedures for configuring L A server settings when the machine E Computer runn
271. d in a group delete the destination from the group and then delete the destination Printing lists of programmed destinations You can print lists showing the destinations that have been programmed The following lists can be printed Print individual list Shows the information programmed in e mail FTP desktop and group destinations Print group list Shows only the information programmed in group e mail destinations Destination in the menu frame 3 To print the group list click Print of the Web page Group List at the bottom of the destinations list image Gand Management Finnt inn a Poot Job um Fast Lan a To print the individual list click Print Individual List at the bottom of the destinations list ABOUT THE WEB PAGE FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR In addition to the menu that appear in the user Web page the Web page for the administrator also shows menus that can only be established by the administrator A menu frame appears on the left side of the page When you click an item in the menu a screen appears in the right frame that allows you to configure settings for that item Settings that can only be configured by the administrator are explained here SHARP In hamatian z System Information 1 CES tite 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 Network Scanning page 12 4 Quick Setup page
272. d in the table below Furmecion Print Jab vores eie iari ES EIE bern 2 PDF TIFF files be printed To print PDF files the optional PS3 expansion kit must be installed Encrypted PDF files cannot be printed Advanced job settings Factory default Item Description setting Copies Set the number of copies from 1 to 999 1 Paper Size Select the size of paper to be used for printing Not Specified Orientation Select the printing orientation Portrait Landscape Portrait Binding Edge Select the binding position for two sided printing Left Top Left Duplex To print on both sides of the paper select this checkbox Only for models Not selected that support the two sided printing Account Number When AUDITING MODE is enabled in the key operator programs enter your 5 digit account number 22 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE PRINTER DEFAULT SETTINGS Configure basic printer settings and printer language settings The printer default settings consist of the following three screens Default settings page 24 Basic settings that are mainly used when the printer driver is not used for example when printing from a DOS application PCL settings page 24 PCL symbol set font line feed code and other settings PostScript settings page 24 Sets whether or not a PostScript error page is printed
273. d open the document that you wish to print 4 Make sure that SHARP is selected as the printer If you need to change any print settings click the Preferences button Properties button in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 The printer driver setup screen will appear Windows 2000 does not have the Preferences button in this dialog box Select settings as needed on each of the tabs in the setup screen t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 6 TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS THAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING page 7 PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE page FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER page 8 ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES page 9 PRINTING A WATERMARK page 9 PRINT Click the Print button OK button in P Note When the job separator tray is Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 installed e 3 The output tray can be selected when Printing begins When printing begins the Print selecting print settings at the time of Status Window automatically opens printing To change the tray selection select OUTLINE OF THE PRINT STATUS WINDOW page the desired tray in Output in the Paper 10 tab of the printer driver setup screen The print job is delivered to the output tray with the position of the paper offset slightly from the previous job offset function IF THE TRAY RUNS OUT OF PAPER DURING PRINTING Add paper to the tray that ran out or to th
274. d the contents of the license agreement and then click the Yes button B Read the message in the Welcome window and then click the Next button 24 Click the Printer Driver button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button aapi Papas ers ete Leos eee edie ee t pn emi ia uL LLL d A marci ai If you wish to install the printer status monitor click the Printer Status Monitor button in this window and follow the on screen instructions If you wish to install the printer administration utility click the Administrator Tools button in this window and then click the Printer Administration Utility button and follow the on screen instructions m Click the Next button Click the Standard installation button 5 imas lanar e br membru arrere piped Red pras LI SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT 9 Printers connected to the network Check the contents of the window and detected Select the machine and click click the Next button the Next button Installation of the printer driver begins If you are using Windows 2000 Imm 7 ntis If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears be sure to click the Continue Anyway or Yes butto
275. d time appear in the display Make sure the correct date and time appear If the date and time are wrong please correct them Program the sender s name and sender s number The name and fax number of the user of the machine is programmed in OWN PASSCODE SET page 96 in the key operator programs Only one name and number can be programmed The programmed name and number are printed at the top of each transmitted fax page The sender s number is also used as an identification number when you use the Polling function to request transmission from another fax machine see USING THE POLLING FUNCTION on page 37 You can check your programmed name and number by printing out the Key Operator List in the key operator f Note programs See LIST PRINT on page 95 Paper sizes that can be used for fax mode The machine can use B4 4 B5 B5R 5 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size paper however 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 and 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 size paper cannot be used in fax mode Among INCH sizes only 8 1 2 x 11 and 8 1 2 x 11 R can be used If your machine uses inch based paper sizes A3 B4 B5 B5R and A5 size paper cannot be used in fax mode Among AB sizes only A4 and A4R can be used For this reason if only paper sizes that can be used in other modes but not in fax mode are loaded in the machine received faxes cannot be printed For other points regarding fax reception
276. damental and Applied Toxicology 17 pp 280 299 The information on this data sheet represents our current data and best opinion as to the proper use in handling of this product under normal conditions However all materials may present unknown hazards and should be used with caution Although certain hazards are described herein we do not guarantee that these are the only hazards which exist 82 INDEX Symbols Numbers GUY ii iret E e ere ede aes 15 2in1 4in 1 copy 66 250 sheet paper feed unit 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit 41 2 6 22 enn 18 15 23 eer PR e 15 Auditirig mode eiectus 23 AUTOS CIO ENS i is ELA Le PN 17 46 Auto paper select 47 Auto power shut off 17 Auto tray 4 222 1 22 49 AUTOS Ky 15 B BACK Key anteire ace t eret etes 14 B aS6o SCIGO l iu uin ei E b e EH AR 18 Bypass 13 18 20 61 Bypass tray 13 20 Bypass tray 13 20 Bypass tray paper feed roller 37 C KOy
277. dential transmission provides a secure means of faxing confidential documents The sub address and passcode programmed in the box restrict the recipients of the fax and once received in the box the fax can only be printed by someone who knows the print passcode This function is convenient when sending important documents that you only want a specific person to see or when multiple departments share a single fax machine The other machine Your machine 1 Document data together with a sub address and passcode nter print passcode digit number Sub addres QUO 2 Check sub address AY CA Xo 3x and passcode Passcode x D 1 1 1 1 v 4 2 Data is only printed if correct Do not match 3 The fax is received to the F code confidential box reception is permitted As the above diagram shows receiving faxes to the machine s F code confidential memory box is called F code confidential reception and sending faxes to another machine s F code confidential memory box is called F code confidential transmission 2 This machine does not support Sharp s previous confidential transmission function which uses the programmed sender s fax number and ID code See pages 74 through 78 for the procedures for creating editing and deleting F code confidential memory boxes Take care not to forget the print passcode that is programmed in the F code confidential box If you forget the passcode consu
278. desired paper tray the copy on the document glass and is selected close the SPF Set the number of copies and press the START key 2 Press the DUPLEX key 8 Remove the first original and then XO place the original for the back side of the copy on the document glass Close the SPF and press the START key The duplex mode selection screen appears H Select 1 to 2 with the V or A key or with the DUPLEX key COPY MODE The copy will be delivered to the center tray To cancel two sided copying press the C key To cancel two sided duplex copy mode press the Mob AP ROM ERES DUPLEX key to select 1 to 1 and then press the OK key When making two sided copies of an odd number of the image on the back of the paper be opposite the orientation of the image on the front set BINDING CHANGE to ON with the 4 or gt key COPY MODE COPY FUNCTIONS TWO SIDED COPIES OF TWO SIDED ORIGINALS ONLY WHEN USING THE RSPF Paper sizes that can be used are 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R A3 BA A4 A4R B5 B5R and A5 Automatic two sided copying is not possible when the bypass tray is used This copy function cannot be used in combination with dual page copy 1 Make sure that an original does not Press the OK key remain on the document glass and th
279. direction Default Paper Size B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Ledger Legal Foolscap Letter Letter R Invoice This sets the default paper size used for printing Even if the set size of paper is not in any of the trays the printed image is formed in accordance with this setting Factory default setting is A4 in some regions Default Paper Source Auto Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass Manual Bypass Auto Set the default paper tray Selections available depend on the trays that are installed Disable Blank Page Print Enable Disable When this is set to Enable blank pages are not printed 2 Sided Print 1 Sided 2 Sided Book 2 Sided Tablet When 2 Sided Book is selected two sided printing takes place so as to allow binding at the left side When 2 Sided Tablet is selected two sided printing takes place so as to allow binding at the top Only for models that support two sided printing PCL settings Item Enable Disable Settings This enables the ROPM function When enabled multi page print jobs are stored in memory before printing and thus the computer does not need to repeatedly send the print data when multiple copies are printed This setting is only effective when the dual function board is installed Description Symbol Set Select one of 35 sets This specifies which country s characters PCL symbol set are assigned to cert
280. dumped or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal state and local environmental regulations Contaminated Packaging Waste may be disposed or incinerated under conditions which meet all federal state and local environmental regulations 14 TRANSPORT INFORMATION UN Classification None Not classified as hazardous for transport 15 REGULATORY INFORMATION US Information TSCA Toxic Substances Control Act chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under TSCA SARA Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act Title III 302 Extreme Hazardous Substance None 311 312 Hazard Classification None EU Information 1999 45 EC and 67 548 EEC Symbol amp Indication Not required R Phrase Not required 76 769 EEC All chemical substances in this product comply with all applicable rules or order under 76 769 EEC 16 INFORMATION NFPA Rating USA Health 1 Flammability 1 Reactivity 0 WHMIS Legislation Canada This product is not a controlled product References IARC 1996 IARC monographs on the Evaluation of the Carcinogenic Risk of Chemicals to Humans Vol 65 Printing Process And Printing Inks Carbon Black and Some Nitro Compounds Lyon pp 149 261 H Muhle B Bellmann O Creutzenberg C Dasenbrock H Ernst R Kilpper J C MacKenzie P Morrow U Mohr S Takenaka and R Mermelstein 1991 Pulmonary Response to Toner upon Chronic Inhalation Exposure in Rats Fun
281. e 2 sided to 1 sided 1 Sort function 4 in 1 copy Margin shift copy Dual page copy El amp Edge erase copy Card shot These only appear when the dual function board is installed 5 6 7 Copy ratio display Displays the copy ratio for reduction or enlargement Paper size display Displays the selected paper size When AUTO appears the most suitable size of paper is automatically selected Paper tray display The selected paper tray is highlighted OPERATION IN COPY PRINT SCAN AND FAX MODES Some operations in the various modes of the machine cannot take place simultaneously Interrupting operation Copy output Interrupted operation Printing Faxing Scanning originals Printing Scanning faves Copying Output Yes No No No No Printing Output Yes 2 Yes 4 Yes 5 No No Scanning Scanning an original No No No Scanning an original No Faxing Output No 1 Can be used after pressing the INTERRUPT key 2 After the page that is currently being printed is output the job is interrupted 3 Only possible when the computer is connected to the USB 2 port 4 Only possible when the computer is connected to the parallel port or USB 1 port the job is interrupted after the page that is currently being printed is output 5 After output of the page that is currently being print
282. e F code polling memory box 51 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES Checking and clearing document data in a box The procedures for checking document data in an F code polling memory box by printing the data and for clearing the data are generally the same as in Printing documents in the Public Box page 40 and Deleting documents from the Public Box page 41 Perform steps 2 through 4 of g Select PRINT or DELETE with the Scanning a document into polling V or A key OO ADD 2 Select S A M POLL ORIG with the CHANGE V or A key DELETE 4 a SELECT READING MEMORY POLLING If you selected PRINT press the OK key to begin printing If you selected DELETE go to step 7 Press the OK key OK O ING A screen appears asking you to confirm the deletion 8 Select YES with the V or A key SEL S A POLL BX MD ocunent Plan Document Plan 1 ee VES Document Tech 3 LISTSDETAIL A checkmark appears next to the box name of boxes that have document data If not all letters of the programmed name appear press the key to display all letters Press the key 9 Press the OK key again to return to the previous display OK The documents are deleted B Press the OK key from the F code polling memory box OK Deletion is not possible while the box is being used To cancel the deletion select NO 52 TRANSMISSION USING F
283. e File and Print Sharing button Enable I want to be able to allow others to print to my printer s by clicking the checkbox and then click the OK button 5 Click the OK button in the Network dialog box If a message appears asking you to restart the computer click the Yes button and restart the computer After restarting the computer open the printer folder and continue the setup procedure from Step 6 6 Click Printers and Other Hardware in the Control Panel and click Printers and Faxes In operating systems other than Windows XP double click the Printers icon Iu Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer driver icon and select Sharing from the File menu 12 PRINTER SHARING CLIENT SETTINGS Follow the procedure below to install the printer driver on the client Note If your operating system is Windows NT 4 0 refer to Settings in Windows NT 4 0 page 14 Click the start button and then click 6 Select Browse for a printer and click Control Panel the Next button In Windows 95 98 Me 2000 click the Start Windows 95 98 Me click the Browse button and select Settings button f you are using Windows 2000 select Type Click Printers and Other Hardware the printer name or click Next to browse for a and then Printers and Faxes printer and then click the Next button In Windows 95 98 Me 2000 click Printers 3 Click Add a printer in
284. e remove the paper from the tray and store it in a dark place in a bag to prevent moisture absorption Operation manual for general information and copier You did not set sufficient margins in the paper settings of your application The top and bottom of the paper may be dirty if the margins are set outside of the specified print quality area Set the margins within the specified print quality area The printed image is skewed or it runs off the paper The paper size set in the printer driver is not the same as the paper size loaded in the tray Make sure that the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the tray If the Fit to Page setting is selected make sure that the paper size selected in the Fit To Paper Size drop down list is the same as the size of the paper loaded in the tray The image orientation setting in the printer driver is not correct Click the Paper tab in the printer driver setup screen and make sure the Image Orientation setting is correct Paper is not loaded properly Make sure the paper is properly loaded Operation manual for general information and copier The margins are not set correctly in the application Check the paper size and margin settings in the application Also make sure that the print settings are correct for the paper size 29 TROUBLESHOOTING A notice page is printed If you find that a n
285. e 37 click the close button 1532 16B 1 28 in the top right corner of the page When the connection is completed the Web page will appear in your Web browser ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR USERS page 21 20 ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR USERS When you access the user Web pages in the machine the following page will appear in your browser A menu frame appears on the left side of the page When you click an item in the menu a screen appears in the right frame that allows you to configure settings for that item 1 AREEN SHARPE 2 k System Information Link Version Marnier 1234557037 Mama et SF xx Brian calice fiat Get Gurrent coins 3 4 e Lipsiae FR 5 6 1 Menu frame 4 Printer Test Page Click a setting in the menu to configure it The Printer Settings List which shows printer condition settings and key operator settings and 2 System Intormation various font lists can be printed Shows the current status of the machine and model name 5 Condition Settings e Device Status Configure basic printer settings and printer Shows the current status of the machine paper language settings trays output trays toner and other supplies x PRINTER DEFAULT SETTINGS page 23 and page counts 6 Admin Mode Out of paper and other warnings appear in red Device Configurat
286. e bypass tray If you add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume Note that if the AUTO TRAY SWITCHING setting is selected in the PAPER SIZE SET accessed by pressing the SPECIAL FUNCTION key and there is the same size of paper in another tray the machine will automatically switch to the other tray and continue printing PAUSING A PRINT JOB To pause a print job press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and then select OFFLINE with the W key The machine pauses the print job and then goes offline cancel a print job press the C key e To resume printing select ONLINE with the A key WHEN PAPER SOURCE IS SET TO AUTO SELECT If Paper Source is set to Auto Select in the Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen and the correct size of paper for a print job is not loaded in the machine the printing procedure will vary depending on the FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT setting page 26 in the key operator programs When FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is disabled Add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume When FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is enabled The closest size of paper in a tray other than the bypass tray will be used for printing When the dual function board is installed f the print image is
287. e contents of the license agreement and then click the Yes 2 Double click the CD ROM icon button on the desktop Read the message the window that H Double click the MacOS folder appears and click the Continue button n Installation of the PPD file begins Double click the Installer icon After the installation a message prompting you to restart your computer will appear Click the OK The installer window will appear button and restart your computer 5 Click the Install button This completes the installation of the software Pointer Driver installer m 7 Dues iH ROOM EI LaserWriter8 checkbox is selected X in Extensions Manager in Control Panels If not install it from the system CD ROM supplied with your Macintosh computer If you are using Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 make sure that LaserWriter8 has been installed and that the f Note INSTALLING THE SCREEN FONTS MAC OS 8 6 9 2 2 Macintosh screen fonts are contained in the Font folder of the PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM that accompanies the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N The screen fonts are installed by copying the required screen font suitcase folders to your Macintosh Copy the screen fonts to the following folder Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 Fonts folder in the System Folder PN If you experience problems that may be due to the installed screen fonts immediately delete the copied font suitcase folder from the system
288. e glass cleaner to its original position CLEANING THE BYPASS TRAY PAPER FEED ROLLER If misfeeds occur frequently when feeding postcards envelopes or heavy paper through the bypass tray wipe the surface of the paper feed roller with a soft clean cloth dampened with alcohol or water CLEANING THE TRANSFER CHARGER If white or black lines appear in copies or the image is blotchy the transfer charger may be dirty Follow the steps below to clean the charger the power switch off B Place the charger cleaner on the transfer charger and gently slide the cleaner in the direction indicated by the arrow two or three times ges If the sheet metal on the E transfer charger is smudged with toner wipe it with a soft clean cloth Slide the charger cleaner from one end to the other end along the groove of the transfer charger If the cleaner is stopped it reaches the other end or if the direction of movement is reversed smudges may appear on copies UT Return the charger cleaner to its H While lifting the handle gently pull out g original position tray 1 8 Turn the power switch to the position 38 ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST The contrast of the display can be adjusted as explained below Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key the contrast with the lt 4 or gt key To reset the contrast to the FUNCTION SS default setting press the C k
289. e of image files sent using Scan to E mail the factory default setting is Unlimited A limit can be set from 1 MB to 10 MB Consult the administrator of the Web page to select a suitable limit Page 12 The amount of data that can be sent in one e mail transmission is sometimes limited by the administrator of the mail server Even if the file size is within the limit explained above if it exceeds the limit set by the administrator of the mail server the file will not be delivered to the recipient Decrease the amount of data sent in the e mail transmission reduce the number of pages scanned Ask your mail server administrator what the data limit is for one e mail transmission Transmission takes long time When there is a large amount of image information the data file is also large and transmission takes a long time TROUBLESHOOTING MAXIMUM RESOLUTION When scanning takes place with the resolution set to the maximum resolution 600 dpi the resolution may change depending on the amount of memory available the original size the color mode and other scanning conditions The table below shows the relation between the possible scanning area and the scanning conditions Note that the following examples are for standard memory in the machine and 128 MB or more of memory in the network expansion kit dpi Models without the two sided printing function Models with the two sided printing function 11
290. e three types of auto dialling Rapid dialling speed dialling and group dialling To program auto dial numbers see page 62 Rapid dialling A stored destination can be dialled by simply pressing a Rapid key 01 to 50 A name up to 36 characters 811234567890 length can be programmed for the location a amp ZMEMORY amp AUTO maximum of 12 characters are displayed When using F code transmission a sub address and passcode page 48 can also be programmed The programmed user names appear Speed dialling 300 stations A stored destination can be dialled by pressing the SU iene UNES SPEED key entering a 3 digit number 000 to 299 and pressing the START key A name sx REL maximum 36 characters can be stored for each destination When using F code transmission a sub address and The Speed number entry STANDARD passcode page 48 can also be programmed Screen appears Group dialling Multiple Rapid dial and or Speed dial destinations can be stored in a Rapid key for Group dialling 0123456789 Destinations can also be stored for Group dialling by BROADCAST entering fax numbers with the numeric keys This is Me convenient for communicating with a group of other fax machines The programmed group names appear
291. eception PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 or PATTERN 3 can be selected 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select TX RX END SOUND with the or key and then press the OK key KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 4 Select SEND or RECEIVE with the V or A key and then press the OK key Select PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 or PATTERN 3 with the V or A key and then press the OK key Before pressing the OK key to store your selection you can press the key to listen to the selected pattern TX RX END SOUND LENGTH This setting is used to select the length of the end sound in seconds Selections are 2 0 sec 2 5 sec 3 0 sec 8 5 sec and 4 0 sec 3 0 sec is normally selected 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select END SOUND LENGTH with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Select the number of seconds with the V or A key and then press the OK key EXTENSION TEL Enable this setting when an extension telephone is connected to the machine An extension telephone connected to the machine cannot be used until this setting is enabled The initial setting is enabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select IN
292. ecified time arrives To return to the TIME SETTING display press the BACK key ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS 8 Press the OK key g Perform the desired fax operation OK The selected day is set The steps that follow will depend on the type of operation The following operations can be performed as a timer operation e Normal transmission page 18 e Broadcast transmission page 32 e Polling page 36 e Serial polling page 38 F code polling page 53 F code confidential transmission page 55 F code relay request transmission page 59 To cancel a timer operation after the above procedure has been completed follow the procedure in ote CANCELLING A FAX TRANSMISSION page 26 Atimer job number is automatically assigned to the operation This number can be used to cancel a stored job See the note Contents of the stored job screen screen of step 3 on page 27 Other operations can be performed after a timer operation is set up If another operation is in progress when the specified time arrives the timer transmission will begin when the job in progress is completed 35 TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION USING THE POLLING FUNCTION The polling function allows your machine to call a fax machine that has a document ready for transmission and initiate reception of the document You can also perform the reverse operation scan a document into the memory of your machine so that a
293. ect TRANSFER g Press the OK key OK The machine automatically dials the forwarding number programmed in the key operator programs and begins forwarding the fax or faxes To cancel a forwarding operation Press the FAX STATUS key and then cancel forwarding in the same way as a regular fax transmission See CANCELLING A FAX TRANSMISSION on page 26 The fax es that was going to be forwarded will return to print standby status in your machine If forwarding is not possible because the other machine is busy or a transmission error occurs recall attempts will be made according to the recall times setting If forwarding is still not successful after the set number of recall attempts are made the fax es will return to print standby status in your machine When forwarding is performed all faxes that have been received in memory to that point are forwarded The page that was being printed when the problem occurred and all following pages will be forwarded After a fax is forwarded the fax data is automatically cleared from memory ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS 47 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES This chapter explains F code transmission which gives you a convenient means of performing advanced operations such as relay broadcast transmission and confidential transmission Please read those sections that are of interest to you COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MACHINES SUPPORTING F CODES This machine supports
294. ect PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME with the V or key and then press the OK key 8 Select SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key 9 Enter the printout time with the numeric keys and press the OK key If you make a mistake move the cursor to the incorrect digit with the lt q or key the cursor should be over the digit and then enter the correct digit After step 9 you will return to step 8 If you need to change the set time follow steps 8 and 9 to enter the new time To cancel a PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME setting follow these steps 1 Select CANCEL in step 8 and then press the OK key 2 Select CANCEL with the W or A key and then press the OK key If AUTO PRINT REPT AT LIMIT 50 is not enabled and the number of recorded transactions exceeds 50 each new transaction will delete the oldest transaction The activity report can also be printed out on demand See PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY on page 81 96 INITIAL SETTING These programs are used to change the default settings initially set at the factory for the various fax functions to settings that better meet your needs PAUSE TIME This setting is used to select the duration of pauses that are inserted in destination fax numbers Normally the setting is 2 seconds which means that each time the PAUSE key is pressed when dia
295. ed A name up to 36 characters long and the end receiving machines are programmed in each box A combined total of 120 end receiving machines can be programmed in all F code relay groups boxes If 120 end receiving machines are programmed in one F code relay group no end receiving machines can be programmed in other F code relay groups End receiving machines can be stored using the numeric keys Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys Auto dial destinations that already have a sub address and passcode programmed cannot be used Only one relay group can be specified when making a relay request Multiple relay groups cannot be simultaneously selected e To create an F code relay group box and store edit and delete end receiving machines see pages 74 76 and 79 When creating a box a passcode SID can be omitted The relay request machine only bears the expense of sending the document to the relay machine The relay machine bears the expense of sending the document to each of the end receiving machines 58 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES USING THE F CODE RELAY BROADCAST FUNCTION your machine is the relay machine When a document is received from a relay request machine the F code relay broadcast function transmits the document to the end receiving machines using a memory box only if the sub address and passcode sent by the relay request machine are correct To create edit or delete an F code relay group box see pages
296. ed to match the paper loaded in the machine Pape Site Papp Site 110 170i 237 x 420 Paper Size Ledger or A3 Ledge or J Fit To Paper Size Letter or A4 Duker H Click on the Fit to Page checkbox When using the PS printer driver select Fit To Paper Size in Zoom Setting Fi To Pape Se Fi Ta Pape Sire de Pag EFi io Page Ledger on Or PYF Bon Ledger or size Letter or A4 size Letigi document paper Paper Size Fit To Paper Size When using the PS printer driver the print image can be enlarged or reduced by means of numerical values The vertical and horizontal ratios can be set separately Select XY Zoom in step 3 click the Width Length button and adjust the ratios in the screen that appears 11 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES The print image can be rotated 180 degrees i At mage Dinerdabnn This feature rotates the print image 180 degrees to enable correct printing on C Posi paper that can only be loaded in one orientation To use this function select the image orientation in Image Orientation on the m Fidis 180 Paper tab and then click on the Rotate 180 degrees checkbox i X To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 Printing result Landscape Landscape Rotate 180 degrees L Rotate 180 degrees The procedure for loading paper is explained in the Operati
297. ed via the parallel port or USB 1 port the job is interrupted Printing is not possible when the front or side cover is opened for machine maintenance or when a misfeed occurs or the machine runs out of paper or toner or when the drum cartridge reaches its replacement time e f an original misfeed occurs in the SPF printing will not be possible until the misfed original is removed and the SPF is ready for use 16 TURNING THE POWER AND OFF The power switch is located on the left side of the machine POWER ON POWER OFF Turn the power switch to the ON position Make sure that the machine is not in operation e It will take about 45 seconds and then turn the power switch to the OFF for the machine to warm up position When the power switch is turned to the ON position the message System check will appear in the message display and warm up will start Once the copier has finished warming up the message display will change to Ready to copy and the START indicator will light up to indicate that copying is possible Copy settings can be selected during warm up If auditing mode has been enabled see the Key operator s guide the message Enter your account number will appear after warming up Once a valid account number has been entered the message display will change to Ready to copy and copying will be possible If the power switch is turned off while the machine is in f the fa
298. ee steps 3 and 4 on page 65 Enter a passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 5 and 6 on page 65 PROGRAMMING EDITING AND DELETING F CODE MEMORY BOXES To edit or delete an F code box F code confidential box F code relay group box or F code public box follow steps 1 through 6 on page 74 and then follow the steps below Note that an F code confidential box or F code public box cannot be edited or deleted if it contains document data Select S A CONF BOX S A RELAY or S A MEM POLLING with the V or A key CHANGE DELETE S A RELAY GRP v S A MEM POLLING e f you selected S A CONF BOX in step 7 follow the steps in EDITING DELETING AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL BOX below e f you selected S A RELAY GRP in step 7 follow the steps in EDITING AND DELETING F CODE RELAY GROUPS on page 79 e f you selected S A MEM POLLING in step 7 follow the steps in EDITING DELETING F CODE PUBLIC BOXES on page 80 EDITING DELETING AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL BOX Select CHANGE or DELETE with EJs V or A key f you selected CHANGE in step 9 follow the steps in Editing an F code confidential box on page 78 f you selected DELETE in step 9 follow the steps in Deleting an F code confidential box on page 78 77 PROGRAMMING e Editing an F code confidential box 11 Select the name of the F code con
299. egins the Print Status Window automatically opens The Print Status Window is a utility that monitors the machine and informs you of the name of the document being printed and any errors that occur 1 2 5 Document Hare 4 5 6 7 1 Status window 5 Cancel Job button Provides information on the current status of the Printing can be canceled by clicking this button printer before the machine receives the job 2 Status icons 6 Help button The status icons appear to alert you to printer Click this button to display the help file for the errors Nothing appears when printing is taking Print Status Window place normally The icons are explained below Follow the instructions in the status window to solve the problem 7 Close button Click this button to close the Print Status Window Print Status An error has occurred that requires immediate attention An error has occurred that requires attention soon 3 Tab Click a tab to bring it to the front The Options tab allows you to select display options for the Print Status Window 4 Document Name Shows the name of the document currently being printed 10 2 PRINTER SHARING This chapter explains how to configure the machine as a shared printer in a Windows network environment Configuring the machine as a shared printer enables computers that are not directly connected to the machine to print to the machine
300. elephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Do not install or use the machine near water or when you are wet Take care not to spill any liquids on the machine NOTICE FOR USERS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND Your fax machine and the telephone system WARNING NOTICE NO calls can be made to or from this fax during a mains power failure This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures WARNING Australian Communications Authority ACA regulations state that no unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment are permitted Note Complies with the following standards ACA TS001 1997 AS NZS 60950 2000 AS ACIF S002 2001 NZ TELECOM and AS NZS CISPR 22 2002 These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against interference in an installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause interference However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment do
301. en adjust the original guides to the width of your originals and place the originals face up in the document feeder tray You will return to the base B Set the number of copies and press the START key 9 To stop copying in the middle of a run press the C key 0C AT ORGIMLSZE DUPLEX SCA Q Do not touch an original A that is on the AST ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCAN Note n reversing tray Doing so may cause misfeed The duplex mode selection Screen appears H Select 2 to 2 with the V or A key or with the DUPLEX key COPY MODE 1tol E 1 to 2 59 COPY FUNCTIONS ONE SIDED COPIES OF TWO SIDED ORIGINALS ONLY WHEN USING THE RSPF Y Paper sizes that can be used are 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R A3 BA A4 A4R B5 B5R and A5 Automatic two sided copying is not possible when the bypass tray is used This copy function cannot be used in combination with dual page copy Make sure that an original does not 4 If you wish to have the orientation of remain on the document glass and the back image be opposite the then adjust the original guides to the orientation of the front image set width of your originals and place the BINDING CHANGE to ON with the originals face up in the document 4 or gt key feeder tray AON COPY MODE If the copies
302. en press the OK key 3 Select AUTO REDUCE TX with the V or A key and then press the OK key e AUTO REDUCE is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled ROTATE TX This setting is used to select whether or not an A4 or 8 1 2 x 11 size original that is oriented vertically amp will be rotated to a horizontal orientation i before transmission Rotation is normally enabled and vertically oriented originals are rotated counterclockwise A4 A5R and 8 1 2 x 11 size originals that are oriented horizontally W are not rotated Rotation transmission can be selected separately for different original sizes To disable a rotation setting clear the checkbox from the appropriate setting 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select ROTATE TX with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select the desired original size and press the OK key Size selections are A4 ABR and 8 1 2 x 11 When a checkmark appears in the checkbox of the selected original size rotation transmission is enabled for that size If the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled D change the setti
303. ension phone connected the machine or using on hook dialling direct transmission is automatically selected Memory transmission is not possible Faxing by direct transmission 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC Press the OK key PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES page 18 2 Press the COMM SETTING key The communication settings screen appears i g Select DIRECT TX with the V or SYMBOL E A key SELECT SENDING The communication settings screen can QO MEMORY TX also be displayed from the function selection TX screen Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key to display the special function selection screen select COMM SETTING with the A key and press the OK key g Press the OK key Select TX with the V or A key H OK e H Dial the fax number Group dialling cannot be used 23 BASIC OPERATIONS Press the START key To change from Direct Transmission back to Memory Transmission select MEMORY TX in step 5 When using the document Tocancel a direct transmission press the glass multiple original pages C key cannot be transmitted in a single transmission Faxing by manual transmission using the SPEAKER key a Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC Perform steps 7 and 8 of Faxing by PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES direct transmission page 23 to 24 page 18 To can
304. entry screen appears the SPEED LIST See PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY on page 81 4 continue from step 6 of BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES page 19 To cancel transmission To cancel transmission while READING appears or before the key is pressed press the C or CA key To cancel a transmission job that is already stored press the FAX STATUS key and cancel the job as explained on page 26 A job number 3 digits appears in the display with HEAD END when transmission is performed If you make a note of this number after performing a broadcast transmission you can use the number to check the results of the transmission in the transaction report or activity report 20 BASIC OPERATIONS SEARCHING FOR A PROGRAMMED DESTINATION USING THE ADDRESS KEY At the time of dialling you can enter letters to search for a destination stored in a Rapid key Speed Dial number or Group key Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC B Select the desired destination with the PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES V or A key page 18 ADDRESS Press the ADDRESS key Johnson COPY ISTOSDETATL KEY WORDS PAPER COPY AUTO PSURE SELECT RATIO IMAGE OUTI The search results appear in the following order upper case letters lower case letters special characters and numbers The search letter entry f not all letters of the destination na
305. eps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select PRINT STATION IN RCVD DATA with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Press the V or A key to select OUT or IN DATA and then press the OK key ACC NAME PRINT When using auditing mode this setting determines whether or not the recipient is notified of the sender s account name when a fax is sent This setting is initially disabled the recipient is not notified 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select NAME PRINT with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox This setting is only effective if auditing mode is enabled f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled 101 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS RECALL SETTING BUSY This program is used to set the number of recall attempts and the interval between recall attempts when a transmission is not successful due to the line being busy or other reason Normally the machine is set to make 2 recall attempts at intervals of 3 minutes If you do not wish to have recalling take place set the number of attempts to 0 steps 6 and 7 1 Foll
306. er ll RAPID SPEED with the V or A key 42 H CHANGE DELETE COPY 4 1 OK e B Press a Rapid key 01 to 50 or the SPEED key To edit a Rapid key press the Rapid key that you wish to edit 01 to 50 A B D E 31 2 ut 3 3 I I F G 1 J 37 edit Speed Dial number press the SPEED key and then enter the Speed Dial number 000 to 299 that you wish to edit with the numeric keys V XYZ 5 REDIAL PAUSE SPEED SETTING L SPACE 24 ABC 1 2 3 ENTER DIAL 4 4 5 8 07 mths amp 612345678 Move the cursor to the digit s that you wish to edit with the lt q or gt key and then enter the correct digit s with the numeric keys To delete a digit move the cursor to the digit that you wish to delete with the lt q or p gt key and then press the C key Press the OK key OK O Edit the name of the destination see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 9 Press the OK key OK O Edit the search characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 Characters added in step 8 will appear at the end of the previously stored search characters Maximum of 10 chara
307. eration manual for general information and copier Trademark Acknowledgments Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Server 2003 and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries Netscape Navigator is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation Macintosh Power Macintosh Mac OS LaserWriter and AppleTalk are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc PC AT and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation PCL is a trademark of the Hewlett Packard Company PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc Agfa and the Agfa Rhombus are registered trademarks of Agfa Gevaert A G All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications CONTENTS INTRODUGC
308. erc deeds 15 E Envelopes 1 E EORR RERO 20 ElaS CODY EET 69 Ql a ES 13 Exposure Making copy darker or lighter 48 EXPOSURE 15 48 F FAX key 15 FAX STATUS K9y id oett Pr hacen e rae 14 FeatUres eno aO NEARER 10 Feeding roller cover 13 29 Front COV FL eic i ER EL EE N 12 Fusing unit paper 13 33 Fusing unit release levers 13 32 G Glass cleaner fe dn eges 12 37 H Handles enge DIDI eene ieu 12 l Indicators and display messages 28 Installation requirements 8 INTERRUPT 14 63 INTERRUPT 14 J Job separator tray 12 L LINE indicator eere mr eee 15 LINE 15 Loading 18 Loading paper in the bypass 20 M Main features eeesessseseeeeeenneenerennn 10 Maintenance 28 Manuals provided with the product 9 Margin shift
309. es cause interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment to an outlet on a different circuit to that which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The Ringer Equivalence Number REN for this equipment is written on the A Tick label Important safety information In Australia installing or modifying telephone lines should only be done by an ACA licensed serviceman In New Zealand installing or modifying telephone lines should be done in accordance with Telecom wiring practices BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCTION This chapter contains basic information about using the fax function of the machine Please read this chapter before using the fax function POINTS TO CHECK AND PROGRAM AFTER INSTALLATION After installing the machine and before using it as a fax machine check the following points and program the required information Set the date and time The machine has an internal clock It is important to set the correct date and time because they are used for such features as Timer Transmission page 34 The date and time are set in the key operator programs Page 99 The date an
310. escription language Normally there is no need to enter a file type 27 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs are used to prohibit changes to the Condition Settings and to configure interface settings Default settings Select the setting for which you wish to prohibit changes Interface settings Enable monitoring of data sent to the network port and set restrictions Configuring a setting in the key operator programs 1 Click Key operator programs the Make a selection for the setting in the menu frame screen that appears The Default Settings See Key operator programs for descriptions of screen of the Key the settings operator programs will 4 Click Submit to store the entered information appear If you wish to select a setting in the Default Settings screen go to step 3 2 Click the desired setting Key Operator Programs diim im id 15 Litera Sereno attimgs Fuge Fririling Key operator programs When YES appears in the Settings column YES is selected when a checkmark appears in the checkbox of the item and is selected when checkmark does not appear Default settings Item Settings Description Prohibit Test Page Printing YES NO This setting is used to prohibit printing of a printer test page Disable Default Setting Changes YES NO This setting is used to p
311. ettings it will be SCXxxxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on your machine If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed select the zone which includes the printer H Click the machine s model name SCxxxxxx in the Select a PostScript Printer list Click the Create button f the Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears select the PPD file of your model and then click the Select button elf the Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box does not appear follow these steps to select the PPD file manually when you return to the Chooser dialog box 1 Verify that the machine is selected in the Select a PostScript Printer list and then click the Setup button and the Select PPD button 2 Select the PPD file of your model and then click the Open or Select button 3 Click the OK button Verify that the machine is selected in the Select a PostScript Printer list and then click the Setup button and the Configure button Li ferred Pomel reese PEG Srinrind par tae eer maaseng ms 38 6 Configure the printer driver based the options that have been installed and then click the OK button Click the OK button to close the dialog box 8 Click the Close box to close the Chooser This completes the configuration of the printer driver TROUB
312. etwork expansion kit is installed in the machine a document or photo can be scanned into an image file and sent over a network or the Internet to a file server e mail destination or your own computer You can select from the following transmission methods as the destination where you wish to send the scanned image depending on where you wish to send the scanned image data 1 The scanned image can be sent to a memory storage device on a network a designated directory on an FTP server This is called Scan to FTP in this manual When sending a scanned image to an FTP server an e mail message can also be sent to a preset e mail address to inform the recipient of the location of the scanned image data This is called Scan to FTP Hyperlink in this manual Ascanned image can be sent to a computer connected to the same network as the machine This is called Scan to Desktop in this manual Before Scan to Desktop can be performed the software in the CD ROM that accompanies the network expansion kit AR NB3 must be installed For the procedure for installing the software see the Sharpdesk installation guide The scanned image can be sent to an e mail recipient This is called Scan to E mail in this manual SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SC
313. ever in this case F code chain dialling transmission speed and international transmission mode options cannot be selected If you need to select an option for the destination store the destination in a Rapid key or Speed Dial number and then store the destination in the group key Up to 50 digits can be entered for the fax number If you need to insert a pause between any of the digits press the REDIAL PAUSE key to enter a pause The pause appears as a hyphen To set the duration of the pause see PAUSE TIME page 96 When you have finished entering the fax number press the OK key g Repeat step 5 for all of the destinations that you wish to store in the group key Up to 150 destinations can be stored in a group key However note that when multiple group keys are programmed the total number of destinations that can be stored in all group keys is 200 H Press the START key The group key is stored 67 PROGRAMMING Editing and deleting auto dial numbers To edit or delete an auto dial number follow steps 1 through 6 on pages 62 and 63 and then follow the steps below A Rapid key or Speed Dial number cannot be edited or cleared in the following cases The Rapid key or Speed Dial number is being used in a transmission in progress or in a stored transmission The Rapid key or Speed Dial number is stored in a group key program or F code relay group Editing a Rapid key or Speed Dial numb
314. exposure as with any non toxic dust Try not to disperse the particles Storage Technical Measures None Storage Conditions Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place Keep out of the reach of children Incompatible Products None 8 EXPOSURE CONTROLS PERSONAL PROTECTION Engineering Measures Ventilation Not required under intended use 76 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 3 4 Date Revised Aug 18 2003 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 01211 Exposure Limit Values OSHA PEL USA ACGIH TLV USA Personal Protective 15mg m Total Dust 5mg m Respirable Dust 10mg m Total Dust 3mg m Respirable Dust Equipment Respiratory Protection Not required under intended use Hand Protection Eye Protection Skin Protection Not required under intended use Not required under intended use Not required under intended use Other Protective Equipment Use of a dust mask and goggles are recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long term exposure as with any non toxic dust 9 PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES Appearance Physical State Solid Form Powder Color Black Odor odorless Ph Not applicable Boiling Melting Point Not applicable Softening Point C 100 130 Flash Point C Not applicable Ignition Point C gt 350 Explosion Properties No data Density g cm 1 1 bulk density 0 35 Solubility in
315. ey mESPECIAL MODES ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET v DISPLAY CONTRAST B Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key screen will appear The special function SPECIAL FUNCTION You will return to the base Select DISPLAY CONTRAST with e screen the V or A key 2 SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL MODES ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET The display contrast adjustment screen will appear 39 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES Optional equipment and supplies are explained in this chapter To purchase optional equipment and supplies contact your dealer or SHARP service OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT Convenient optional equipment can be installed on the machine as needed As a part of our policy of continuous improvement SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product improvement without prior notice Peripheral devices are normally optional but are incorporated in some models as standard equipment AR M162 Reversing single pass feeder AR RP6N No Single pass feeder AR SP6N Yes Document cover AR VR5 Standard 250 sheet paper feed unit AR D24 Yes 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit AR D25 Yes Job separator tray kit AR TR4 Yes Dual function board AR EB9 Yes 256MB expansion memory board AR SM5 Yes Facsimile expansion kit AR FX11 Yes 8MB fax memory 9 Yes Network expansion kit AR NB3 Yes PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N Yes
316. ey in step 5 Deleting a single account number 1 step 4 of Programming a new account number select DELETE and then press the OK key 2 Select DELETE 1 ACC with the W A key and then press the OK key 3 Enterthe account number 5 digits with the numeric keys and then press the OK key f the number is not correct press the C key re enter the number Enter a programmed account number If you enter an account number that has not been programmed you will not advance to step 4 when the OK key is pressed To cancel the deletion press the BACK key 4 Select YES with the V or key and then press the OK key Check the account number that appears in the display before deleting it Press the OK key to return to the screen of step 3 To delete another number repeat steps 3 through 4 To exit press the BACK key in step 3 Deleting all account numbers 1 In step 4 of Programming a new account number select DELETE and then press the OK key 2 Select DELETE ALL ACC with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select YES with the V or A key and then press the OK key To cancel the deletion select NO and press the OK key Changing an account number step 4 of Programming new account number select CHANGE and press the OK key 2 Enter the account number that you wish to change and then the new account number
317. f rings is set to 0 the machine will P Note ue job UE din a sensor that bee receive faxes without ringing when a tray is full When approximately ging sheets accumulate in a tray a message appears in the display and fax printing stops If this happens remove the sheets Printing will resume momentarily Earlier output of received data If a fax cannot be printed because the machine is out of the appropriate paper and another fax is subsequently received that can be printed the subsequently received fax will be printed before the fax that cannot be printed This also happens when there are several faxes in memory that cannot be printed This function can be disabled in the key operator programs See EARLIER OUTPUT on page 106 LINE STATUS indicator After a received fax is printed the LINE STATUS indicator will blink while the printed fax remains on the job separator tray When the fax is removed from the tray the indicator stops blinking If the job separator tray kit is not installed the LINE STATUS indicator will FAX turn off when printing of the received fax is finished The conditions under which the indicator blinks and stops blinking vary depending on the settings in the key operator programs See FAX RECEPTION LIGHT on page 103 2 If a removed fax is returned to the job separator tray the LINE STATUS indicator will not resume blinking 28 BASIC OPERATIONS F code confidential fax reception
318. f scanning in memory transmission mode appears A screen asking you to confirm cancellation of the transmission appears 26 BASIC OPERATIONS Cancelling a stored transmission job If you do not wish to cancel a stored transmission job and only wish to check its status press the BACK key instead of the C key in step 4 to exit 1 Press the FAX STATUS key 5 Select YES with the V or A key FAX STATUS Job cancelled N QO TX RX RESERVE v TX RX COMPLETED The fax job status screen is displayed When a transmission is in progress the job Press the OK key f Note being transmitted is displayed Press the BACK key to display the fax status selection screen B The selected transmission job is COMM cancelled 0123456789 O SERIAL POLL MODE If you wish to cancel another transmission job repeat steps 1 through 6 You can check cancelled recall mode jobs in Note Activity Report CANCEL will appear in Select TX RX RESERVE with the V the column of the report g or A key Contents of the stored job screen screen of FAX STATUS step 3 A WAITING XXX XXX B 701234 C 0 P XXX CNo XX E F XX XX A Current status WAITING will appear next to stored transmission jobs and timer transmission WAITING XXX XXX jobs RECALL will appear next to recall 6BC Co Ri mode jobs
319. fidential box that you wish to edit with the V or A key _ S A CONF BOX 3 LIST S DETAIL If not all letters of the box name appear press the s key to display all letters Press the s key once again to return to the original screen Press the OK key JKL Enter the correct print passcode that was programmed when the confidential box was programmed M Press the OK key Edit the name of the F code confidential box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 See step 9 on page 75 If you do not wish to edit the name go to the next step Press the OK key Edit the sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 3 and 4 on page 65 f you do not need to edit the sub address press the OK key and go to the next step 78 Edit the passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps 5 and 6 on page 65 f you do not need to edit the passcode press the OK key and go to the next step Edit the print passcode 4 digits with the numeric keys e See steps 13 and 14 on page 75 f you do not need to edit the print passcode press the OK key Deleting an F code confidential box Select the name of the F code confidential box that you wish to delete with the V or A key ud js S A CONF BOX 3 LIST S DETAIL If not all letters of the box name appear press the s key to d
320. figure the settings for the option PRINT TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS THAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING On models that have the two sided printing function both sides of the paper can Document Style be printed on To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select 2 Sided 1Sided Book or 2 Sided Tablet from Document Style in the Main tab 2 Sided Book To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 2 Sided Tablet 2 Paper sizes that can be used for two sided printing Ledger Letter Legal Foolscap A3 4 5 4 and 5 The bypass tray cannot be used for two sided printing The following example shows the result when portrait data is printed on both sides of the paper Printing result 2 Sided Book 2 Sided Tablet Print data 124 2 O EEREREEREREERHEEEMe wanuna The pages are printed so that The pages are printed so that they can be bound at the side they can be bound at the top PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE This feature allows you to reduce and print two or four document pages on a single sheet of paper To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select 2 Up or 4 Up for N Up Printing on the Main tab To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 2 The N Up Printing setting is not available when Fit to Page is selected FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE
321. five Znote e f you enter a account number for copy Note de that has also b df 299 with the numeric keys Note that has also been programmed for 5 NN display of the base screen After 6 seconds factory programs is enabled a warning message default setting the base screen appears Page 18 will appear and operation will not be In copy mode and print mode the number of sheets permitted for 1 minute if an invalid account remaining until the limit is reached is also shown if number is entered 3 times in a row ACCOUNT LIMIT see the Key operator s guide is enabled in the key operator programs When the copy job is finished press Example Copy mode the ACC C key 0 COPIES MADE 000 000 REMAINING 050 000 000 771579 lf you are performing interrupt copy job page 63 when auditing mode is enabled sure to press the INTERRUPT key CA key or ACC C key 39 when finished to exit interrupt mode 23 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE This chapter explains general troubleshooting and maintenance procedures such as removing misfeeds replacing the toner cartridge and cleaning the machine as well as troubleshooting for the copy function For troubleshooting for the fax function printer function and scanner function see the respective manuals for each function TROUBLESHOOTING MACHINE COPYING PROBLEMS The machine does not operate
322. formation including the copy count print information such as empty toner and paper and count and total output count based on the specified trouble including paper misfeeds to specified schedule The destinations can be set for destinations when such problems occur The administrators and dealers respectively destinations can be set for administrators and dealers respectively To set up the status message follow these steps To set up the alert message follow the procedure 1 Status Message in the menu below frame The Status Message Click Alerts Message in the menu Setup screen will frame appear r Custom Links The Alerts Message Log Setup screen will appear Enter the required information including the destination addresses and time schedule 2 Enter the destination addresses For detailed information click the Help button in the upper right hand corner of the window For detailed information click the Help button in the upper right hand corner of the window Alert Message Setup Avert Message List i E maur Status Message List 1 E mad Address Arche ss mc L e mail Alert Massage List 3 E rriad Akira Click Submit to store the entered information 3 Click Submit to store the entered information When the E mail Status settings are completed printer sed count information will be sent periodically by e mail to If these pa
323. formation and copier toner Can not copy or print OK RETURN There is no toner Replace the toner cartridge REPLACING THE TONER CARTRIDGES in the Operation manual for general information and copier Hang up the receiver The extension phone is off hook When an extension phone is connected Replace the extension phone Unfold original and return XX original s to the document feeder START CONTINUE The detected original size is smaller than the actual original size or a smaller size has been selected Place the originals again and make sure that the size indicated in the display is the same as the actual original size SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION The machine has a self diagnostic function that automatically stops operation if a problem occurs in the machine If a problem occurs in fax mode the following display appears Message display Action amp Call for service Main code Sub code Turn off the power and then turn it back on If the error is not cleared note the 2 digit main code and the 2 digit sub code and then contact your dealer MESSAGES DURING NORMAL OPERATION Message Meaning of message SENT No 001 This appears when a direct transmission ends xx indicates the number of pages READING No 001 P xxx XX The original is being scanned into memory duri
324. from the SPF in direct transmission mode a misfeed occurred ERRORXXXXXX Line conditions prevented the transmission from taking place normally First two digits of transmission error number Indicates an error code from 00 to 31 Last four digits of transmission error number A code for use by service technicians TROUBLESHOOTING Sending result Explanation XX XX OK When group dialling broadcast transmission or F code relay request transmission was performed xxx Indicates total number of transmissions xxx OK Indicates completed transmissions NO S ADD FUNC When an F code transmission was attempted 1 The other machine did not have the F code function 2 An F code was not programmed in the other machine S ADD TX FAIL When an F code transmission was attempted 1 The sub addresses did not match 2 The passcodes did not match 3 An F code public box was set SA POLL ERR When F code public box transmission was attempted 1 The F code public box specified by the sub address did not exist 2 The sub address specified a box other than an F code public box PASSCODE ERR Reception result When F code public box transmission was attempted 1 The passcodes did not match Explanation OK Reception was completed successfully P FAIL The power was turned off or a power failure occurred MEMORY FULL The image memory became full during substitute recepti
325. function page 46 can be used to forward the received fax to another fax machine Use this setting to program the fax number of the destination fax machine Only one fax number can be programmed maximum of 50 digits To specify an F code confidential box in the destination fax machine enter the sub address and passcode after the fax number in steps 6 and 7 below 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select RECEIVED DATA FW STATION SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select STORE with the V or A key and then press the OK key D Enter the forwarding fax number with the numeric keys and then press the OK key 6 Enter the sub address with the numeric keys and then press the OK key If you do not need to specify an F code confidential box in the destination fax machine press the OK key without entering anything 7 passcode with the numeric keys and then press the OK key If you do not need to specify an F code confidential box in the destination fax machine press the OK key without entering anything To delete the number follow these steps 1 Select DELETE in step 4 and then press the OK key 2 Select DELETE with the Y or A key and then press the OK key 105 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS INDEX PRINT This setting is used to have a blac
326. g paper are the same as for copying See the Operation f Note manual for general information and copier When the dual function board is installed Before using the machine in USB 2 0 High speed mode be sure to read USB2 0 MODE and System requirements for USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode in the Key operator s guide BASIC PRINTING The following example explains how to print a document from WordPad Before printing make sure that the correct size of paper for your document has been loaded in the machine Make sure that the ONLINE indicator Select Print from the application s on the operation panel is lit File menu If the ONLINE indicator is not on press the PRINT The Print dialog box will appear key to switch to printer mode and then use the A key to select ONLINE Ready to print o ONLINE DATA PRINT DH v OFFLINE The status of the printer function is indicated by the ONLINE and DATA indicators above the PRINT key ONLINE indicator DATA indicator The machine is online Printing is possible There is print data in memory that has not been printed yet A print job is being Blinking progress or data is canceled 2 being received m The machine is There is no print ilice offline data in memory Printing is not and print data is ie Fia TELS possible not being received Lien m zs rng Fri Fir 2 Start WordPad an
327. g standard USB 2 0 port The USB interface on the machine complies with the USB 2 0 1 1 standard when the dual function board is installed USB 1 USB 1 1 port The machine s USB 2 0 port will transfer data at the speed specified by the USB 2 0 only if the Microsoft USB 2 0 driver is preinstalled in the computer or if the USB 2 0 driver for Windows 2000 Professional XP that Microsoft provides through Windows Update is installed To obtain the full USB 2 0 data transfer speed USB2 0 mode in the machine s key operator programs must be set to Hi Speed For more information see the Key operator s guide Use the machine s Hi Speed mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Even when the Microsoft USB 2 0 driver is used it may not be possible to obtain full USB 2 0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2 0 is used To obtain the latest driver which may enable a higher speed contact the manufacturer of your PC card The cable can also be inserted into a USB 1 1 port However performance will be the same as USB 1 1 Connecting a parallel cable Please purchase a Centronics cable shielded that complies with the following standard The parallel port on the machine complies with IEEE STD 1284 1994 ECP Connector type on the machine 36 pin Amphenol female connector Connecting to a network connector If the machine will be used as a network computer re
328. g system to the following folder in the startup disk Library Printers PPDs Contents Restart your computer Resources Delete the SHARP PPD file in this folder 39 TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION MFP driver does not install Windows 2000 XP If the MFP driver does not install in Windows 2000 XP follow these steps to check your computer s settings the start button and then click Control Panel In Windows 2000 click the Start button select Settings and then click Control Panel Click Performance and Maintenance and then click System In Windows 2000 double click the System icon H Click the Hardware tab and then click the Driver Signing button Check the settings for What action do you want Windows to take File signature verification in Windows 2000 Driver Signing Options rice dt aes lareo maf dalod iavare tad not passed Windores Lope besting En very ibs compatible wath W rediceers Td pe d ecrini Ignore Install the srme and dont sek For my Wam Prompt mes each En chaos action Blas Mannie uregnand deresr actions t hir ie rs c d ck E If the Block has been selected it will not be possible to install the MFP driver To select Warn and then install t
329. ge Cover sheet message No cover sheet message AUTOMATIC COVER SHEET AUTOMATIC COVER SHEET IMPORTANT IMPORTANT MAY 11 2004 TUE 07 30 PM DATE MAY 11 2004 TUE 07 30 PM SERVICE CENTRE SERVICE CENTRE SBC CO FROM SBC CO 0666211221 FAX it 0666211221 02PAGES WERE SENT PAGES 02PAGES WERE SENT INCLUDING THIS PAGE INCLUDING THIS PAGE Select a cover sheet A cover is automatically The selected message is The selected message is message and added and the fax is printed printed at the top of the cover printed at the top of the transmit the fax sheet first sheet transmission the function automatically turns off Before adding a cover sheet make sure that your sender s name and number have been programmed See OWN PASSCODE SET on page 96 This function cannot be used when performing a manual transmission or when using memory polling page 39 F code memory polling page 50 F code confidential transmission page 55 or F code relay request transmission page 59 You can also enable a setting in the key operator programs to always add a cover sheet to transmissions see AUTO COVER SHEET on page 103 Select this function before each transmission The selection is only effective for one transmission After one ote Selecting a cover sheet message 1 In Fax mode press the SP
330. gh SPEAKER VOLUME on page 97 Telephone Dialling is not possible Is the telephone line properly connected Check the connections Line connection on page 4 If an extension phone is connected to the machine has the EXTENSION TEL program been enabled Enable this program EXTENSION TEL on page 97 91 8 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs are used by the key operator administrator of the machine to customize certain features of the machine to better meet the needs of users This section explains key operator programs for the fax features of the machine For key operator programs that are for the copy function print function and network scanner function see the respective manuals for those functions For key operator programs for general use of the machine see the Key operator s guide in the Operation manual for general information and copier To use the key operator programs the key operator code must be entered For the initial key operator code set at the factory see KEY OPERATOR CODE NUMBER FACTORY SETTING in the Operation manual for general information and copier The key operator programs that can be used depend on what peripheral devices have been installed KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS FOR THE FAX FUNCTION Programname gt Pag Program name Page LISTPRINTISET RECALL SETTING BUSY 102 LIST PRIN
331. ginal over on the document glass Press the START key Copying will start after both 2 sides of the original have been scanned 72 APPENDIX SPECIFICATIONS Name Digital Multifunctional System AR M162 AR M207 Type Desktop Photoconductive type OPC drum Document glass type Fixed Copy system Laser electrostatic method Originals Sheets bound documents max original size 11 x 17 A3 Copy sizes Max 11 x 17 A3 min 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A5 can only be fed from tray 1 and the bypass tray Image loss Max 5 32 4 mm at top edge and bottom edge combined maximum of approximately 11 64 6 mm Copying speed 11 x 17 9 copies min 10 copies min 11 copies min 12 copies min 14 copies min 16 copies min 11 x 17 A3 8 1 2 x 14 B4 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R B5R 8 1 2 x 11 5 1 2 x 10 copies min 11 copies min 12 copies min 14 copies min 15 copies min 16 copies min 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 B4 AAR 8 1 2 x 11 R B5R 8 1 2 A4 B5 A5 8 1 2 x 11 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 B5 A5 20 copies min Continuous copying 1 999 copies decrement type can be changed to 1 99 in the key operator programs First copy time 2 Approx 7 2 s Warm up time 2 Approx 45 sec Copy ratios Variable 25 to 400 in 1 increments total 376 steps
332. ginal size with the V or the original size with the V A key A key ORIGINAL SIZE ESS ORIGINAL SIZE Selecting an INCH original size v 04x14 is highlighted To return to selection of AB original sizes press the lt q key and return to step 2 B Press the OK key OK You will return to the base screen and the selected original size will appear in the original display To select an INCH size press the p gt key and go to step 4 When the gt key is pressed the original size To cancel a manual original scanning size selection screen for INCH f Note setting press the CA key sizes appears If it is not possible to select the actual original Size select a size that is larger than the actual original size If a smaller size is selected part of the original will not be transmitted 14 SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS The resolution and exposure can be adjusted to match the size and darkness of text on the original or for an original such as a photograph To change the settings follow the steps below after selecting fax mode and placing the original Page 13 You will return to the base Press the RESOLUTION key H Press the OK key e COPY PAPER EXPOSURE SELECT RATIO COLOUR MODE PROGRAM The resolution selection screen will appear 2 Select the resolution with the V or A key RESOLUTIO
333. gits with the numeric keys See steps 3 to 6 on page 65 f you do not need to edit the sub address and passcode press the OK key and go to the next step Edit the relay destinations See steps 13 to 15 on page 76 Deleting an F code relay group Select the name of the F code relay group box that you wish to delete with the V or A key 4 a S A RELAY GRP 3 LIST amp DETAIL If not all letters of the box name appear press the sj key to display all letters Press the key once again to return to the original screen Press the OK key Select DELETE with the V or A key 1 OK You will return to step 11 If you wish to delete another relay group repeat steps 11 through 14 To exit press the BACK key 79 PROGRAMMING ING F CODE PUBLIC BOXE EDITING DELETING F CO UBLIC BOXES Press the OK key Select CHANGE or DELETE with 9 the V or A key O Edit the sub address and passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys See steps to 6 on page 65 If you do not need to edit the sub address and passcode press the OK key and go to the next step Press the OK key and then press the BACK key to exit Deleting an F code public box If you selected in step 9 follow the steps in Editing an F code public box which follows Select the name of the
334. gits can be entered If you make a mistake press the C key and then enter the correct number Redialling and automatic dialling can also be used pages 16 20 Entering a pause If a pause is necessary when oe ta dialling out from a PBX or when SPEAKER REDIAUPAUSE SPEED COM dialling an international number fa s press the REDIAL key This key functions as a pause key when entering a number If you press the PAUSE key once a hyphen appears and a 2 second pause is inserted After entering a number you can also press the PAUSE key to enter a hyphen and then enter another number using the numeric keys or a Rapid key This connects the numbers together and is called Chain dialling The duration of each pause can be changed in the key operator programs See PAUSE TIME on page 96 Group keys cannot be used for chain dialling BASIC OPERATIONS Using the SPF Using the document glass g Press the START key g Press the START key AZMEMORY R AUTO STANDARD e Scanning begins If the line is free the machine will dial the receiving machine and begin transmission as soon as the first page is scanned Quick online transmission page 25 e If there is a previously stored job or a job is in progress or if the line is being used all pages of the original are scanned in
335. h labels or stamps Envelopes that are slightly inflated with air Envelopes with glue protruding from the seal area Envelopes with part of the seal area peeled off BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE SETTING OF A TRAY If the size of the loaded paper is different from the size shown in the display follow the steps below to change the paper size setting of the tray The paper size setting cannot be changed during copying printing fax printing when the fax option is installed or interrupt copying or when a misfeed has occurred However if the machine is out of paper or out of toner the paper size setting can be changed during copying printing and fax printing See PAPER page 18 for information on the specifications for the types and sizes of paper that can be loaded in the paper trays The paper size cannot be set for the bypass tray Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key SPECIAL FUNCTION MODES ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET v DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear The screen shown above is the copy mode screen 2 Press the V or A key to select PAPER SIZE SET SPECIAL FUNCTION SPECIAL MODES ORIG SIZE ENTER 11 17 8 14 8 13 1 The paper size setting 94x11 screen will appear 11 Shows tray 1 2 Shows tray 2 For the paper trays and tray numbers see PAPER on page 18 Press the V or A key to
336. h the EXPOSURE key If TEXT or Copies are too dark or too Mosi is selected set an appropriate exposure level with the lt q or key light Ifthe copy is too light or too dark even though AUTO was selected with the EXPOSURE key adjust the automatic exposure level The automatic exposure level is adjusted in EXPOSURE ADJUST see the Key operator s guide in the key operator programs The correct original type has not been selected in the copy Text is not clear in a copy exposure setting screen Change the exposure setting to TEXT with the EXPOSURE key The original is not placed face up in the SPF or face down on the document glass Place the original face up in the SPF or face down on the document glass Blank copies 25 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE Problem Cause and solution The paper size used for the copy is different from the selected paper size part of the image is cut off or too much of the page is blank The original was placed in the wrong position Place the original correctly An appropriate ratio was not used for the size of the original and the size of the paper Press the AUTO key to select the appropriate copy ratio based on the original and copy sizes The size of paper loaded in the tray was changed without changing the tray s paper size setting The size of the paper loaded in the tray is different from the tray s p
337. h the cursor Use to move the cursor vertically and horizontally Also used to move through screen pages If you press the gt key when character is not entered a space will be entered first character to move the cursor and then enter the next character When you wish enter characters assigned to the same key in succession press the key after entering the ote Example Entering XY Press the XYZ key once press the p gt key once to move the cursor and then press the XYZ key twice 83 PROGRAMMING INITIAL PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING CHARACTERS Entering alphabetical characters example TPS l the Rapid key overlay ENTER NAME To switch between upper case letters and lower case letters press the SHIFT key The letters are stored and the cursor moves to the space after the letters To change a character press the C key Note The character directly to the left of the cursor is cleared If the cursor is over a character that character is cleared Entering numbers example 123 Enter 1 2 and 3 with the numeric keys To change a character press the C key The character directly to the left of the cursor is cleared f the cursor is over a character that character is cleared 84 Entering symbols Press the SYMBOL key SYMBOL w XYZ SP 9 REDIAUPAUSE
338. hat the desired paper tray is selected If the auto paper select function has been enabled the appropriate copy paper size will have been automatically selected based on the original size and the selected copy ratio If the auto paper select function has been canceled or if you are copying onto a different size paper use the PAPER key to select the paper tray with the desired paper size g Set the number of copies and press the START key 53 SELECTING THE VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL COPY RATIOS SEPARATELY XY zoom copying Separate ratio settings can be selected for the length and width of a copy Example Reduction only in the horizontal direction Original Copy 4 gt e This feature cannot be used with the 2 in 1 4 in 1 feature or card shot feature when the dual function board is installed To use the XY zoom feature and the dual page copy feature simultaneously set the dual page copy feature first and then the XY zoom feature Enlargement cannot be set f automatic ratio selection has been selected the XY zoom feature cannot be selected If the XY zoom feature is selected automatic ratio selection cannot be selected e Ratios that can be selected are 25 to 400 50 to 200 when the SPF is used 1 Place the original in the document R XY ZOOM with the V or A feeder tray or on the document glass key SPECIAL MODES EJDUAL PAGE COPY 3 2in1 4inl XY 700
339. he MFP driver see INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE page 7 40 Plug and play screen does not appear when using a USB cable If the Plug and Play screen does not appear after you connect the machine to your computer with a USB cable and turn on the machine follow the steps below to verify that the USB port is available 1 Click the start button click Control Panel and then click Performance and Maintenance In Windows 98 Me 2000 click the Start button select Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Click System click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button Universal Serial Bus controllers will appear in the list of devices In Windows 98 Me double click the System icon and click the Device Manager tab n Windows 2000 double click the System icon click the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button f the System icon does not appear in Windows Me click view all Control Panel options Click the icon beside Universal Serial Bus controllers RETER d Shancand OpeniiCD USB Host Controle Gee 1 5204 Hub Two items should appear your controller chipset type and Root Hub If these items appear you can use the USB port If the Universal Serial Bus controllers shows a yellow exclamation point or if the above two items do not appear you must check your computer manual for USB troubleshooting or contact your computer manufacturer
340. he fax will be printed on B4 8 1 2 x 14 paper and part of the image may be cut off If the paper loaded in the tray is larger than the paper size setting paper larger than the recognized fax size will be used A message prompting you to check the tray s paper size setting will appear Received faxes cannot be printed on paper inserted in the bypass tray In order to receive faxes paper must be loaded in the paper tray Load appropriate paper as explained in ote 29 BASIC OPERATIONS FAX PRINT HOLD FUNCTION Faxes are normally printed as soon as they are received This function is used to hold received faxes in memory rather than printing them as they are received Faxes held in memory are printed manually all at once Settings required for fax print hold If a fax is received when auto power shut off mode has activated TURNING THE POWER ON AND OFF in the Operation manual for general information and copier the machine returns to normal operation in order to print the fax For this reason if faxes are received at regular intervals auto power shut off will repeatedly activate and deactivate and less power will be conserved If you wish to maximize the benefit of auto power shut off at night and other times when printing of received faxes is not immediately necessary enable fax print hold When fax print hold is enabled receiving faxes when auto power shut off has activated will not cause auto power shut off to deactivate
341. he key operator programs see the Key operator s guide in the Operation manual for general information and copier is enabled the message Please see your key operator for assistance will appear for one minute in the event that you enter an incorrect or invalid account number three times in a row During that time operation of the machine will not be possible 11 ORIGINALS ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED Original sizes Minimum original size Maximum original size 297 mm width x 800 mm length A5 210 mm width 148 mm length 11 width x 31 1 2 length Long documents can be transmitted 297 mm width x 432 mm length 11 width x 17 length Using the SPF 8 1 2 width x 5 1 2 length 148 mm width x 210 mm length 5 1 2 width x 8 1 2 length Using the document glass e Originals that are not a standard size A5 A4 A4R B4 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A4 A4R if the machine uses inch based paper sizes can also be faxed e There are restrictions on originals that be scanned using the SPF For more information see NORMAL COPYING in the Operation manual for general information and copier Long originals Depending on the resolution setting and the width of the original there may not be sufficient space in memory to hold a long orig
342. he new machine to a destination stored on the existing machine See Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations page 10 to select the Scan to Desktop destination information that you wish to use on the new machine and enter the displayed information in this screen in the new machine When you have completed all entries click Submit If there are several destinations that you wish to use on the new machine repeat this procedure as needed EA Destination LLLI DI tol oa ee 1 Beatties eanna Contre are panpani beid eres ia renean rains Be mau area Dasara d 5 If the information entered here differs from the information entered on the host computer transmission reception will not be possible For the settings see the following table Scan to Desktop destination information Item Description Name Required Enter the name of the destination up to 36 characters Initial Optional Enter initial text for the destination maximum of 10 characters When the destination list is displayed in the destination control screen the initial text is used to group the destinations Custom Index Names can be assigned to the custom indexes as desired page 5 allowing convenient grouping of destinations Drop down list Select a custom index for the destination to be stored User checkbox When this is selected the destination is sto
343. he recipient s network Internet connection environment If large image data files are repeatedly sent the resulting burden on the network may slow down the speed of other unrelated data transmissions and in some cases may even cause the mail server or network to go down The following table shows the approximate file sizes when the 8 1 2 x 11 A4 size originals one page each shown below are scanned File size of text original A when scanned File size of photo original B when scanned esolution B W Gray Color 75 dpi Approx 10 KB Approx 125 KB Approx 140 KB 300 dpi Approx 34 KB Approx 1430 KB approx 1 43 MB Approx 1440 KB approx 1 44 MB sizes are for image files created in TIFF G4 format If multiple images are scanned the file size will be approximately Size of each image as indicated above x Number of images scanned The scan resolution will vary depending on the scanning area and how much memory in the machine is free During network scanning the resolution may change automatically because enhancement is not performed To scan an original in color at 600 dpi without enhancement the 256 MB optional memory on the dual function board and the 128 MB additional memory on the network expansion kit are required as a minimum Although the actual limitation depends on your network environment a general guideline for the maximum file size for Scan to E mail is 2000 KB 2 MB In
344. he setting and returns the display to the SPECIAL base screen of the mode that FUNCTION key was in effect before the key operator programs were entered 2 When you have completed all settings press the OK key The settings will be saved Turn off the machine power wait for few seconds and then turn on the power again The new settings will take effect after the power is turned on 33 6 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains what to do when the machine does not connect to the network or when problems occur during printing For problems related to the machine such as running out of paper or paper misfeeds see the Operation manual for general information and copier Network connection problems Problem Cause and solution Page The machine does not connect to the network 34 The LAN cable is disconnected Make sure that the LAN cable is firmly inserted in the connectors the machine and your computer To connect the cable see the Software setup guide Software setup guide Is the machine configured for use on the same network as the computer The machine cannot be used if it is not connected to the same network as the computer or if it is not configured for use on the network For more information consult your network administrator Points to check on the Macintosh AppleTalk is disabled Mac OS X click Network
345. his program select Sharp Button Manager G from the pull down menu and then click the Apply button Do the same for each ScanMenu through SC6 When the settings have been completed click the OK button to close the screen Button Manager is now linked to the machine scan destinations SC1 to SC6 The scan settings for each of scan destinations SC1 through SC6 can be changed in the setting window of Button Manager For the default settings for destinations SC1 to SC6 and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings see Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine and Button Manager Settings in Operation Manual for printer and scanner in the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine 18 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE WINDOWS 98 ME 2000 Ht Click the Start button select Select Sharp Button Manager G in Settings and then click Control Send to this application Panel DANDI Am imma Umm Lom id iren 2 Double click the Scanners 2 If the Scanners and Cameras icon does E E not appear in Windows Me click view all m RR Control Panel options B 727 H Select SSHARP AR XXXX and click the Properties button 7 In Windows Me right click SHARP AR XXXX and click Properties in the menu that appears z If other applications are shown deselect the In
346. idge is installed the toner cartridge replacement H Remove the new toner cartridge from required indicator 2 may still appear indicating that copying cannot be resumed the bag Grasp the cartridge on both toner is not fed sufficiently In this case sides and shake it horizontally four or open and close the front cover The five times After shaking the cartridge machine will feed toner again for about two remove the tape minutes and then copying can be resumed Before closing the front cover make sure JERA that the toner cartridge is correctly ADY installed UE When closing the front cover gently hold both ends Do not hold the cartridge by the shutter It may fall Grasp the hand grip when holding the cartridge Be sure to shake the cartridge only before the tape is removed 35 CHECKING THE TOTAL OUTPUT COUNT To check the total number of pages output in copy print and fax modes and the total scan count in scanner mode hold down the COPY key when the machine is in the standby state The counts will appear while the key is held down The total output count and the total scan count can be used as a guideline for cleaning When the total output count and the total scan count exceed 999 999 the counts return to 0 An 11 x 17 or A3 page is counted as two pages Each two sided sheet that is output is counted as two pages An 11 x 17 or A3 sheet is counted as four pages Bla
347. ient Scan to E mail Before Scan to Desktop can be performed the software in the CD ROM that accompanied the network f Note expansion kit AR NB3 must be installed For the procedure for installing the software see the Sharpdesk installation guide 15 A LOOK AT THE MACHINE OPERATION PANEL 1 SPEAKER REDIAUPAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING SP SHIFT SYMBOL SPACE 3 1 Keys for the fax function when the fax option is installed These keys are used in fax mode For more information see the Operation manual for facsimile 2 Display page 18 This displays the base screen and the function settings screen 3 BACK key In a setting or programming screen this key is used to move back to the previous screen 4 OK key This key is used to enter a setting that has been selected with the arrow W lt gt or other keys b Numeric keys These are used to enter destination addresses address search characters and numeric values for various settings For more information on entering characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS page 31 6 C key This is used to clear a mistake while entering destination addresses address search characters and numeric values for various settings One digit is cleared each time the key is pressed The key is al
348. ient that you wish to notify of the file transmission to the FTP server To select a recipient here the recipient s e mail address must have been previously stored Page 6 51 If you entered a host name in Hostname or IP Address you will need to enter the DNS server settings Page 13 2 To perform Scan to FTP Hyperlink you must also enter the settings for the e mail server BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Storing destinations for Scan to Desktop The destination for Scan to Desktop is stored by the Sharp Network Scanner Tool Setup Wizard when Network Scanner is installed in your computer For this reason there is no need to store the Scan to Desktop destination in the Web page The Network Scanner Tool is on the Sharpdesk CD ROM that accompanies the Network Expansion Kit For information on Scan to Desktop system requirements installing the Network Scanner Tool and storing the destination see the Sharpdesk installation guide that accompanies the network expansion kit Normally your computer is stored as the destination by the method indicated above The following page for storing Scan to Desktop destination information appears when Destination is selected in the menu frame followed by Desktop This page is used mainly by the system administrator in the following circumstance When another machine that also has the network expansion kit is added to your network and you wish to send an image scanned on t
349. ies the machine into your p computer s CD ROM drive H Click the start button click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon i s If you wish to install the driver Double click the Setup icon 2 click the MFP Driver Printer Scanner button If the language selection screen appears To view information on the software click the Note after you double click the Setup icon Display Readme button select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected automatically B The SOFTWARE LICENSE window will appear Make sure that you understand the contents of the license agreement and then click the Yes button g Read the message in the Welcome window and then click the Next button g Click the Next button 10 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE The files required for installation of Connect the machine to your the MFP driver are copied if MFP computer with the interface cable Driver was selected in Step 8 Page 44 Follow the on screen instructions lf you are using a USB cable make sure the When you are asked how the printer is machine power is turned on and then connect connected select Connected to this computer the cable and click the Next button f you are using a parallel cable turn off both the machine power and the computer power and
350. igit number and pressing twice on the phone s keypad This 1 digit number is called the remote reception number and you can set it to any number from 0 to 9 Normally the remote reception number is set to 5 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select RECEPTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Enter a new remote number with the numeric keys 0 to 9 and then press the OK key 2 If a remote number has been previously stored the newly entered remote number overwrites the old number 98 ACCOUNT CONTROL This setting is used to enable or disable auditing mode Auditing mode is initially disabled When this program is enabled the operator must enter a valid 5 digit account number in order to use the fax function of the machine This function also tracks fax communication time and fax pages for each account To enable auditing mode program an account number as explained in ACCOUNT SET 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select ACCOUNT CONTROL with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting auditing mode is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkma
351. in 1 copying Center erase Edge Center erase Enlargement Automatic ratio selection Card shot Place the original on the document glass aligning the division between the pages with the size marker see below Close the SPF Copying will begin from the page to the right of the size To keep the copies the correct page order when performing dual page copying over multiple pages make sure that the original is always placed on the document glass with the smaller page number to the right BJ Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key UBL FUNCTION ORIG SIZE ENTER PAPER SIZE SET DISPLAY CONTRAST The special function screen will appear Press the OK key The special modes screen will appear 62 2 sided to 2 sided copy 2 sided to 1 sided copy Dual page copying cannot be selected when an original is placed in the SPF Copying 8 1 2 x 11 A4 paper can be used for dual page copying When rotation copy is enabled 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R paper can also be used When used in combination with XY zoom copying enlargement is not possible Dual page copying cannot be used in combination with the following functions Select DUAL PAGE COPY with the 4 V or A key SPECIAL MODES MARGIN SHIFT m ERASE PAGE COPY OK OFF ON B Press the OK key OK A checkmark appears in the DUAL PAGE COPY checkbox in the special modes sc
352. in the administrator Web pages A menu frame appears on the left side of the page When you click an item in the menu a screen appears in the right frame that allows you to configure settings for that item Settings that can only be configured by the administrator are explained here MES re z 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Information Configure machine identification information for the status amp alert E mail function ss Information setup page 29 2 Passwords To protect the Web site the system administrator can establish passwords Enter a password that you would like to establish and click the Submit button One password can be established for the administrator and one password can be established for users xz PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE PASSWORDS page 26 3 Key Operator Programs Setting changes can be prohibited and interface settings can be configured i KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS page 28 4 Status Message Configure parameters required for sending status messages such as destination addresses and time schedules vs Status message setup page 30 System information Limit baraig 123455 7090 hame AP k Locations eer Sine 5 Alerts Message Store destination addresses for alert messages x A
353. inal When a long original cannot be entirely scanned select a lower resolution setting and or shorten the original Scanning area of original When faxing an original note that the edges of the original cannot be scanned 5 mm Width of edges that cannot be scanned 5 mm from top and bottom edges 6 mm or less from left and right edges 1 5 mm ry gt H gt H Total of 6 mm ort less Automatic reduction of faxed document If the size width of the faxed document is greater than the receiving machine s paper size the size will be automatically reduced Faxed document width Receiving machine s paper width Size after reduction Ratio AS 11 x 17 4 8 1 2 x 14 B4 8 1 2 x 14 1 0 78 1 0 64 11 x 17 4 8 1 2 x 11 AAR 8 1 2 x 11 R 1 0 5 1 0 5 B4 8 1 2 x 14 A4 8 1 2 x 11 AAR 8 1 2 x 11 R 1 0 64 1 0 78 You can turn off automatic reduction In this case the left and right edges will not be transmitted See AUTO REDUCE TX on page 100 12 PLACING THE ORIGINAL An original can be placed in the SPF or on the document glass Use the SPF when faxing a large number of sheet originals Use the document glass to fax originals that cannot be scanned using the SPF such as thick or thin sheet originals or books or other bound originals USING THE SPF Open the SPF make sure that an H Align the edges of the do
354. indows Me Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Home Edition Windows XP Professional For more information see 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide Void area Top and bottom edges 7 64 2 5 mm right and left edges 1 8 3 0 mm at the periphery of the machine s maximum scanning area Interface cables USB cable Shielded twisted pair cable max length 10 feet 3 m Please purchase a commercially available USB cable For connection to the USB 2 0 port the cable must support USB 2 0 The resolution may be enhanced by the scanner driver depending on the scanned area and resolution As a part of our policy of continuous improvement SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product improvement without prior notice 33 OPERATION MANUAL for printer and scanner SHARP SHARP CORPORATION ARM207 EN PRINTER SHARP MODEL AR FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPERATION MANUAL Page e BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCTION 7 e BASIC OPERATIONS 17 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION 32 TRANSMISSION USING 48 CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE ete 60 e PROGRAMMING 62 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 92 e APPENDIX 108 Be sure to become thoroughly familiar with this manual to gain the maximum benefit from the product Before installing this product
355. ine Software setup guide The port setting is not correct Printing is not possible if the printer driver port setting is not correct Set the port correctly Software setup guide CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS is enabled Enter a correct account number in the printer driver before printing consult your key operator The printed page limit has been reached Consult your key operator Depending on the machine status the DATA indicator may blink Key operator s guide Printing does not take place The DATA indicator is blinking There is no paper in the specified tray Load paper in the tray Operation manual for general information and copier FORCED OUTPUT OF PRINT is disabled Add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and then select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume Printing is slow Simultaneous use of two or more application software programs Start printing after quitting all unused application software programs The printed image is light and uneven The paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side of the paper Some types of paper have a front and a back side If the paper is loaded so that printing takes place on the back side toner will not adhere well to the paper and a good image will not be obtained Operation manual for general information and copier
356. information necessary for using the machine as a printer and scanner including printing by means of the standard printer driver printing by means of the SPLC printer driver that can be used when the dual function board is installed scanning using Button Manager troubleshooting and key operator programs for the printer and network functions Using the network printer function Operation manual for network printer This is an online manual that can be found in the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit This manual contains information necessary for using the machine as a printer including printing condition settings printing using the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers and the PS printer driver troubleshooting and key operator programs for the printer and network functions Using the network scanner function Operation manual for network scanner This is an online manual that can be found in the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit Read this manual for information on using Scan to FTP Scan to E mail and other network scanner functions The following help files are installed when the software on the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the network expansion kit is installed Printer Status Monitor Help file Printer Administration Utility Help file Online manual contained in the Network Utilities CD ROM Print Server Card Online Manual SOFTWARE LICENSE The SOFTWA
357. ing place the original so that the part that you wish to scan is within the 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B5 area indicated by the guides at the far left corner of the document glass The received image data cannot be opened The viewer program used by the recipient does not support the format of the received image data Try selecting a different file type TIFF JPEG or PDF and or a different compression format None G3 or G4 for the image data Otherwise have the recipient use Sharpdesk or a viewer program that supports the above combinations of file types and compression formats When the same file name is used for two successive Scan to FTP transmissions the second file is not sent The first file may still remain in the cache of the file server client Disable use of the cache in the client software The recipient does not receive a transmitted data There is a mistake in the stored destination information or the wrong destination was selected Make sure that the correct destination information is stored If there is a mistake correct it Page 10 f delivery by e mail Scan to E mail is unsuccessful an error message such as Undelivered Message may be sent to the designated administrator s e mail address This information may help you determine the cause of the problem The recipient does not receive data sent by e mail Scan to E mail Check the Web page to see if a limit has been set for the siz
358. ing is used on a server client type dmm Windows network see Operation Manual 1 for printer and scanner on the Computer running al Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine Windows For the procedure for installing the printer driver see INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER STANDARD INSTALLATION and CUSTOM INSTALLATION pages 24 to 27 in For the procedure for installing the printer driver see this manual USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER VIA A SERVER pages 28 to 29 in this manual BEBE eee TCP IP protocol Microsoft Printing Protocol 20 SETUP IN A WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Before installing the software see HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS on page 43 to make sure your computer meets the hardware and software requirements SETTING THE IP ADDRESS OF THE MACHINE Before installing the printer driver be sure to set the IP address of the machine Consult your network administrator for the correct IP address subnet mask and default gateway to be entered If a DHCP server will automatically assign an IP address to the machine the following procedure is not necessary To check the IP address assigned to the machine by DHCP see CHECKING THE IP ADDRESS page 43 If the machine is used in a DHCP environment the machine s IP address may change automatically If this happens printing will no longer
359. ings and monitor the printer from a computer This utility is for use by system administrators NICManager Use this program to configure and check the IP address when the machine is connected to a network Acrobat Reader 5 0 This program is used to view the online manuals on your computer screen To install Acrobat Reader see page 42 of this manual Online Manuals Manuals in PDF format that are viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader To view the online manuals on the CD ROM specify the following paths Note that R represents the letter of your CD ROM drive For network printer R Manual EnglishA 2 OnlineManual AR_NB3_Prn pdf For network scanner R Manual EnglishA 2 OnlineManual AR_NB3_Scn pdf 1 In order to use the Printer Status Monitor and Printer Administration Utility the machine must be connected to a network English A in North America English in Europe Network Utilities CD ROM This CD ROM contains an online manual and utilities for using the machine as a network printer Please read before using Readme This contains information on the contents of the Network Utilities CD ROM how to use the utilities how to view the online manual and limitations Print Server Card Quick Setup This is a wizard type utility for Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4 0 Windows 2000 Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 that allows you to conveniently configure the print server Print Server Card Standard Se
360. ings cannot be used in combination with others If you select a prohibited combination of DELETING PROGRAMS settings a message will appear in the display Before deleting a program print the PROGRAM LIST to check the contents Page 81 To delete a continue selecting another setting previously stored program follow these steps press the OK key When you finished selecting settings press the g Select the program that you wish to START key You will return to step 8 If you wish delete with the V or A key to store another program repeat steps 8 to 11 To exit press the BACK key in step 8 PROGRAM X XXXXX You can check the contents of a program H transmission type destination by printing Cy 777777 the PROGRAM LIST page 81 LIST S DETAIL EDITING PROGRAMS If you need to edit a previously stored program follow these steps If not all letters of the program name appear press the key to display all letters Press the key once again to return to the original screen 6 Select the program that you wish to edit with the V or A key 7 Press the OK key 4 PROGRAM A MOSS 1 LIST eS DETAIL If not all letters of the program name appear press the key to display all letters Press the key once Select DELETE with the V or A again to return to the original screen key Ed Pre
361. ion Shows what options are installed To open the Web pages for the administrator click here and then enter the administrator s user name and password Network Status s ABOUT THE WEB PAGES FOR THE Shows the network status Information on ADMINISTRATOR page 25 General TCP IP NetWare AppleTalk s PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN and NetBEUI is shown on the respective THE WEB PAGE PASSWORDS page 26 pages 3 Submit Print Job A file on a computer can be printed out x DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A COMPUTER page 22 21 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE DIRECTLY PRINTING A FILE ON A COMPUTER A file that can be accessed by your computer can be directly printed without using the printer driver by specifying the file s address Any file that can be accessed by your computer can be printed by this method including not only files on your computer but also files on other computers connected to the same network To directly print a file by this method click Submit Print Job in the menu frame of the Web page Click Submit Print Job the menu Click Browse and select the file that frame you wish to print The Submit Print Job You can also directly enter the file name with the screen will appear path LECHE UI Habeork Scannin 4 Click Print pier wt Printing begins 2 Select the print format in Job Detail The settings are describe
362. ion page 55 F code polling page 53 2 Cover sheet message page 44 3 Resolution and exposure page 15 4 Dual page scan page 43 5 Transmission settings page 23 When storing a broadcast transmission or serial polling operation in a program up to 200 destination fax numbers can be stored A program differs from a timer transmission page 34 in that it is not cleared from memory after transmission takes place A program thus allows you to repeatedly perform the same type of transmission Note however that programs do not allow you to establish a timer setting for transmission A setting that can be stored in a program cannot be changed at the time that a program is used for a transmission even if the setting is not stored in the program The only settings that can be selected when using a program are the original size duplex scanning and a timer setting USING A PROGRAM In fax mode place the original Page Press the OK key 1 13 g CEXJ U Skip this step if polling serial Se 09 a Polling or F code polling is being B If needed select the original size and performed If you are going to use other settings and then press the me Dual Page Scan page 43 place START key the document on the Document glass To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 2 Press the PROGRAM key Transmission takes place according to the program Select settings that ca
363. ion menu g Press the OK key SELECT SENDING Select ORIGINAL STORE with the V or A key SPECIAL FUNCTION COMM SETTING e f there are no previously stored documents in the Public Box the above screen appears If the above screen appears go to step 7 f there are previously stored documents in the ORIGINAL Public Box a screen will appear to let you select CHANGE what action to take DELETE v PRINT 1 If you wish to append the new document select ADD with the W or A key press the OK key and then go to step 7 2 If you wish to replace the previous document with the new document select CHANGE with the V or A key press the OK key and then go to step 7 39 ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS Select 1 TIME or REPEAT with the V or A key SELECT SENDING If you select 1 TIME the document data is automatically cleared from memory after your machine is polled once If you select REPEAT the document data in memory can be used repeatedly If you selected ADD or CHANGE in step 6 the transmission settings selected when the previous document was scanned into the Public Box will be replaced by the settings that you will select this time 8 Press the OK key OK g Press the START key e Scanning begins f you are scanning from the document glass and have another page to scan change pages and pres
364. is not possible To cancel two sided scanning select 1 SIDED in step 5 and then press the OK key 25 CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL When a standard size original is placed in the document feeder tray or on the document glass the original size is automatically detected automatic original detection function and displayed in the original display Make sure that the size has been detected correctly 1 When an original is placed an icon appears to indicate the original scanning mode One sided scanning from the SPF Scanning from the document glass 4 Two sided scanning from the 2 The original size is displayed If a non standard size original is placed or if you wish to change the scanning size follow the steps below to manually set the original scanning size 2 Standard sizes The following sizes are standard sizes 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 B4 A4 B5 B5R A5 If a non standard size original including a special size is placed a standard size close to the original size may appear or the original size may not be displayed Ready to scan ESXXXXX STORING SCANNING SETTINGS Sets of scanning settings scan size color mode resolution file type etc can be stored for use in various scanning applications MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE If you load an original that is not a standard size or the original s
365. is selected with the PAPER key Auto paper select resumes operation when the CA key is pressed or when Auto clear activates Auto paper select mode can be disabled in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide 79v Removing the document cover Originals that can be used in the SPF To copy large originals like newspapers remove the Originals from 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 to 11 x 17 A5 to A3 in document cover To remove the cover lift it straight size and 15 Ibs to 24 Ibs 56 g m to 90 g m2 in weight up as shown To replace the cover do the reverse can be used A maximum of 40 pages can be placed at The SPF cannot be removed once For originals that are 8 1 2 x 14 or larger B4 or larger a maximum of 30 pages can be placed at once Make sure that there are no paper clips or staples on the original Straighten curled originals before placing them in the document feeder tray Curled originals may cause misfeeds Copying books or originals with folds or If the margin shift function is being used the margin shift settings may creases need to be changed Page 68 Press down on the SPF or document cover while copying as shown If the SPF or document cover is Originals that cannot be used in the SPF not completely closed shadows may appear on the The following originals cannot be used These may copy or it may be fuzzy Straighten originals with cause misfeeds or smudging and unclear images
366. isplay all letters Press the key once again to return to the original screen Press the OK key O BBG GHI JKL MNO Enter the correct print passcode that was programmed when the confidential box was programmed 14 Press the OK key Select DELETE with the V or A key 16 Press the OK key You will return to the screen of step 11 If you wish to delete another box repeat steps 11 through 14 To exit press the BACK key EDITING AND DELETING F CODE RELAY GROUPS Select CHANGE or DELETE with 54 V or A key Press the OK key If you selected CHANGE in step 9 follow the steps in Editing an F code relay group which follows f you selected DELETE in step 9 follow the steps in Deleting an F code relay group which follows Editing an F code relay group Select the name of the F code relay group box that you wish to edit with the V or A key 3 LIST S DETAIL If not all letters of the box name appear press the key to display all letters Press the s key once again to return to the original screen Press the OK key Edit the name of the F code relay group box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 See step 9 on page 76 If you do not wish to edit the name go to the next step PROGRAMMING Press the OK key OK Edit the sub address and passcode maximum 20 di
367. it press the BACK key T1 PROGRAMMING STORING EDITING AND DELETING PROGRAMS You can store a transmission method cover sheet message transmission settings dual pages and or resolution exposure settings in a program This will allow you to use the settings for a transmission by means of a simple operation see USING A PROGRAM on page 45 Transmission methods normal transmission broadcast transmission polling serial polling F code transmission F code polling Note original size setting screen setting and timer transmission setting cannot be stored in a program To store a program follow steps 1 through 6 on pages 62 to 63 and then follow the steps below ENTRY with the V or A key SPECIAL FUNCTION ORIGINAL STORE H Select PROGRAM with the V or A key Select ENTER CHANGE or DELETE with the V or A key To store a program select ENTER and press the OK key Continue from step 6 of STORING A PROGRAM 72 To edit a program select CHANGE and press the OK key Next follow the steps in EDITING PROGRAMS on page 73 To delete a program select DELETE and press the OK key Next follow the steps in DELETING PROGRAMS on page 73 STORING A PROGRAM g Select the program that you wish to store with the V or A key PROGRAM If you select a program that has already been stored a message appears Select a
368. it the application Windows 2000 XP Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 1 Click the start button and then click 1 Click the Start button select Control Panel Settings and then click Printers In Windows 2000 click the Start button and select Settings B Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer driver icon and select Properties 2 Click Printers and Other Hardware from the File menu and click Printers and Faxes In Windows 2000 click Printers ERE ali Delete H Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer Rename driver icon and select Properties from the File menu Close Windows NT 4 0 select D t n Windows U Selec ocumen Create Shortcut f Note Defaults to open the printer driver setup Delete Screen Rename 3 In Windows 95 98 Me click the Setup Close tab Gereral Sharing 5s Click the Printing Preferences button in the General tab The printer driver setup screen will appear The printer driver setup screen will appear PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 6 x PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 6 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS To view Help for a setting click the button in the upper right hand corner of the window and then click the setting Some restrictions exist on the combinations of settings that can be selected in the printer driver setup screen When a restriction is in effect an information icon 4 will appear next to the setting Click the icon to vie
369. ited in this manual please refer to the separate Software setup guide For information on the operating system please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function The explanations of screens and procedures in this manual are primarily for Windows9 XP in Windows environments and Mac OS X v10 2 8 in Macintosh environments The screens may vary in other versions of the operating systems The explanations in this manual are based on American English and the North American version of the software Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version This manual refers to the digital multifunction device equipped with the network function as the machine This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the RSPF and the Single pass feeder as the SPF Unless specific mention is made both the RSPF and the SPF are referred to simply as SPF Wherever AR XXXX appears in this manual please substitute your model name for XXXX n some regions the Key operator s guide cited in this manual is a separate manual and in other regions the Key operator s guide is included in the Operation manual for general information and copier The Dual function board cited in this manual can be installed as an option in some models and is pre installed standard in other models For detailed information please refer to 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES in the Op
370. ithout entering an account number or an invalid account number is entered printing will not take place To allow printing without the entry of a valid account number disable CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS In this case the number of pages printed is added to the OTHERS count When the PPD file is used in Windows auditing mode cannot be used in the printer function For this reason do not enable CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS in the key operator programs as this will prevent printing Printed pages will be added to the OTHERS count See the Key operator s guide The PPD file enables the machine to print using the standard PS driver of the operating system THE PRINTER DRIVER FROM THE START BUTTON To change the printer driver settings follow the steps below Settings adjusted in this way will be the initial settings when you print from an application If you change the settings in the printer driver setup screen at the time of printing the settings will revert to the initial settings when you quit the application Windows 2000 XP Server 2003 Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 1 Click the start button and then click 1 Click the Start button select Control Panel Settings and then click Printers Windows 2000 click the Start button and select Settings B Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer In Windows Server 2003 click the Start button driver icon and select Properties and then click
371. ize is not correctly detected be sure to press the ORIGINAL SIZE key and set the original size manually Perform the following steps after loading the document in the document feeder tray or on the document glass To select an AB size press the gt key and go to step 1 Press the ORIGINAL SIZE key 4 ORIGINAL SIZE ORIGINAL SIZE OQO AUTO OUTPUT DUPLEX 84x14 SS FORMAT ORIGINAL Si Ap SS BROADCAST ORIGINAL SIZE Dy N The original size selection screen will selection screen for AB appear sizes appears When the key is pressed the original size 2 Select the original size with the V or 1 You will return to the base screen and the selected original size will appear in the original display is highlighted 26 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Selecting an AB original size Press the OK key Select the original size with the V or A OK You will return to the base screen and the selected original O ORIGINAL SIZE size will appear in the original display To cancel a manual original size setting press the CA key If itis not possible to select the actual original To return to the selection of inch original sizes press Size select a size that is larger than the actual the lt q key and return to step 2 original size If a smaller size is selected part of the original
372. job is automatically printed on the paper in the bypass tray When Bypass Manual is selected the print job is not printed until paper is inserted into the bypass tray If paper is already in the bypass tray remove the paper and then re insert it to begin printing JOB CONTROL FUNCTION MAC OS 8 6 TO 9 2 2 MAC OS X V10 2 TO 10 3 4 When AUDITING MODE is enabled in the key operator programs enter your 5 digit account number in Account Number in Job Control in the Print window Prener Caceres 8 Pim iia Tarjan fob Cose El Senn rt timber y Bip PON Cancel E himd In Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 select On in Account Number in Job Control in the Print window and enter your 5 digit account number in the box at right Account numbers are programmed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide e When auditing mode is enabled a print job may not be printed if an account number is not entered or an incorrect account number is entered This depends on the key operator program settings e In Mac OS X v10 1 5 auditing mode cannot be used For this reason do not enable CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS in the key operator programs as this will prevent printing Printed pages will be added to the OTHERS count See the Key operator s guide 19 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE The network expansion kit includes a built in Web server The Web server is accessed using a
373. k mark index printed at the top of each received fax page The position of the mark is shifted with each fax reception allowing you to easily distinguish where one fax reception ends and another begins Enable this function before receiving faxes The function remains enabled until you disable it When this function is used less space is available on the paper to print the fax image and thus a received fax is sometimes divided onto two pages If the received fax is reduced before printing the black mark is also reduced When the duplex reception function page 105 is enabled to print faxes on both sides of the paper it is not recommended that this function be enabled If this is done the black mark will be printed on both sides of the paper in the same relative position as when one sided printing is used Prints black mark The setting is initially disabled no index mark 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select INDEX PRINT with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled a black mark will be printed and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled EARLIER OUTPUT When a received fax cannot be printed because the machine is out of a
374. k the OK button f you are using Mac OS X v10 1 5 click the lock icon enter the password and click the OK button SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT g Click the Continue button D dies Trey Mas the b 7 License Agreement window will appear Make sure that you understand the contents of the license agreement and then click the Continue button A message will appear asking you if you agree to the terms of the license Click the Agree button If a different language appears switch to English Select the hard disk in which you wish to install the PPD file and click the Continue button Be sure to select the hard disk in which your operating system is installed 9 Click the Install button Installation of the PPD file begins Li If you are using Mac OS X v10 3 to 10 3 4 Note Authenticate window will appear Enter the password and click the OK button When the message The software was successfully installed appears in the installation window click the Close button This completes the installation of the software 33 SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT INSTALLATION IN MAC OS 8 6 TO 9 2 2 Insert the network expansion kit g The License Agreement window will Software CD ROM 1 into your appear Make sure that you computer s CD ROM drive understand th
375. keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys see TRANSMISSION BY AUTO DIALLING RAPID DIALLING AND GROUP DIALLING on page 20 To use a program see USING A PROGRAM on page 45 A combined total of 50 Rapid keys and group keys can be stored 300 Speed Dial numbers and 9 programs can be stored If you attempt to store more than this a warning message will appear In this case delete any auto dial numbers or programs that are no longer needed see page 69 to delete Rapid keys and Speed Dial numbers page 71 to delete group keys and page 73 to delete programs and then store the new auto dial number or program tf Note cancel a storing editing or deleting operation press the CA key You will return to the base screen STORING EDITING AND DELETING AUTO DIAL NUMBERS RAPID KEYS SPEED DIAL NUMBERS AND GROUP KEYS Auto dial numbers are stored in the auto dial storing screen Follow the steps below to display the auto dial storing screen and then store an auto dial number In Fax mode press the SPECIAL Select ENTRY with the V or A E FUNCTION key key Begin the following procedure from the base screen of SPECIAL FUNCTION Fax mode When the SPECIAL ORIGINAL STORE COPY 07 FUNCTION key is pressed the function selection menu acc appears To select fax mode see step 1 RJ on page 18 62 H Press the OK key PROGRAM v SUB ADD SETTING 5 1
376. kit AR FR1 1 must be installed Operation manual for printer and scanner This explains how to use the machine as a printer and a scanner when it is connected to a computer Operation manual for network printer 2 This explains how to use the machine as a network printer To use the machine as a network printer the optional network expansion kit AR NB3 must be installed Operation manual for network scanner This explains how to use the machine as a network scanner when it is connected to a computer To use the machine as a network scanner the optional network expansion kit must be installed 1 The Operation manual for facsimile is contained in the optional facsimile expansion kit 2 The Operation manual for printer and scanner is contained in the accompanying CD ROM in PDF format The Operation manual for network printer and the Operation manual for network scanner are contained in PDF format in the CD ROM that accompanies the network expansion kit These manuals are not provided in printed form The meaning of R in original and paper size indications An R appearing at the end of an original or paper size 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R A4R B5R etc indicates that the original or paper is oriented horizontally as shown below Sizes that can be placed only in the horizontal landscape orientation 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 B4 do not contain the in their size indication
377. l function board AR EB9 When connecting the machine by USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode be sure to read System requirements CERTIFIED for USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode see the Key operator s guide to verify that your system and the 7 machine settings are configured appropriately MANUALS PROVIDED WITH THE PRODUCT Multiple manuals are provided for use of the machine Please read each manual as appropriate for the functions that you wish to use Operation manual for general information and copier this manual The first half of this manual contains general information on the machine including safety precautions and the procedures for loading paper removing misfeeds and performing regular maintenance The second half of the manual contains explanations of how to use the copy function of the machine Key operator s guide This explains key operator programs for machine management and copier related functions Explanations of key operator programs related to the fax printer and network scanner functions can be found in the respective manuals for those functions The key operator programs are used by the administrator of the machine to enable or disable functions to suit the needs of your workplace Software setup guide This explains how to install and configure the printer driver Operation manual for facsimile This explains how to use the fax function of the machine To use the fax function the optional facsimile expansion
378. l receiving data will appear briefly Select CONF RX DATA with the or A key Y 8 Enter the 4 digit passcode with the numeric keys E a elf you make a mistake press 2 3 gt the C key and re enter the MICONF RX DATA correct digit s When the 4 digit passcode is correctly entered printing begins Note lf received faxes remain in F code confidential memory box the box cannot be deleted 57 F CODE RELAY BROADCAST TRANSMISSION The F Code relay broadcast function allows the machine to act as a relay machine for a broadcast transmission The end receiving machines are stored in the machine s F Code relay memory box and when the machine receives a relay request from another F Code machine it will relay the fax to all of the stored end receiving machines The relay machine and the originating machine that requests the relay transmission must both support F codes however the end receiving machines programmed in the F code relay broadcast memory box do not need to support F codes Relay request machine sends document Relay machine your machine 1 Document is sent from 2 Check sub address machine requesting Sub address SSE and passcode relay transmission Does not match Passcode rom 3 Document data is read into relay broadcast memory box reception is permitted 4 Document is automatically t
379. lable Specific Hazards Dust explosion like most finely divided organic powders Directive 1999 45 EC Europe Not classified as dangerous 4 FIRST AID MEASURES Route s of Entry Inhalation Skin Ingestion Yes No Possible but very unusual Inhalation Remove to fresh air If symptoms occur consult medical personnel Skin Contact Wash with soap and water for 15 minutes or until particle is removed If irritation does occur consult medical personnel Eye Contact Flush eyes immediately with water for 15 minutes If irritation does occur consult medical personnel Ingestion Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water If irritation or discomfort does occur consult medical personnel 5 FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES Extinguishing Media Water foam and dry chemicals Special Fire Fighting Procedures None Fire and Explosion Hazards Toner material like most finely divided organic powders may form an explosive mixture 6 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES Personal Precautions None Environmental Precautions None Methods for Cleaning Up Wipe off with paper or cloth Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is released It like most finely divided organic powders is capable of creating a dust explosion 7 HANDLING AND STORAGE Handling Technical Measures None Precautions None Safe Handling Advice Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long term
380. le the Public Box f Note is being used A screen appears asking you to confirm the deletion Restricting polling access polling security If you wish to prevent unauthorised fax machines from polling your machine enable the polling security function When this function is enabled polling permission will only be granted if the fax number of the polling machine programmed in that machine as the sender s number matches one of the fax numbers you have programmed in your machine as passcode numbers Up to 10 fax numbers can be programmed as passcode numbers To enable the polling security function and program passcode numbers see POLLING PASSCODE MODE page 107 in the key operator programs f you do not use the polling security function the document will be sent to any fax machine that polls you ote To use polling memory with polling security enabled the sender s number of the polling machine must be programmed in that machine and in your machine 41 INCLUDING SENDER INFORMATION FAXES This function prints the date time your programmed name your programmed fax number and the transmitted page number at the top centre of each page that you fax All pages that you fax include this information Example of fax page printed out by the receiving machine OCT 22 2004 FRI 03 00 PM SHARP PLANNING DIV FAX No 0666211221 P 001 001 i t 1 1 2 4 1 Date and time Date and time programmed in the key operato
381. lect the bypass tray 20 Important points when inserting paper in the bypass tray Up to 100 sheets of standard copy paper can be set in the bypass tray Be sure to place 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A6 and B6 size paper and envelopes horizontally as shown in the following diagram When loading envelopes make sure that they are straight and flat and do not have loosely glued construction flaps not the closure flap Special papers except SHARP recommended transparency film labels and envelopes must be fed one sheet at a time through the bypass tray When adding paper first remove any paper remaining in the tray combine it with the paper to be added and then reload as a single stack The paper to be added must be the same size and type as the paper already in the tray Do not use paper that is smaller than the original This may cause smudges or unclean images Do not use paper that has already been printed on by a laser printer or plain paper fax machine This may cause smudges or unclean images Envelopes Do not use the following envelopes as misfeeds will occur Envelopes with metal tabs clasps strings holes or windows Envelopes with rough fibers carbon paper or glossy surfaces Envelopes with two or more flaps Envelopes with tape film or paper attached to the flap Envelopes with a fold in the flap Envelopes with glue on the flap to be moistened for sealing Envelopes wit
382. lerts message setup page 30 6 Security Unused ports can be disabled for greater security and port numbers can be changed If HTTP is disabled it will not be possible to open the Web pages To open the Web pages reset the network expansion kit t How to reset the network expansion kit page 37 7 Services Configure information concerning the e mail system t SMITP setup page 29 8 Print Port Configure settings for e mail print xi Setting up the E mail print function page 27 25 WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE PASSWORDS Passwords can be set click Passwords in the menu frame to restrict Web page access and protect settings The administrator must change the password from the factory default setting The administrator must also take care to remember the new password The next time the Web pages are accessed the new password must be entered A password can be set for the administrator and a password can be set for users Passwords the menu frame Enter passwords in User Password and Admin Password A maximum of 7 characters and or numbers can be entered for each password passwords are case sensitive Be sure to enter the same password in IDEE Confirm Password as you did in New a uito Lic Password When you have finished entering all 2 Enter the current password in Admin items click Submit
383. ling memory box are always used for polling security The receiving machine bears the expense phone charges of the transmission 50 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES USING F CODE POLLING MEMORY In order for another machine to retrieve a document from your machine you must first scan the document into the F code polling memory box You can check the document in the memory polling box by printing it out See Checking and clearing document data in a box on page 52 f Note When using F code polling memory do not set the reception mode to manual reception Scanning a document into an F code polling memory box The procedure for scanning a document into an F code polling memory box page 77 is in general the same as Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box on page 39 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box page 39 2 Select S A M POLL ORIG with the V or A key SELECT READING MEMORY POLLING SEL S A POLL BX v Document Tech GT HLISTOSDETAIL If not all letters of the programmed name appea press the key to display all letters Press the again to return to the previous display key About the steps that follow See steps 6 through 10 in Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box pages 39 to 40 Where public box page 39 appears in the procedure substitut
384. ll all the software components 2 If the machine is used as shared printer via a server is connected by parallel cable and you only wish to install certain components select Custom installation Pages 10 to 17 Make sure that the USB cable is not g Read the message in the Welcome connected to the machine window and then click the Next If the cable is connected a Plug and Play window button will appear If this happens click the Cancel button to close the window and disconnect the 7 Standard button cable Note cable will be connected step 9 After the Integrated Installer is preparing message appears the software components below will be automatically installed Follow the on screen instructions Insert the Software CD ROM 1 that Driver accompanies the machine into your Button Manager computer s CD ROM drive Sharpdesk H Click the start button click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon In Windows 98 Me 2000 double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM She Ta hese a i troupe ampi rem the Setup icon amp ad 2 2 2 If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected a
385. lled If scanning is performed when Quick Scan has been selected in the Preference tab of the Custom Settings or Professional of the TWAIN driver image quality may be degraded This is because the scanned data is transferred using JPEG compression If image quality is poor then perform scanning again without selecting the Quick Scan option By default Quick Scan is not selected The original is not placed face up in the SPF or face down on the document glass Place the original face up in the SPF or face down on the document glass Operation manual for general information and copier The original was not placed in the correct position Place the original correctly Operation manual for general information and copier Unable to scan the image If scanning is not possible shut down your computer turn off the machine s power switch and unplug the machine s power cord Next start your computer restore power to the machine and try scanning again If scanning is still not possible check the following items Your application is not TWAIN WIA compliant If your application is TWAIN WIA compliant scanning will not be possible Make sure your application is TWAIN WIA compliant You have not selected the scanner driver of the machine in your application Make sure that the machine s scanner driver is selected in your TWAIN WIA compliant application You have n
386. llel port and printing is not possible using the machine follow the steps below to change the port setting of the other printer driver and make sure that the port of the printer driver for the machine is set to LPT1 Click the start button click Control Panel click Printers and Other Hardware and then click Printers and Faxes In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 click the Start button select Settings and then click Printers 2 Click the icon of the printer driver for which you wish to change the port setting and select Properties from the File menu H Click the Ports tab In Windows 95 98 Me click the Details tab 4 Select FILE in the Print to the following port list box and click the OK button batons per LLL dir 6 5 Click the SHARP AR XXXX icon and select Properties from the File menu g Click the Ports tab In Windows 95 98 Me click the Details tab Select LPT1 in the Print to the following port list and click the OK button In the event that you need to use the other printer repeat the above steps to set the port of the machine to FILE and change the port setting of the other printer back to LPT1 41 CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER After installing the MFP driver printer driver or the printer driver for an option make sure that the printer driver is se
387. lling or storing a fax number a pause of 2 seconds is inserted The pause time can be set to any number of seconds from 1 to 15 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select PAUSE TIME with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Enter the pause time in seconds 01 to 15 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key If you make a mistake move the cursor to the incorrect digit with the lt q or p gt key the cursor should be over the digit and then enter the correct digit OWN PASSCODE SET Use this setting to program the fax number of the machine and the name of the user The programmed name and number are printed at the top of each fax page you send The number is also used as a passcode when performing polling reception USING THE POLLING FUNCTION page 37 You can check your programmed name and number by printing out the KEY OPE LIST Page 95 A maximum of 20 digits can be stored for the fax number A maximum of 18 letters can be stored for the name 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select OWN PASSCODE SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select STORE with the V or A key and then press the OK key Enter your fax num
388. ls for 2 in 1 copy or four originals for 4 in 1 copy have been scanned To start copying before all originals have been scanned after only one original has been scanned for 2 in 1 or after three originals or less have been scanned for 4 in 1 press the READ END key To cancel the 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 settings select OFF in step 7 67 CREATING MARGINS WHEN COPYING Margin shift The margin shift function shifts the image to create a margin at the edge of the paper By default the function creates a 1 2 10 mm margin at the left edge of the paper Margin top Margin left edge 4 M Original Copy Original Copy You can select whether to create a margin at the top edge or at the left edge of the paper e Five selections are available for the margin width 0 1 4 1 2 3 4 1 0 mm 5 mm 10 mm 15 mm 20 mm The default setting is 1 2 10 mm e When making two sided copies a margin is created at the selected edge on the front side of the paper and a margin is created on the back side of the paper Margin shift cannot be used in combination with 2 in 1 4 in 1 copy page 66 Margin shift cannot be used in combination with card shot page 71 When margin shift is selected rotating copying will not operate even if the condition for rotate copying is met default margin shift setting can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s Place the origi
389. lt your Sharp dealer F CODE TRANSMISSION F CODE CONFIDENTIAL TRANSMISSION To perform F code confidential transmission you must enter the sub address SUB and passcode SID after the fax number of the receiving machine Omit the passcode if the other machine does not use a passcode To receive a fax sent by F code confidential transmission this is called F code confidential reception you must inform the sending party of the sub address SUB and passcode SID of your confidential box Omit the passcode if a passcode is not programmed in the box 2 F code confidential transmission can be used in combination with the broadcast transmission function page 32 or the timer transmission function page 34 and can be stored as a program page 72 55 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES F code confidential transmission Follow steps 1 to 4 of BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES page 18 and then follow the steps below 2 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key NDA When the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is pressed the special function selection H Select SENDING OPTIONS with the V or A key _ SPECIAL FUNCTION FAX PRINT HOLD TIMER MODE Press the OK key B Select SUB ADDRESS TX with the V or A key o SENDING OPTIONS Z ORRIAL POLLING SUB ADDRESS TX SUB ADD POLLING g Press the OK key g Enter the fax number of the other machine with the numeric keys or press a Rapid
390. ly E mail Address in Check the original size If the original SMTP Setup in the Web page is a non standard size or the size was not detected correctly press the Press the ADDRESS key ORIGINAL SIZE key ORIGINAL SIZE 0 OUTPUT DUPLEX DESTINATION SELECT PAPER ZOOM AUTO n 55 FORMAT ORGNLSN ADDRESS BOOK 55 BROADCAST ORIGINAL SZE Ds ea ADDRESS ENTRY v ADDRESS SEARCH When the ORIGINAL SIZE key is pressed the size selection screen appears See MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE page 26 to set the original size 4 If needed select the color mode page 27 To adjust the color mode press the COLOR MODE key See SELECTING THE COLOR page 27 20 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Using the document glass Select the destination selection method page 22 Select from the following three destination selection methods ADDRESS BOOK page 22 Select one of the stored destinations directly from the operation panel ADDRESS ENTRY page 23 Directly enter the e mail address Only for Scan to E mail ADDRESS SEARCH page 24 Access a directory data base on the Internet or your intranet and search for a destination e mail address During a global address search multiple addresses can be entered to perform a broadcast transmission Press the START key 94x11 Scanning begins
391. me appear Screen appears press the s key to display the full name Press the s key once again to return to the original screen Enter the search letters with the letter 3 entry keys page palette you can g Press the OK key also skip entry of search letters and go directly to the next step to display Bs 2 destination is the first destination in the address list CRECEN NAA KEY WORDS C L HCH m Continue from step 6 of BASIC NEAN a PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES OKT SERRCH page 19 To cancel transmission Up to 10 of the following types of characters can be To cancel transmission while READING entered appears or before the key is pressed Upper case letters lower case letters numbers press the C or CA key To cancel a special characters See ENTERING CHARACTERS transmission job that is already stored on page 82 press the FAX STATUS key and cancel the job as explained on page 26 A job number 3 digits appears in the display with HEAD END when Press the OK key transmission is performed If you make a note of this number after performing a broadcast transmission you can use the ADDRESS number to check the results of the Melon Gy transmission in the transaction report or Parker activity report Enter numbers with the numeric keys 21 BASIC OPERATIONS FAXING A TWO SIDED ORIGINA
392. mited If you wish to set a limit remove the checkmark from the Unlimited checkbox and enter the desired limit B Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image Select the method for assigning a file name to a scanned image In File Naming click the items that you wish to use in the file name Destination and Date amp Time are initially selected If you are going to send images to the same recipient more than once we recommend that you also select Session Page Counter or Unique Identifier to prevent sending multiple files with the same name which would result in each successive file overwriting the previous file 6 Selecting an e mail subject only used for Scan to E mail The setting is used to enter the subject that appears in the recipient s e mail program when you perform Scan to E mail This setting is not necessary if you will not be using Scan to E mail Enter a subject maximum of 80 characters If nothing is entered Scanned image from Device Name will appear The name that appears in Device Name is the name stored in in the screen that appears when you Click System Information in the menu frame If a name has not been stored the product name will appear Click Submit Session Page Counter After entering the settings be sure to click Submit to store them Default Subject Scannnd imaga kon AH BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANN
393. ms IEEE1284 compliant listed above can fully Display 800 x 600 dots SVGA 256 colors or higher operate Hard disk free space 150 MB or more Aer hardware An environment that allows any of the above operating systems to fully operate requirements 1 Printing is not available in MS DOS mode 2 If you are installing the Printer Administration Utility in Windows 95 a system file must be updated before the utility can be installed For more information click the Display Readme button in the Software Selection window of the installer 3 USB is not supported 4 Administrator s rights are required to install the software 5 The MFP driver Button Manager and other software on the Software CD ROM 1 that is provided standard with the machine are not supported 6 The machine s USB 2 0 port will transfer data at the speed specified by the USB 2 0 Hi Speed standard only if the Microsoft USB 2 0 driver is preinstalled in the computer or if the USB 2 0 driver for Windows 2000 Professional XP that Microsoft provides through Windows Update is installed 7 Compatible with models preinstalled with Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 2000 Professional Windows XP Professional or Windows XP Home Edition Windows Server 2003 and which are equipped standard with a USB interface 43 Connecting a usb cable Please purchase a USB cable shielded that complies USB 2 with the followin
394. ms When asking the other party for a sub address and passcode you may find it useful to refer to the 3 character alphabetical terminology used by the ITU T Your machine ITU T F code polling memory box F code confidential box F code relay broadcast function Sub address SEP SUB SUB Passcode PWD SID SID CREATING A BOX FOR F CODE TRANSMISSION F code operations that use boxes include F code polling memory page 50 F code confidential transmission page 55 and F code relay broadcast transmission page 58 A box is created by programming a name for the box and up to 10 boxes for each operation type can be created The information programmed in each box varies slightly depending on the type of operation For information on programming editing and deleting boxes see PROGRAMMING EDITING AND DELETING 4 F CODE MEMORY BOXES on page 74 After you have programmed a box inform the other party of the box s sub address and passcode If you attempt to create a box when 10 boxes have already been created for that operation type a f Note message will appear and you will not be able to create the box Delete any unused boxes and then create the new box See PROGRAMMING EDITING AND DELETING F CODE MEMORY BOXES on page 74 49 F CODE POLLING MEMORY F code polling memory allows one fax machine to call another fax machine and initiate reception of a document that has been scanned into the other machi
395. n When installation of the SHARP software is complete appears click wi g fe the OK button If the machine is not found make sure that the machine is powered on and that the Click the Close button machine and your computer are connected to the network and then search again If the machine is still not found use the custom After the installation a message prompting installation procedure to directly specify the you to restart your computer may appear In IP address Page 26 this case click the Yes button to restart your computer A confirmation window will appear Check the contents and then click the This completes the installation of the software Next button After installation see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to check the printer driver settings When the printer driver selection 2 If you installed the PS printer driver the PS window appears select the printer display font can be installed from the PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM that driver to be installed and click the accompanies the PS3 expansion kit Page Next button 30 Select the checkboxes of the printer drivers to be installed To use the PS printer driver the PS3 Note expansion kit must be installed Select whether or not you wish the printer to be your default printer and click the Next button If you are installing multiple printer drivers select the printer that you wi
396. n and the destination list by pressing the key 22 HOW USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION ADDRESS ENTRY Perform steps 1 to 6 of BASIC B Enter the destination address TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 20 To enter characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS page 31 If you make a mistake press the C key and to clear the mistake ADDRESS ENTRY v ADDRESS SEARCH 6 Press the OK key The address selection screen appears Ready to scan ceippdl sharp corpray Select ADDRESS ENTRY with the 150dpi V key 1 The base screen 8x11 appears enter another address repeat steps 2 through 6 Multiple destinations can be selected for a Scan to E mail transmission Maximum of 20 4 8 Continue from step 9 of BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 21 The e mail address entry Screen appears 23 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION L ADDRESS SEARCH search Perform steps 1 6 of BASIC 6 Press the OK key TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 20 OK Press the ADDRESS key DESTINATION SELECT Tanaka b Tanaka C Tanaka d The search results appear Select the desired destination with the 7 V or A key SEARCH RESULT j Tanaka DESTINATION SELECT Tanaka b ADDRESS BOOK A ADDRESS ENTRY ADDRESS ENTRY v ADDRESS SEARCH 84X1
397. n be set to OFF or one of modes 1 to 3 The initial setting is OFF Page 66 F code settings To program F code settings complete steps 1 through 13 on pages 62 to 64 and then follow the steps below Select SUB ADDRESS with the V or A key Press the OK key GH OTHERS COPY X CANCEL START ENTER 64 Enter sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys SUB ADDRESS JKL MNO Characters that can be entered are numbers X and spaces If you make a mistake press C key and then re enter the correct number When this step is referred to in the following procedures X and spaces cannot be entered PROGRAMMING AN F CODE CONFIDENTIAL BOX step 11 on page 75 Editing an F code confidential box step 17 on page 78 PROGRAMMING AN F CODE RELAY GROUP step 11 on page 76 Editing an F code relay group step 15 on page 79 PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES step 11 on page 77 Editing an F code public box step 15 on page 80 Press the OK key B Enter a passcode maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys PASS CODE 0 9 e Characters that be entered are numbers X and spaces If you make a mistake press C key and then re enter the correct number If desired you can omit the passcode When this step is referred to in the following procedures spaces cannot be entered PROGRA
398. n line transmission transmission while original pages are being scanned into memory takes place when a memory transmission is performed If quick on line transmission is disabled transmission will not begin until all original pages have been scanned into memory Normally quick on line transmission is enabled When this function is disabled transmission will not begin until all pages of the document have been scanned Note that this setting does not apply to manual transmission See Storing transmission jobs memory transmission on page 24 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select QUICK ON LINE TX with the V or A key and then press the OK key Quick on line is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when quick on line is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and quick on line disabled PRINT STATION IN RCVD DATA This setting lets you select the position inside or outside the original image of the date and sender s information that are printed at the top of each fax page you send Normally outside the original image is selected To have your name and number printed inside the original image select IN DATA For more detailed information on the position of each setting see Position of sender information page 42 1 Follow st
399. nal the document Press the OK key feeder tray or on the document glass When left edge margin is OK MARGIN SHIFT selected and you are copying A from the document feeder OFF tray place the original face up DOWN gt so that the margin edge is to the left The settings for margin When left edge margin is selected and you are TRS shift will appear copying from the document glass set the original face down so that the margin edge is to the right e When a top edge margin is selected place the Select the margin location with the original with the margin edge toward the rear of the V or A key and select the width document feeder tray or the document glass with the 44 or gt key 2 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key Select DOWN ar for the margin location 4 If you select 0 0 mm the SPECIAL FUNCTION 5 MODES 7 printed result is the same as ORIG SIZE ENTER when OFF is selected PAPER SIZE SET Press the OK key v DISPLAY CONTRAST The function screen appears with SPECIAL MODES OK You will return to the base selected O screen H Press the OK key 4 7 Select other copy settings as needed a nd press the START key 7 To turn off the margin shift function select the margin shift feature again and select OFF B ERASE EEIDUAL PAGE COPY The special modes screen will appear with MARGIN
400. ne ready to receive Check with the operator of the receiving machine Are you using a transmittable original size Check the transmittable sizes ORIGINALS THAT CAN BE FAXED on page 12 Was the original size detected correctly Check size of the original CHECKING THE SIZE OF A PLACED ORIGINAL on page 14 The message Reading cancelled Please retry sending operation appears If you attempt transmission while the message Warming up appears the transmission may not take place correctly Repeat the transmission The transmitted image prints out blank at the receiving side 90 Was the original placed so that the correct side is scanned Make sure the original is placed so that the correct side is scanned PLACING THE ORIGINAL on page 13 If the receiving machine is using thermal paper was the thermal paper loaded with the wrong side out Check with the operator of the receiving machine Problem Check Solution TROUBLESHOOTING The transmitted image is distorted Were line conditions poor due to thunder or another reason Try the transmission again Were the resolution and exposure settings suitable Check the resolution and exposure settings SELECTING RESOLUTION AND EXPOSURE SETTINGS on page 15 White or black lines appear in the transmitted image Is the document glass or the scanning glass for the SPF the
401. ne s F code polling memory box Calling another machine and initiating reception is called F code polling and scanning a document into a memory box for another machine to retrieve by polling is called F code polling memory This function is approximately the same as regular polling page 36 however it uses an F code polling memory box and is always protected by means of the sub address and passcode HOW F CODE POLLING MEMORY WORKS Your machine The other machine 1 F code polling Subaddress gt transmission request 2 Check sub address y Sub address and passcode and passcode transmitted to your machine LLL Pascoe SS 025 1 15 1 5 a Yo 3 Polling memory box opens 9 4 Automatic transmission of document data to other machine F code polling page 53 is when your machine calls another machine and retrieves a document that was scanned into the polling memory box of that machine the reverse of the above diagram To perform polling or polling memory transmission without using an F code see page 36 To create an F code polling memory box see PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES page 77 and Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box page 39 Unlike regular polling the other machine s fax number is not used as a passcode for F code polling memory The sub address and passcode of the pol
402. nected select Connected via the a network and click the Next button In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click l My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon H Follow steps 4 through 7 in INSTALLATION METHOD 2 Click the Driver Printer Scanner button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button When you asked to select the printer port to be used click the Add Network Port button Lar tmine zm me m m Eram berie e alis Lui pi Do coin a ber LH mann Peers c erem Click the Next button 16 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE Select the network printer that is shared and click the OK button Howse Tar Printer Select a Printer Pascua En scd to than in of Ports z d Py Necemrk Planes a Entra Hebel y pou z ERSTE 2 Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network In the printer port selection window verify the network printer that is shared and click the Next button When the model selection window appears select model name of your machine and click the Next button Follow the on screen instructions z If you are using Windows 2000 XP If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears be sure to
403. ng Paper used for automatic two sided printing must meet the following conditions Paper type Plain paper special paper cannot be used Paper size Standard sizes 11 x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 Paper weight 15 Ibs to 24 Ibs 56 g m to 90 g m 18 Special paper Follow these guidelines when using special paper BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT Use SHARP recommended transparency film and label sheets Using other than SHARP recommended paper may result in misfeeds or smudges on the output There are many varieties of special paper available on the market and some cannot be used with this machine Before using special paper contact a SHARP service center Before using other than SHARP recommended paper make a test copy to see if the paper is suitable LOADING PAPER Make sure that the machine is not copying or printing and then follow these steps to load paper Loading paper in a tray Gently lift and pull out the paper tray If you are adding the same size of paper go to step 3 If you are loading a different size of paper go to the next step plate A is a slide type guide Grasp the locking knob on the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the paper to be loaded The plate B is an insert type guide Remove it and then insert it at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded When using 11 x 17 sized p
404. ng for another original size repeat step 4 PAGE COUNTER SET This setting lets you select whether page numbers are printed at the top of fax pages by the receiving machine The normal setting is to have page numbers printed 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select PAGE COUNTER SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled page numbers will be printed and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled When a fax is sent by memory transmission the page number and total number of pages appear at the top of each fax page When a fax is sent by Quick On line transmission or direct transmission only the page number appears SEND MODE This setting is used to select whether the default mode for sending faxes is memory transmission or direct transmission The initial setting is MEMORY TX 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select SEND MODE with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select MEMORY TX or DIRECT TX with the V or A key and then press the OK key QUICK ON LINE TX This program is used to select whether or not quick o
405. ng memory transmission Stand by 100 AUG 22 FRI 10 25 AM The machine is in the standby state ENTER DIAL This appears when the SPEAKER key has been pressed 89 PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS If you experience a problem with the fax function first check the following table This section describes problems related to the fax function For problems related to general operation of the machine see TROUBLESHOOTING in the Operation manual for general information and copier Problem Check Solution Page The machine does not operate Is the machine power Switch turned on Turn the power switch ON Power switch on page 4 Does the display show an error message Clear the error as instructed by the message WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED on page 88 Dialling is not possible Is the telephone line properly connected Check the connections Line connection on page 4 Is the machine power Switch turned on Turn the power switch ON Power switch on page 4 Is the machine in fax mode Press the FAX key to set the machine to fax mode BASIC PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES on page 18 Cannot send a fax Does the receiving fax machine have paper Does the receiving machine support G3 transmission Are the sub address and passcode correct When using F code transmission Is the receiving machi
406. ngle pass feeder as the SPF Unless specific mention is made both the RSPF and the SPF are referred to simply as SPF CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to place and receive calls like any normal phone Fax reception can also be activated from an extension phone connected to the machine remote operation 2 f you connect combination telephone answering machine to the machine you will not be able to use the answering machine function You can place calls from the phone even during a power failure CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE Insert the end of the extension phone In New Zealand not all standard telephones s 5 Note answering machines will respond to cord into the extension phone jack incoming ringing when connected to the the left side of the machine extension socket of the equipment Extension lt Make sure you hear a click jack sound indicating that the cord is z securely connected CONTENTS M 1 CONNECTING AN EXTENSION 1 TO USE THIS PRODUCT CORRECTLY AS FACSIMILE rennen nnn 4 1 BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCTION POINTS TO CHECK AND PROGRAM AFTER
407. nk copies and blank prints are included in the count If the last page of a two sided printing job is blank it is not included in the count 36 CLEANING THE MACHINE CLEANING THE DOCUMENT GLASS AND SPF DOCUMENT COVER If the document glass SPF underside of the document cover or the scanner for originals coming from SPF A the long narrow glass surface on the right side of the document glass become dirty the dirt may appear on copies Always keep these parts clean Wipe with a clean soft cloth If necessary moisten the cloth with water or a small amount of neutral detergent When finished wipe dry with a clean cloth Do not use thinner benzene or similar volatile cleaning agents Do not spray flammable cleaner gas Gas from the spray come in contact with the internal electrical components or hot parts of the fusing unit creating a risk of fire or electrical shock Cleaning the original scanning glass only when a SPF is installed If white or black lines appear in copies made with using the SPF use the provided Example of dirty print image glass cleaner to clean the original scanning glass If white or black lines appear in copies printed pages or printed fax pages when the SPF is not used see CLEANING THE TRANSFER CHARGER on page 38 Black lines White lines 1 Open the SPF and take out the glass 2 Clean the original scanning glass with cleaner the glass cleaner X AW BYA H Return th
408. nnect the MFP interface cable to peripheral device is using LPT1 In this the PC appears click the OK button case continue the installation and after the After the installation a message prompting installation is finished change the port f Note you to restart your computer may appear In setting so that the machine can use LPT1 This procedure is explained in Another printer is using the parallel port when using a parallel cable page 41 Turn off the power of the machine and When asked to select the printer your computer and connect the driver to install select the appropriate machine to your computer with the this case click the Yes button to restart your computer printer driver based on whether or not parallel cable Page 44 the dual function board is installed After connecting the machine to your computer and then click the Next button turn on the power of the machine and then start If the dual function board is not installed be sure yeur computer This completes the installation If the dual function board is not installed and If you installed the MFP driver see CONFIGURING you select the printer driver for the dual THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to configure the function board printing will not be possible printer driver settings When the model selection window appears select model name of your machine and click the Next button Click the Ye
409. nnot be stored in a program before you press the START key in step 5 These settings include the original size see MANUALLY SETTING THE SCANNING SIZE on page 14 duplex SCAN COLOUR MS FAX PROGRAM The program selection screen appears scanning see FAXING A TWO SIDED ORIGINAL on page 22 and a timer setting H Select the program that you wish to use with the V or A key TRANSMISSION on page 34 S A PROGRAM exe CORP 2 SIDED COPY If not all letters of the program name appear press the s key to display all letters Press the key once again to return to the original screen 45 FORWARDING RECEIVED FAXES ANOTHER MACHINE WHEN PRINTING IS NOT POSSIBLE FORWARDING FUNCTION When printing is not possible because of a paper toner or other problem you can forward received faxes to another fax machine if that machine has been appropriately programmed in your machine This function can be conveniently used in an office or other workplace where there is another fax machine connected to a different phone line When a fax has been received to memory the DATA indicator above the FAX key see If received data cannot be printed on page 29 to blinks 2 Printing not possible because of paper or toner problem 1 Fax transmission to your machine Other machine Your machine T fer instructi 9 Transfer instruction 4 Automatic dialling and
410. nother machine can call your machine and initiate reception of the document Calling the sending machine and asking the sending machine to fax a document is called polling Scanning a document into memory and automatically sending it when the receiving machine calls and polls your machine is called polling memory This function can only be used if the other machine is a Super G3 or G3 machine and supports the polling function 2 For information on polling and polling memory using F codes see HOW F CODE POLLING MEMORY WORKS page 50 Normal polling and memory polling are explained in this chapter Polling This function allows your machine to call another fax machine and initiate reception of a document in that machine A timer setting can also be specified to have the operation take place at night or at another specified time See TIMER TRANSMISSION on page 34 Your machine The other machine 2 Permits polling of 1 Polling ask other machine to send document 4 Document data is automatically 3 Document data previousl sent to your machine scanned into memory Group keys and the broadcast transmission function page 32 can be used to successively poll multiple fax machines in a single operation this is called serial polling Up to 200 machines can be polled In this case the sequence of operations in the above diagram is successively repeated for each sending machine selected f Note The receiving
411. nstalled ORIGINAL MISFEED IN THE SPF If an original misfeeds in the SPF follow the steps below to remove the misfed original Removing original misfeeds from each location Check location A Feeding roller cover Open the feeding roller cover and gently remove the misfed AN original from the document feeder tray Close the feeding o Ss NE A roller cover A Open the SPF and rotate the two release rollers in the direction of the arrow to feed the original out open the right side cover gently remove the original Close the right side cover Check locations A B and C in the diagram at left to remove the original Check location C Carefully remove the misfed original from the exit area When using the RSPF If the misfed original cannot be easily removed from the exit i c D area open the moveable part of the document feeder tray J remove the reversing tray and then remove the original gt After removing a misfed original from the exit area be sure to replace the reversing tray and moveable part of the document feeder tray 29 TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE 2 Open and close the SPF Opening and closing the cover clears the misfeed display Copying cannot be resumed until this step is performed A message may appear indicating the number of originals which must be returned to the
412. nt computer Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network For the procedures for configuring settings on the printer server see Operation Manual for printer and scanner on the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine Print server as explained here is a computer that is directly connected to the machine and a Client is any other computer that is connected to the same network 1 Insert the network expansion kit 6 Click the Printer Driver button Software CD ROM 1 into your computer s CD ROM drive To view information on the software click the Display Readme button 2 Click the start button click My Computer and then double click hi Di mtie the CD ROM icon 2 In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon m Ds j eme mmm mcm tmm nr tn am uL LLL d lba mofo sheni Be baa eee eee m J d H Double click the Setup icon 2 2 If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected automatically A marci 1 E aap SOFTWARE LICENSE window If you wish to install the printer status monitor ill Mak re that click the Printer St
413. nt in the Advanced tab this function cannot be used When using the PCL5e printer driver if Raster is selected in Graphics Mode in the Advanced tab this function cannot be used Printing lines in black Lines and solids that are any color other than white are printed in black To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and select the Vector To Black checkbox in the Advanced tab Printing result Vector To Black Vector To Black Print data When using the PCL6 PCL5e printer driver if Raster is selected in Graphics Mode in the Advanced tab this function cannot be used 13 2 PRINTER UTILITIES WINDOWS This chapter explains printer utilities that are used to manage and monitor the network printer PRINTER UTILITIES The Software CD ROM 1 included in the network expansion kit contains the following two printer utilities Printer Status Monitor for general users This allows the user to check on the computer screen whether or not the machine is able to print It provides information on error states such as paper misfeeds and shows the configuration of the machine number of trays etc by means of illustrations Available paper sizes and paper remaining are also indicated a network Printer Administration Utility for the administrator This allows the administrator to check information on supplies and error states of the ma
414. nu at the BL 4 6 top of the window pe E A list of printers connected to the network will rm E appear tL tee 1 P ad 4 If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed select the zone which includes the printer 35 SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT Click the Add button The machine is added to the list of printers Click the name of the machine in the Printer List window and select Show Info from the Printers menu The Printer info window will appear EL Wade Make Oefa Add Pomimr Oslete Frnier Sow fobs 5500 Inter Select Installable Options from the menu Set the printer configuration based the options that have been installed and then click the Apply Changes button Close the window This completes the configuration of the printer driver 36 SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT MAC OS X v10 1 5 Make sure that the machine is Click the machine s model name in the powered on list Select Applications from the Go 4 menu Eg We Hep Bl ses Corgan cR Agee Frari Mn H Fi K dd Connect tz Seen The name of the machine that appears is the ERE name that was entered in the AppleTalk settings H Double click the Utilities folder when the network settings DCUM 5 Unless the name was changed when configuring n the set
415. o V key Select a smaller preset ratio 4 key Decrease the ratio in increments of 196 gt key Increase the ratio in increments of 196 Preset reduction ratios are 9596 7796 64 5096 and 25 86 81 70 50 and 25 25 can only be selected when the original is placed on the document glass Preset enlargement ratios are 12196 129 14196 200 and 400 115 122 141 200 and 400 400 can only be selected when the original is placed on the document glass Zoom ratios Any ratio from 25 to 40096 50 to 200 when the original is placed in the document feeder tray can be set in increments of 196 You can use the VW or A key to set the approximate ratio and then press the 44 key to decrease the ratio or the p gt key to increase the ratio To decrease or increase the zoom ratio rapidly hold down the 44 or gt key However the value will stop at the preset reduction or enlargement ratios To move beyond these ratios release the key and then hold it down again Note that if the key auto repeat function has been disabled in the key operator programs the ratio will not change when the key is held down See DISABLE AUTO KEY REPEAT in the Key operator s guide To cancel a ratio setting return the ratio to 100 with the W or A key The ZOOM key can be pressed to return the ratio to 100 COPY FUNCTIONS 4 Press the OK key You will return to the base B Make sure t
416. o are available for 7 years following the termination of production 42 43 44 4 COPY FUNCTIONS This chapter explains the basic procedures for making copies including selection of the copy ratio and other copy settings NORMAL COPYING This section explains how to make a regular copy If Auditing mode has been enabled page 23 enter your 5 digit account number Copying from the document glass Open the SPF and place the original H Make sure that the desired paper tray face down on the document glass is selected f Align the upper left hand corner of the original with the tip of the mark The original size is automatically detected Ready to cop An onginel up to 11 eet be To load paper see LOADING PAPER page 18 placed on the document glass paper pag f the auto paper select function has been f Note disabled in the key operator programs Close the SPF see the Key operator s guide use the PAPER key to select the desired paper size f you wish to use a size of paper different from the size automatically selected by the machine use the PAPER key to select the desired paper size Paper in a different orientation from the original can be selected if the auto paper select or auto image function has been If the original is a non standard size or the selected In this case the image of the size was not detected correctly see original will be rotated SE
417. o select a dark setting for a light original such as writing in pencil or faint colour text press the key to move the setting toward When the exposure setting reaches the left side or the right side pressing the 44 or gt key changes the exposure display from the 5 step display to AUTO 1 OK You will return to the base screen and the selected exposure will appear in the exposure display The default resolution setting is STANDARD and the default exposure setting is AUTO The default settings for the resolution and exposure can be changed in the key operator programs See RES CON SET on page 100 When using the document glass to scan multiple original pages the exposure setting can be changed each time you change pages When using the SPF the resolution and exposure settings cannot be changed once scanning has begun Even if you send a fax using a high resolution setting such as FINE SUPER FINE or ULTRA FINE some receiving fax machines may print the fax at a lower resolution To cancel a resolution or exposure selection press the CA key 15 CONVENIENT DIALLING METHODS AUTO DIALLING The fax function includes a convenient auto dial feature Rapid dialling speed dialling and group dialling By programming frequently dialled numbers you can call and send faxes to these locations by means of a simple dialling operation page 20 There ar
418. ocument that you wish to print Esr 4 Make sure that SHARP is selected as the printer If you need to change any print settings click the Preferences button Properties button in Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 The printer driver setup screen will appear Windows 2000 does not have the Preferences button in this dialog box Select settings as needed on each of the tabs in the setup screen t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 7 TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS IHAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING page 8 PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE page 10 FITTING THE PRINT IMAGE TO THE PAPER page 11 ROTATING THE PRINT IMAGE 180 DEGREES page 12 PRINTING A WATERMARK page 12 PRINTING TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK page 13 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS Click the Print button OK button in Not When the job separator tray is Windows 95 98 4 0 Msele The output tray can be selected when Printing begins selecting print settings at the time of The print job is delivered to the output tray with printing To change the tray selection select the position of the paper offset slightly from the the desired tray in Output in the Paper previous job offset function tab of the printer driver setup screen IF THE TRAY RUNS OUT OF PAPER DURING PRINTING Add paper to the tray that ran out or to the bypass tray If you add paper to the bypass tray press the PR
419. of pages and a message if the message function is selected A cover sheet cannot be added when scanning a document into the public box or F code public box polling memory or when performing polling F code relay broadcast transmission or manual transmission Normally this setting is disabled a cover sheet is not added 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select AUTO COVER SHEET with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select YES with the V or A key and then press the OK key If you do not wish cover sheets to be added to transmissions select NO in step 4 and press the OK key KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS RCV FUNCTION These programs are used to change the default settings initially set at the factory for the various fax reception functions to settings that better meet your needs FAX RECEPTION LIGHT The LINE STATUS indicator on the operation panel informs you when a fax is received by blinking page 28 This program lets you select one of the two blinking off patterns described below or no blinking Normally PATTERN 1 is selected Optional job separator tray kit installed page 28 Blinking start and stop timing PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 When fax is When printing received to of received fax memory starts Blinking starts When printed fax is removed Off
420. of scan mode 1 2 3 4 18 If a screen appears asking you what type of connection you are using after you press the SCAN key select NETWORK with the V or A key and press the OK key Message display Messages appear here to indicate the current status of the machine Destination display This shows the selected destination There are four scanner transmission modes Scan to E mail Scan to FTP Scan to FTP Hyperlink and Scan to Desktop This shows the currently selected destination and transmission mode Color mode display This shows the currently selected color mode for scanning File type display This shows the image data file type to be created 5 6 7 8 Original display page 26 This displays an icon to indicate the original scanning mode when an original has been placed One sided scanning in the SPF Document glass 4 Two sided scanning in the RSPF The size of the original is also displayed Transmission mode display When WV appears to the right of the icon the Y key can be pressed to show a list of the currently selected destinations A destination can also be deleted in this screen Resolution display The shows the scanning resolution File creation display This shows the currently selected file creation method HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION AUDITING MODE Auditing mode is used to restrict the use of scan mode to vali
421. old 250 sheets 20 Ibs 80 g m of plain paper Loading paper in the 250 sheet paper feed unit 2 x 250 sheet paper feed unit The method of loading paper is the same as for the paper trays on the machine see the explanation on page 18 4N If you change the size of paper loaded in the tray you must change the tray s paper size setting Change the setting as explained in CHANGING THE PAPER SIZE SETTING OF A TRAY on page 21 Specifications Model AR D24 AR D25 Paper size 8 1 2 x 11 R 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 14 11 17 B5 BSR A4 B4 Paper Approximately 250 sheets 20 Ibs 80 g m2 x Approximately 250 sheets 20 Ibs 80 g m2 x capacity 1 tray 2 trays Paper weight 15 Ibs to 24 Ibs 56 g m2 to 90 g m Power supply Supplied from the machine Dimensions 23 15 64 W x 16 27 64 D x 3 15 32 H 23 15 64 W x 16 27 64 D x 6 27 32 H 590 mm W x 471 mm D x 88 mm H 590 mm W x 471 mm D x 173 5 mm H Weight 11 0 Ibs 5 0 kg 22 0 lbs 10 0 kg 41 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES DUAL FUNCTION BOARD A dual function board can be installed to add a variety of copy functions and enable use of the printer driver for the dual function board which is a more advanced printer driver than the standard printer driver For copy functions that can be used see CONVENIENT COPY FUNCTIONS page 64 Specification Model AR EB9 Sort co
422. om ratio settings select OFF and press the OK key To adjust the XY zoom copy ratios select ADJUST and press the OK key 55 TWO SIDED COPYING TWO SIDED COPYING The machine is capable of the following types of automatic two sided copying The copy paper is turned over automatically allowing two sided copying to be accomplished with ease Model Two sided copy type AR M162 AR M207 Page One sided originals to two sided copies using the SPF Yes 1 57 4 One sided originals to two sided copies using the document glass g No Yes 58 22 Two sided originals to two sided copies using the RSPF No Yes 2 59 Two sided originals to one sided copies using the RSPF s No Yes 60 1 The optional single pass feeder AR SP6N or reversing single pass feeder AR RP6N is required 2 The optional reversing single pass feeder AR RP6N is required 2 f you are using the 162 see TWO SIDED COPIES USING THE BYPASS TRAY on page 61 There are restrictions on the paper that can be used for automatic two sided copying See Paper that can be used for automatic 2 sided printing on page 18 Automatic two sided copying is not possible when the bypass tray is used 56 COPY FUNCTIONS TWO SIDED COPYING OF ONE SIDED ORIGINALS
423. on the time transmission began the other party s name the duration of the operation the number of pages the type of transmission the result the department and other information You can select whether or not part of the transmitted original is printed with transaction reports that are printed for normal transmissions and broadcast transmissions 2 The list count appears in the column of the Transaction Report and a serial number appears in the FILE column These numbers are not related to the transaction INFORMATION APPEARING IN THE TYPE NOTE COLUMN Information such as the type of transmission and type of error appears in the TYPE NOTE column of the Transaction Report or Activity Report page 88 The following notes may appear Sending result Explanation OK Transmission was completed successfully BUSY Transmission was not successful because the line was busy CANCEL A transmission was cancelled while in progress or a stored transmission job was cancelled P FAIL The power was turned off or a power failure occurred NO RX POLL A polling request was denied because the polling machine did not have its own fax number programmed PASS CODE ERR A polling request was denied because the other machine s fax number had not been stored as a polling passcode in your machine ORIG ERROR When you attempted to send a fax
424. on job while fax reception is in progress See Storing transmission jobs memory transmission on page 24 To print received fax pages on both sides of the paper enable DUPLEX RECEPTION page 105 in the key operator programs f a extension phone is not connected to the machine use automatic reception In order to receive faxes paper must be loaded in the paper tray See LOADING PAPER in the Operation manual for general information and copier to load appropriate paper Incoming faxes will be automatically adjusted to the orientation of the printing paper so there is no need to load both horizontally and vertically oriented paper However when a fax smaller than A4 8 1 2 x 11 is received the size of paper used to print the fax will differ depending on the orientation horizontal or vertical of the original in the sending machine RECEIVING FAX The machine will ring and reception 2 Reception ends will automatically begin The LINE indicator lights up e When reception ends the machine sounds a beep e When the optional job Number of rings The machine has been set to ring twice before n 44 Separator tray kit is installed beginning automatic reception You can change the pue received faxes are output to number of rings to any number from 0 to 9 in the key gt TBS the job separator operator programs See OF RINGS AT RX on page 104 If the number o
425. on manual for general information and copier PRINTING A WATERMARK You can print a watermark such as CONFIDENTIAL on your document To print a watermark open the printer driver setup screen click the Watermarks tab and follow the steps below To open the printer driver see BASIC PRINTING page 3 How to Print a Watermark From the Watermark drop down list select the watermark that you wish to print for example CONFIDENTIAL and start printing Watermark None v TOP SECRET Watermark CONFIDENTIAL CONFIDENTIAL DRAFT ORIGINAL COPY You can enter text to create your own custom watermark For details on watermark settings view printer driver Help t PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS page 7 Print sample 12 PRINTING FROM WINDOWS PRINTING TEXT AND LINES IN BLACK Color text and lines that are normally printed in light color can be printed in black Color text and lines that are faint when printed normally can be printed in black to improve legibility Printing text in black Text that is any color other than white is printed in black To use this function open the printer driver setup screen and click on the Text To Black checkbox in the Advanced tab Printing result L Text To Black Text To Black Print data ABCD ABCD EFGH When using the PCL6 printer driver if Print as graphics is selected TrueType Mode of Fo
426. on to close the dialog box without Select the application that starts up here making any changes to the settings 3 Show TWAIN setting screen when scanning 7 Apply button checkbox Click to save your settings without closing the Select whether or not the TWAIN screen is dialog box shown when scanning When the checkbox is selected the TWAIN screen appears when scanning is executed to let you adjust the scanning conditions 8 Help button Click this button to display the help file for Button Manager 4 Scan Setup area Set the scan conditions The scan settings for each of the six destinations can be changed in Button Manager To change the settings see BUTTON MANAGER SETTINGS page 25 2 When the dual function board is installed If computers are connected to both of the two USB ports on the machine separate Button Manager settings can be configured on each computer 24 1 Right click the Button Manager icon 3H on the task bar and select Settings from the pop up menu The Button Manager settings will open Show Version Close If the Button Manager icon does not appear on the task bar click the start button select All Programs Programs in other than Windows XP select Sharp Button Manager G and then click Button Manager to start Button Manager The Button Manager icon appears on the task bar 2 Click the tab that you wish to configure sci scz scx se scm sce
427. on to memory LENGTH OVER The transmitted document was over 1500 mm long and therefore could not be received NO RX ROLL When polling was attempted 1 Your fax number sender s number was not programmed in your machine 2 Your fax number was not programmed as a polling passcode number in the other machine RX NO POLL When polling was attempted 1 The other machine did not have a polling function 2 The other machine did not have a document stored in polling memory ERRORxx xxxx Line conditions prevented the reception from taking place normally First 2 digits of line error code Error code from 00 to 31 Last 4 digits of line error code Code for use by service technicians XX XX OK When serial polling ended normally xxx Indicates total number of transmissions xxx OK Indicates completed transmissions NO SA POLLING When F code polling was attempted 1 The other machine did not have an F code polling memory function 2 An F code was not programmed in the other machine 3 The other machine did not have a document stored in polling memory SA POL TX ERR When F code polling was attempted 1 The sub addresses did not match 2 The passcodes did not match 3 The other machine s F code memory boxes were for F code relay request transmission or for F code confidential transmission S ADD RX FAIL When F code reception was attempted 1 The sub addresses did n
428. one of Rapid keys 01 to 50 that you wish to edit SET ESSE PES delete number entered with the numeric keys 1 select a digit of the number with the 44 or gt key pp and press the C key The entire number including EK the selected digit will be deleted To add a number select the place where you wish to add the number with the lt q or p gt key and then enter the number When you have finished adding or deleting the number press the OK key ENTER RX STATION amp E50 8701234 1 e Edit the search characters see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 This completes the editing procedure B a a a KEY WORDS 70 PROGRAMMING Deleting a group key In step 3 on page 70 select DELETE with the V or A key Q 3 DETAIL If you select NO DELETE you can press the 8 key to check the destination name If you are deleting the destination check the destination name and then delete the destination B Press the OK key OK e Return to step 3 If you wish to delete another group key repeat steps 3 through 5 To ex
429. or the program appear The key operator code entry screen will appear 8 Press the OK key and follow the 4 os he numer Keys To n terne ey in ine program screen operator code 5 4 8 119 e 5 COPIER PRINTER g To use another program for the same mode select the desired program with the V or A key X will appear for each digit entered To use a program for a different mode press the The mode selection screen will appear BACK key and select the desired mode To exit the key operator programs press the CA key 5 Select the desired mode with the V 6 or A key O MODE SELECT KEY OP CHANGE 27 5 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter explains what to do if you encounter a problem while printing or scanning For problems related to the machine such as running out of paper or paper misfeeds see the Operation manual for general information and copier Troubleshooting information can also be found in the README files for each of the software programs To view a README file see 1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE in the Software setup guide PRINTING PROBLEMS Problem Cause and solution Print jobs are not received DATA indicator does not blink 28 The machine is set to off line mode Press the PRINT key to select printer mode and then select ON LINE with the A key
430. ormation however when image and thus when both both the sender and the the sender and the receiver receiver use the same size use the same size of paper the printed fax may either of paper the printed fax will neither be reduced nor be reduced or split up and printed on two pages split up and printed on two pages Length of scanned data Length of scanned data Length of transmitted data Length of transmitted data 42 FAXING DIVIDED ORIGINAL DUAL PAGE SCAN When faxing a book or other bound document you can use this function to divide the two open pages of the book into two separate fax pages This function can only be used when the original is A3 B4 or A4R size 11 x 17 or 8 1 2 x 11 R size if the machine uses inch based paper sizes is scanned using the document glass Your machine Book or sheet original The other machine Printed out as two separate pages Transmission to 2 C other machine nt S the original is divided into two pages when scanned into memory Selecting Dual Page Scan Follow the steps below and then send the fax a Make sure that the machine is in fax mode CEU LL When the machine is in fax T mode the FAX indicator is lit If the light is not on press the em H FAX key Bg Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key ON When the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is pressed the special function menu appears SENDING OPTIONS SENDING MENU O
431. ot match or were not programmed 2 The passcodes did not match or were not programmed 3 F code polling memory box was programmed JUNK FAX ERR Fax reception was denied by the reception denial function VIEWING THE COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY REPORT AT REGULAR INTERVALS Communication activity report Your machine keeps a record of the most recent 50 transactions both transmissions and receptions that were performed The record includes the date of the transaction the other party s name the duration and result You can have the report automatically printed when the number of transactions exceeds 50 or at a specified time This allows you to check the machine s activity at regular intervals The machine is initially set factory default setting to not print the report To have the report printed change the setting in the key operator programs See LIST SETTING AUTO LISTING on page 95 e Refer to the table on WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED page 86 for the notes that appear in the TYPE NOTE column The activity report can also be printed out on demand See PRINTING LISTS OF PROGRAMMED INFORMATION SETTINGS AND COMMUNICATION ACTIVITY on page 81 WHEN AN ALARM SOUNDS AND A WARNING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED When an error occurs during a transaction an alarm will sound and a message will appear in the display If one of the following messages appears follow the instructions in the table
432. ot specified all scanning preferences appropriately Scanning a large area at high resolution results in a large quantity of data and a prolonged scanning time When selecting the scan preferences lower the resolution or specify a suitable scanning area DISABLE USB SCAN has been enabled in the key operator programs Consult the key operator Scanner transfer speed is slow when the dual function board is installed Make sure that your computer meets the system requirements for the USB 2 0 interface Hi Speed mode Make sure that your computer meets the system requirements described in System requirements for USB 2 0 Hi Speed mode in the Key operator s guide and then set USB2 0 MODE to HI SPEED in the key operator programs Key operator s guide 31 6 SPECIFICATIONS Printer specifications Printing speed When the dual function board is installed AR M206 AR M207 20 pages min AR M161 AR M162 AR M165 16 pages min When the dual function board is not installed 12 pages min Resolution 600 dpi Page memory Memory AR M165 AR M206 AR M207 32 MB AR M161 AR M162 16 MB IMC Memory 2 16 MB Emulation SHARP GDI SPLC Sharp Printer Language with Compression Memory expansion 256 MB expansion memory board AR SMB5 be installed in one DIMM expansion slot Interface port IEEE1284 parallel port USB 1 1 port USB 1 USB 2 0
433. otice page has been printed at the end of a print job the print data received from the computer has not been printed as specified Fix the problem as explained below and then try printing again What to do when a notice page is printed Notice Page RRR ARERR AR AAA AK ThelMC memory full error had occurred a normal output was not able to be executed Please refer to the operation manual for the solution method The above notice page is printed when a print job containing more data than can be held in the memory of the dual function board is sent Deactivate the ROPM function by removing the checkmark from ROPM in the Configuration tab of the printer driver setup screen If you need to use the ROPM function set the Print quality in the printer driver to Draft or The Notice Page can be set to not print out in NOTICE PAGE page 26 of the key operator programs When the dual function board is installed The memory of the dual function board is used to temporarily hold print data when the ROPM function is used This memory is also used to temporarily store the image of the original during copying The proportion of memory allocated to the printer function can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide The memory can also be increased by adding the optional memory modules For details contact your SHA
434. ource in some regions Select the location where the original is placed Selections are Platen document glass SPF Simplex SPF Duplex Book or SPF Duplex Tablet On machines without an SPF this setting is Note eq at Platen 2 3 18 Scanning Mode menu Select Preset or Custom Settings Standard or Professional in some regions for the scanning mode The Preset or Standard screen lets you select the original type as well as monitor photo fax or OCR according to the purpose of scanning If you wish to change the default settings for these four buttons or select custom settings such as the image type and resolution before scanning switch to the Custom Settings or Professional screen For details on the settings click the Help button in the preview screen to display Help Image Area menu Set the scanning area To scan the original size detected by the machine select Auto The scanning area can also be specified as desired in the preview window 4 Zoom Preview checkbox When this is selected the selected part of the preview image will be enlarged when the Preview button is clicked To return to the regular view remove the checkmark Zoom Preview cannot be used when SPF is selected in the Scanning Position menu 5 Preview button Previews the document If Preview is canceled by immediately pressing the Esc key on your keyboard or the C
435. ovement SHARP reserves the right to make design and specification changes for product improvement without prior notice 38 PRINTER DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS Function PCL6 PCL5e PS Windows PPD Macintosh PPD Frequently used functions Number of copies 1 to 999 1 to 999 1 to 999 1 to 999 1 to 999 Printing orientation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes N up Number 2 4 6 8 9 16 2 4 6 8 9 16 2 4 6 8 9 16 2 471 2 4 6 9 16 Order Selectable Selectable Selectable Fixed Selectable Border Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Selectable Two sided printing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Binding Style 2 Book Tablet Book Tablet Book Tablet Long Side Short Side Long Side Short Side Pamphlet Style 2 Yes Yes Yes No 3 No Source Selection Paper size Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Custom Paper Size 1 size 1 size 1 size 3 sizes 4 1 size 5 Source Selection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Output tray settings Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Cover Settings Yes Yes Yes No Yes Graphics Resolution 600 300dpi 600 300dpi 600dpi 600dpi 600dpi Halftone No No Yes No No Graphics Mode Yes Yes No No No Zoom No No Yes Yes Yes Mirror Image No No
436. ovements and modifications INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing this product This manual explains how to install the printer driver and utilities that are required for the printer and scanner functions The optional network expansion kit AR NB3 enables the machine to be used as a network scanner and network printer The optional PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N enables the machine to be used as a PostScript compatible printer When the machine is used as a PostScript printer printing is possible in both a Windows and a Macintosh environment Note that printing in a Macintosh environment is only possible via a network connection Parallel and USB ports cannot be used in a Macintosh environment Where appears in this manual please substitute the name of your model for XXXX For the name f Note of the model that you are using see DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS in the Operation manual for general information and copier Software setup guide this manual Explains the procedures for installing the software in the Software CD ROMs that accompany the machine and the optional network expansion kit AR NB3 To use the machine as a printer or scanner see this manual and the online manuals Using the standard printer function and scanner function Operation manual for printer and scanner This is an online manual that can be found in the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine This manual contains
437. ow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select RECALL SETTING BUSY with the V or A key and then press the OK key If you do not wish to change the recall interval setting go to step 6 4 Select RECALL INTERVAL with the V or A key and then press the OK key D Enter the recall interval 01 to 15 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key The recall interval can be set from 1 to 15 minutes After finishing step 5 if you do not wish to change the number of recall attempts press the BACK key to exit 6 Select RECALL TIMES with the V or key and then press the OK key 7 Enter the number of recall attempts with the numeric keys and then press the OK key The number of recall attempts can be set in each country are shown in the following table Country Differentiation Table United Australia and Kingdom New Zealand The number of 0 to 10 0109 recall attempts If you do not wish to have recalling take place set the number of attempts to O f you made a mistake in step 5 or step 7 move the cursor to the mistake with the lt 4 or key and enter the correct number e Even if this setting is enabled the machine will not re attempt the call when a fax is sent by manual transmission 102 RECALL SET ERR When sending a fax this setting is used to
438. p Pages X al nexo opies Pages General in Mac Layout OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 and Duplex select the settings that Output Options you wish to configure from Error Handling the pull down menu The Paper Feed corresponding setting screen will appear Job Control PP Watermarks Advanced Summary The settings vary depending on the operating system version the printer driver version and the application 6 Click the Print button EL Geter E Cipri d E Cope ji B rois Nus ui T fave _ Printing begins When the job separator tray is installed The output tray can be selected when selecting print settings at the time of printing Select the output tray in Output in the Advanced menu of the Print window If you are using Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 select the output tray in Output in the Output and Document Style menu of the Print window If you are using Mac OS X v10 1 5 select the output tray in the Output tab in the Printer Features menu of the Print Window IF THE TRAY RUNS OUT OF PAPER DURING PRINTING Add paper to the tray that ran out or to the bypass tray If you add paper to the bypass tray press the PRINT key on the machine to switch to printer mode and select BYPASS TRAY Printing will resume Note that if the AUTO TRAY SWITCHING setting is selected in the PAPER SIZE SET accessed by pressing the SPECIAL FUNCTION key
439. p igina typ feeder tray selection screen appears For information on placing an original see 4 COPY FUNCTIONS of the Operation manual for general information and copier H Check the original size 7 Select booklet or tablet for the duplex original type with the or A key ORIGINAL SIZE O DUPLEX STYLE AUTO an DUPLEX BOOKLET Press the ORIGINAL SIZE key to open the original size selection screen See MANUALLY SETTING THE 8 Press the OK key SCANNING SIZE page 26 to set the original size OK Press the DUPLEX SCAN key You will return to the base screen and the duplex scanning mode icon will appear The duplex mode Continue from step 4 of BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE page 20 selection screen appears P Note e Two sided scanning is not possible when COLOR is set to COLOR or GRAY BOOKLET TABLET Booklets and tablets Two sided originals that are bound at the side are booklets and two sided SS originals that are bound at the top are tablets Two sided scanning mode turns off after the transmission is finished Two sided scanning mode can also be canceled by pressing the CA key Two sided scanning is only possible when an RSPF is used Automatic scanning c T ORIGINALS AST ORIGINALS of both sides of an original is not possible when the document glass is used Two sided scanning of originals longer than 11 x 17 A3
440. pecial character selected with the cursor is entered and you return to the character entry screen If the Rapid key overlay is closed while a special character is being selected the special character currently selected with the cursor is entered 85 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you make efficient use of the fax features of the machine including solutions to common problems WHEN A TRANSACTION REPORT IS PRINTED The machine has been set to automatically print a transaction report to notify you of the result when a transmission is not successful or when the Broadcast transmission function is used When transmission is not successful and a transaction report similar to the following is printed FOLLOWING DATA CANNOT BE SENT PLEASE HAND THIS REPORT TO read the report and take appropriate action The transaction report is set at the factory to print at the times indicated in grey below however the times at which the report is printed can be changed in the key operator programs See LIST SETTING PRINT SELECTION on page 95 Normal transmission ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY NEVER PRINTS e Broadcast transmission ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY NEVER PRINTS Original image print setting ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY NEVER PRINTS e Reception ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY INEVER PRINTS Confidential reception ALWAYS PRINTS NEVER PRINTS The Transaction Report shows the date of transmissi
441. phone can produce tone signals refer to the manual for your extension phone If you on a pulse dial line set your Press the 5 key once and the phone to issue tone signals key twice on the extension phone Refer to your phone s manual to set the phone to Fax reception is activated issue tone signals If your phone is already set to issue tone signals Replace the extension phone proceed to the next step 2 one digit number that is used to activate fax reception from an extension phone initially set to 5 is called the remote reception number You can change this number to any number from 0 to 9 in the key operator programs See REMOTE RECEPTION on page 98 61 PROGRAMMING This chapter explains the procedures for programming auto dial keys Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys programs and F code operations and how to print out lists of programmed information PROGRAMMING Auto dial numbers Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys programs and F code operations are stored and edited at the operation panel of the machine This chapter explains how to use the operation panel for these procedures STORING EDITING AND DELETING AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND PROGRAMS This section explains the procedures for storing editing and deleting auto dial numbers Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and group keys and programs which simplify the transmission procedure To use Rapid
442. posure can be manually adjusted to 5 levels Auto This is the default exposure mode In this mode the characteristics of an original being copied are read by the exposure system and exposure adjustments are made automatically The exposure level is lowered for colored areas and background shadows Text photo TEXT This mode enhances low density areas of an original and suppresses high density background areas to make text more legible PHOTO This mode provides clearer reproduction of halftones in photos Press the EXPOSURE key H Adjust the exposure level as needed with the 44 or gt key EXPOSURE EXPOSURE oo AUTO COPY EXPOSURE PAPER 700 SCAN COf loDE RESOLUTION ADDR P RESOLUTION ADDR The copy exposure screen will appear The exposure level cannot be adjusted when AUTO is selected 2 Select the exposure mode that best 4 the p gt key For a lighter suits the original with the V or A The default exposure levels for TEXT and key PHOTO can be set in the key operator programs 2 Exposure level guidelines 1 to 2 Dark originals such as newspapers 3 Normal density originals 4 to 5 Text written in pencil or light color text The EXPOSURE key can also be pressed to select Press the OK key the exposure mode 2 When is selected PHOTO To return to AUTO mode press MODE DEFAULT in the key operator the EXPOSURE key sele
443. ppropriate paper and a fax is subsequently received that can be printed this setting determines whether the subsequent fax is printed before the fax that cannot be printed The setting is initially enabled the subsequent fax is printed first 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select EARLIER OUTPUT with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled the subsequent fax is printed first and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled 106 ANTI JUNK FAX When this setting is enabled reception from fax numbers programmed using the ENTER JUNK FAX program will be blocked This program is normally disabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select ANTI JUNK FAX with the V or A key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox If this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled ENTER JUNK FAX This program is used to program fax numbers from which you wish to block reception Up to 50 fax numbers can be stored maximum of 20 digits each To block
444. public box for regular polling memory Note that they do not apply to F code polling memory See USING POLLING MEMORY page 39 POLLING SECURITY When performing polling memory see Polling security on page 41 this setting is used to select whether any machine will be allowed to poll your machine or only machines that have been programmed in your machine Normally this setting is enabled 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select POLLING SECURITY with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select POLLING SECURITY with the V or key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled POLLING PASSCODE MODE When POLLING SECURITY is enabled use this setting to program or delete the fax numbers of the machines that are allowed to poll your machine Programmed fax numbers are called passcodes Up to 10 fax numbers can be programmed To check the programmed numbers print the KEY OPE LIST page 95 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select POLLING SECURITY with the V or key and then press the OK key 3 Select POLLING PASSCODE MODE with the V or A key and then press the OK key 4 Select ENTER with the V or A key and then press the OK key
445. py 2 in 1 4 in 1 copying rotation copy Added functions border erase copying margin copying card shot USB 2 0 port Hi speed printer function for the dual function board ROPM function High speed data transfer Electronic sort compression method JBIG Electronic sort memory 16 MB Electronic sort scannable pages 100 standard 8 1 2 x 11 A4 originals STORAGE OF SUPPLIES Standard supplies for this product that are to be replaced by the user are paper and toner cartridge For best copying results be sure to use only SHARP Genuine Supplies which are lt q designed engineered and tested to maximize the life and performance of SHARP copiers Look for the Genuine Supplies label on the toner package GENUINE SUPPLIES PROPER STORAGE Store the supplies in a location that is clean and dry at a stable temperature not exposed to direct sunlight Store paper in the wrapper and lying flat Paper stored out of the wrapper or in packages standing on end may curl or get damp resulting in paper misfeeds Supply and Consumables The supply of spare parts for a repair of the appliance is guaranteed for at least 7 years following the termination of production Spare parts are those parts of the apparatus which may break down within the scope of the ordinary use of the product whereas those parts which normally exceed the life of the product are not to be considered as spare parts Consumables to
446. quipment shall not be used in any manner which could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service To avoid telephone charges for local calls be sure to store numbers without area code in your rapid or speed dial locations This equipment may not provide for the effective hand over of a call to another device connected to the same line WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing this product This manual only explains the facsimile functions of the product For safety precautions and general information on using the machine such as loading paper clearing misfeeds and handling peripheral units see the Operation manual for general information and copier For other functions see the following manuals as appropriate Copier function See the Operation manual for general information and copier Printer function See the Operation manual for printer and scanner Network scanner function See the Operation manual for network scanner if the network scanner option is installed The explanations in this manual assume that certain optional peripheral units are installed This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the RSPF and the si
447. r CopyrightO 1987 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell Inc Agfa and the Agfa Rhombus are registered trademarks of Agfa Gevaert A G All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications CONTENTS INTRODUCTION cernerent SCANNER FUNCTION ABOUT THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION adiR eni EE dad ik nda 3 SETTINGS AND PROGRAMMING REQUIRED FOR THE NETWORK SCANNER FEATURE 4 HOW TO ACCESS THE WEB PAGE AND VIEW HELP E e 4 ABOUT THE WEB PAGE FOR USERS 5 STORING 6 ABOUT THE WEB PAGE FOR THE ADMINISTRATOR 11 BASIC SETTINGS FOR NETWORK SCANNING 3 12 VARIOUS SERVER SETTINGS 13 PROTECTING INFORMATION PROGRAMMED IN THE WEB PAGE Passwords 5 eminens 14 2 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION A LOOK AT THE MACHINE 16 16 SCAN MODE BASE SCREEN 18 AUDITIN
448. r programs see DATE amp TIME SET on page 99 2 Sender s name programmed in the key operator programs see OWN PASSCODE SET on page 96 When Auditing mode page 11 is being used for the fax function and ACC NAME PRINT page 101 is enabled the account name of the account used to perform the transmission is used for the sender s name account name entered in step 6 of ACCOUNT SET page 98 in the key operator programs 3 Sender number programmed in the key operator programs see OWN PASSCODE SET on page 96 4 Transmitted page number 3 digit number appearing in the format page number total pages Only the page number appears if you use manual transmission direct transmission or quick on line transmission Printing of the transmitted page number can be disabled in the key operator programs see PAGE COUNTER SET on page 101 Position of sender information You can select whether the sender information is added outside the document data or inside the document data in the key operator programs see PRINT STATION IN RCVD DATA on page 101 The factory default setting is outside the document data Direction of Direction of transmission Outside the scanned data transmission Inside the scanned data document data document data None of the transmitted The top edge of the image is cut off however scanned image will be cut the transmitted image is off by the sender s longer than the scanned inf
449. rameters are set event information for the the specified e mail addresses printer will be transmitted to the specified addresses It mm bet ia via E mail each time a specified event occurs The you quit the browser betore clicking f Note Submit the settings will be canceled meaning of each event item is shown below send printer information immediately to the specified e mail addresses click Send Now Example Paper Jam A paper misfeed has occurred Toner Low Toner is low Toner Empty Toner must be added Paper Empty Paper must be loaded If you quit the browser before clicking Submit the settings will be canceled 30 5 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS The key operator programs allow the administrator of the machine key operator to enable and disable functions to suit the needs of the workplace This chapter explains the key operator programs for the network and printer functions For key operator programs for general use of the machine see the Key operator s guide For the initial key operator code set at the factory see PROGRAMMING A KEY OPERATOR CODE in the Key operator s guide KEY OPERATOR PROGRAM LIST The key operator programs for the network and printer functions are shown in the following table Factory default settings are indicated in bold When YES appears in the Settings column of a program the program is enabled by pressing the OK key so that a checkmark appears in the
450. ransmitted to end receiving machines programmed in the relay broadcast memory box Receiving machine B E Receiving machine C 1 The machine that originally sends the document is called the relay request machine and the machine that has a memory box containing the end receiving machines and which relays the received document to those machines is called the relay machine The relay machine also prints the document sent by the relay request machine rer For example corporate headquarters in Seattle wants to send the same document to branch offices in San Francisco Oakland Berkeley and San Jose If the San Francisco office creates a relay broadcast memory box and programs the Oakland Berkeley and San Jose offices as end receiving destinations the overall phone charges will be lower than if the Seattle office uses the regular broadcast transmission function page 32 If used together with a timer setting page 34 to take advantage of off peak rates the cost of transmission can be further reduced Transmission by the relay machine is called F code relay broadcast transmission and transmission from the relay request machine to the relay machine is called relay request transmission This machine does not support Sharp s previous relay broadcast function which uses the programmed f Note sender s number and relay ID code Up to 10 F code relay groups boxes can be programm
451. rating system please refer to your operating system manual or the online Help function The screen images and procedures that appear in this manual are mainly for Windows XP With other versions of Windows some screen images may be different from those in this manual The explanations in this manual are based on American English and the North American version of the software Software for other countries and regions may vary slightly from the North American version This manual refers to the Reversing single pass feeder as the RSPF and the Single pass feeder as the SPF Unless specific mention is made both the RSPF and the SPF are referred to simply as SPF e Where AR XXXX appears in this manual please substitute the name of your model for XXXX In some regions the Key operator s guide cited in this manual is a separate manual and in other regions the Key operator s guide is included in the Operation manual for general information and copier The Dual function board cited in this manual can be installed as an option in some models and is pre installed standard in other models For detailed information please refer to 3 PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND SUPPLIES in the Operation manual for general information and copier Trademark Acknowledgments Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation e Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows 4 0 Windows 2000 Windo
452. rator programs See QUICK ON LINE TX on page 101 When an original is transmitted using the following methods the job will be stored in memory Quick On line transmission will not be performed Sending a fax from the document glass Broadcast transmission page 32 Timer transmission page 34 F code transmission page 48 in Chapter 4 The machine is initially set factory setting to perform Quick On line transmission If desired you can disable this ote If the receiving party is busy If the receiving party is busy the transmission is temporarily cancelled and then automatically re attempted after a brief interval Two attempts are made at an interval of minutes If you do not want the machine to re attempt the transmission press the FAX STATUS key and cancel the job Page 27 1 The settings can be changed in the key operator programs See RECALL SETTING BUSY on page 102 If a transmission error occurs If an error occurs that prevents transmission or the receiving machine does not answer the call within 45 seconds 2 the transmission is stopped and then automatically re attempted later One attempt is made at an interval of 1 minute 2 If you do not want the machine to re attempt the transmission press the FAX STATUS key and cancel the job Page 27 This machine also supports error correction mode ECM and is set to automatically resend any part of a fax that is distorted due to noise on the line
453. re CD ROM 2 to view the Readme file 2 E CD ROMS in the network expansion kit AR NB3 The optional network expansion kit includes the following four CD ROMs 1 Software CD ROM 1 included in the network expansion kit PCL5e and PCL6 drivers and PS driver Printer Status Monitor Printer Administration Utility NICManager Macintosh PPD File Sharpdesk CD ROM Sharpdesk Desktop Document Management Software Network Scanner Tool SHARP TWAIN AR DM TWAIN driver OmniPage Pro Trial ScanSoft inc Network Utilities CD ROM This CD ROM contains utilities for using the machine as a network printer and an online manual Software CD ROM 2 Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 Software CD ROM 1 included in the network expansion kit This CD ROM contains a wizard type installer for installation of the following utilities and online manuals For the procedure for installing the software see page 20 of this manual Printer driver Contains the PCL5e and PCL6 printer drivers and the PS printer driver that are needed to use this product Printer Status Monitor When using the printer in a network environment this provides messages and displays that allow you to monitor the status of the printer Printer Administration Utility When using the printer in a network environment this administration utility makes it possible to configure printer sett
454. red Your changes to the settings appear Make sure that the changes are correct and then click the OK button g Restart the machine Power off the machine and then power it back on Select Search from the File menu The IP address that you entered will appear Make sure that it is correct This completes the procedure for setting the IP address 23 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLING THE PRINTER DRIVER STANDARD INSTALLATION If you wish to install the display font or specify the machine s IP address by direct entry when installing the printer driver select Custom installation Page 26 use the machine as a network printer Windows NT 4 0 TCP IP Protocol must be installed on your computer If this is not installed see Windows NT 4 0 Help to install them A Insert the network expansion kit Software CD ROM 1 into your computer s CD ROM drive 2 Click the start button click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon Double click the Setup icon 2 If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected automatically The SOFTWARE LICENSE window will appear Make sure that you understan
455. red in the user tab of the address book Page 22 Hostname or IP Address Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server maximum of 127 characters Required Port Number Required Enter a port number from to 65535 for the desktop network scanner tool Process Directory Enter the destination directory name for the file maximum of 200 characters The file Optional will be processed in this directory after it is received User Name Optional Enter the login user name for the network scanner tool maximum of 32 characters Password Optional Enter the login password for the network scanner tool maximum of 32 characters f you entered a host name in Hostname or IP Address you will need to enter the DNS server settings Page 13 8 BEFORE USING THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION Storing Groups Scan to E mail You can send a scanned image to multiple e mail destinations in a single Scan to E mail operation If you frequently transmit to a fixed group of destinations you can store the destinations as a group tf Note Up to 100 destinations can be stored in one group Destination in the menu frame 3 Enter the destination information of the Web page For the settings see the following table Image Gend Management Destination Manageme m grinning Ss u HE b iea ee ii aiin et Gettin bam jip hedi
456. reen and you return to the base screen g Make sure that the paper tray with 8 1 2 x 11 A4 paper is selected 8 1 2 x 11 R A4R paper can also be used if rotation copying is possible in auto paper select mode 7 Select any other copy settings as needed and press the START key To cancel dual page copy select DUAL PAGE COPY which has a checkmark in the special modes screen once again and press the OK key INTERRUPTING A COPY RUN Interrupt copying A copy run can be temporarily interrupted to allow another copy job to be performed Interrupt copying When the other job is finished the copy run will resume using the original copy settings Interrupt copying is not possible when the document glass is being used for copy job and NO SORT is selected When 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 is selected interrupt copying is not possible e Sort copying 2 in 1 and 4 in 1 when the dual function board is installed and automatic two sided copying cannot be used for an interrupt copy job Configuring settings in the key operator programs use as a scanner and fax transmission are also not possible Press the INTERRUPT key 4 Set the number of copies and then press the START key If the INTERRUPT key is pressed copying will stop and the settings will temporarily return to the default settings after the copy in progress has been completed The INTERRUPT indicator will blink until the
457. rees to enable correct printing on the paper Other than the bypass tray HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER SOURCE SETTINGS There are two bypass tray settings in Paper Source in the Paper tab of the printer driver setup screen When Bypass Tray is selected the print job is automatically printed on the paper in the bypass tray When Bypass Manual is selected the print job is not printed until paper is inserted into the bypass tray If paper is already in the bypass tray remove the paper and then re insert it to begin printing PRINTING FROM WINDOWS AUDITING MODE When AUDITING is enabled in the key operator programs a 5 digit account number must be entered in the printer driver setup screen in order to print Account numbers are stored in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide To open the account number entry screen click the Job Control button in the Main tab of the printer driver setup Screen Account Number Job Control C Auto Job Control review Click the checkbox on the left side of Account Number so that a checkmark appears enter your 5 digit account number and click the OK button 2 When the Auto Job Control review checkbox is clicked the account number confirmation screen always appears before printing starts f CANCEL JOBS OF INVALID ACCOUNTS is enabled in the key operator programs and printing is attempted w
458. relative to the top left corner as a fixed origin Auto Scan Area Adjustment button Auto Scan Area Judgement in some regions Click this button when the preview screen is displayed to automatically set the scanning area to the entire preview image gt Click the Auto Scan Area Adjustment button to automatically set the scanning area to the entire preview image Preview image Preview window Help button Click to display the help file for the scanner driver 19 SCANNING FROM A WIA COMPLIANT APPLICATION WINDOWS XP If you are using Windows XP you can use the WIA driver to scan from Paint and other WIA compliant applications The procedure for scanning using Paint is explained in the following 1 Place the original s that you wish to Select the paper source and picture scan on the document glass or in the type and click the Preview button SPF For information on placing an original for scanning see 4 COPY FUNCTIONS in the Operation manual for general information and copier 2 Start Paint and then select From Scanner or Camera from the File menu The scan screen of the WIA driver will appear 20 Edt Wes Drege Coles Hep Mess Cree Open Ores Sen he Prat Precise Page Sebun If you have WIA drivers for other devices installed on your computer the Select Device screen will open Select SHARP AR XXXX and click the OK
459. report that is stored in the machine s memory printed out at regular intervals You can choose to have the report automatically printed each time the number of stored transactions exceeds 50 or have the report printed at a specified time every day only once per day You can also enable both print methods The report is normally set to not print out To have the report automatically printed when the number of stored transactions the combined total of transmissions and receptions exceeds 50 select AUTO PRINT REPT AT LIMIT 50 To have the report printed at a specified time enable PRINT DAILY AT DESIGNATED TIME and enter the desired time 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 95 KEY OPERATOR PROGRAMS Select LIST PRINT SET with the V or key and then press the OK key Select LIST SETTING with the W or A key and then press the OK key Select AUTO LISTING with the V or key and then press the OK key ao A N Select AUTO PRINT REPT AT LIMIT 50 with the V or key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled and a checkmark appears in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled 6 If you wish to have the activity report printed at regular intervals go to step 7 If you have finished selecting settings for this program press the BACK key 7 Sel
460. restores the copy settings to the initial settings The duration of time after which Auto clear clears the copy settings can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide To stop copying in the middle of a run press the C key If you find it difficult to remove the original from the document feeder tray open the feeding roller cover before removing the original If you pull out the original without opening the feeding roller cover the original may become dirty Stream feeding mode If stream feeding mode has been enabled in the key operator programs see the Key operator s guide the message Set originals for stream feeding will appear in the display for 5 seconds after all originals have been fed from the SPF Any new originals placed in the SPF while this message appears will be fed and copied automatically COPY FUNCTIONS Auto paper select mode When auto paper select mode is enabled AUTO appears in the paper size display This function automatically selects paper that is the same size as the original 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 8 1 2 x 13 8 1 2 x 14 11 x 17 A5 B5 B5R A4 A4R B4 paper a zoom setting is selected after placing the original the paper size that is appropriate for the zoom setting will be automatically selected Auto paper select mode is canceled if the auto zoom select function page 52 is enabled or if a paper tray
461. riginal in the scanning position For more information see 4 COPY FUNCTIONS in the Operation manual for general information and copier Start up a Twain compliant Start up the Scanner and Press the SCAN key on the or WIA compliant Camera Wizard from machine to switch to application and select the Control Panel in your scanner mode and select the machine s scanner driver computer destination SC1 to SC6 Set the scan preferences Scanning ts SCANNING FROM TWAIN COMPLIANT APPLICATION page 16 SCANNING FROM A WIA COMPLIANT APPLICATION WINDOWS XP page 20 Scanning Scanning t SCANNING FROM THE t SCANNING USING THE SCANNER AND CAMERA KEYS ON THE MACHINE WIZARD WINDOWS XP page 23 page 21 BUTTON MANAGER page 24 Eee 1 TWAIN is an international interface standard for scanners and other image acquisition devices By installing a TWAIN driver on your computer you can scan and work with images using a variety of TWAIN compliant applications 2 WIA Windows Imaging Acquisition is a Windows function that allows a scanner digital camera or other imaging device to communicate with an image processing application The WIA driver for this machine can only be used in Windows XP 8 To begin scanning using the machine s operation panel settings must be configured in the Control Panel after Button Manager is installed For more information see SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER
462. rk will be cleared and the setting disabled ACCOUNT SET This program is used to program delete and change account numbers for fax mode Up to 50 account numbers can be programmed Each account number has five digits When you have finished programming one account number you can continue programming other account numbers Two methods are available for deleting account numbers deleting an individual account number and deleting all account numbers To change an account number enter the account number to be changed and then enter a new account number After an account number is changed another account number can be changed Programming a new account number 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select INITIAL SETTING with the V key and then press the OK key Select ACCOUNT SET with the V or A key and then press the OK key 2 3 4 Select ENTER with the V or A key and then press the OK key 5 Enter the new account number 00001 to 99999 with the numeric keys and then press the OK key If the number is not correct press the C key and re enter the number 6 Enter an account name up to 18 characters and then press the OK key See ENTERING CHARACTERS page 82 for the procedure for entering letters Press the OK key to return to the screen of step 3 To program another account number repeat steps 5 and 6 To exit press the BACK k
463. rohibit changes to the default condition settings Disabling of Clock Adjustment Interface settings Item YES NO Settings This setting is used to prohibit changes to the date and time settings This item does not appear when the fax option is installed Description Hexadecimal Dump Mode YES NO This program is used to print out the print data from the computer in hexadecimal and in the corresponding text characters based on ASCII code This allows you to check whether or not print data is being correctly sent from the computer Timeout 1 60 999 sec During reception of a print job if remaining data is not received after the time set here elapses the port connection is broken and the next print job is begun Emulation Switching Auto PostScript PCL Select the printer language When Auto is selected the language is automatically selected from the data sent to the printer Unless errors occur frequently do not change the setting from Auto to another setting when the PS3 expansion kit is installed Port Switching Method Switch at End of Job Switch after I O Timeout Select the method for switching network ports WEB FUNCTIONS OF THE MACHINE E MAIL STATUS AND E MAIL ALERT SETTINGS These functions send information on machine use print count copy count etc and error conditions paper misfeed out of paper out of toner etc
464. rrent key operator program settings and other programmed information LIST PRINT 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 Select LIST PRINT SET with the V or key and then press the OK key Select LIST PRINT with the V or key and then press the OK key A c Select the desired list with the W or A key and then press the OK key KEY OPE LIST JUNK FAX LIST or ACC USAGE LIST can be selected Printing begins when you end the key operator program This list shows the current key operator program settings It also shows the programmed sender s name sender s fax number polling permission numbers and the fax forwarding number JUNK FAX This shows the programmed fax LIST numbers from which fax reception is to be blocked See ENTER JUNK FAX on page 106 ACC This shows the activity USAGE LIST communication time and number of pages of each account LIST SETTING PRINT SELECTION This setting is used to select the conditions for printing out transaction reports for normal transmission broadcast transmission original print reception and confidential reception ORIGINAL TRANSMISSION BROADCAST IMAGE PRINT SETTING ALWAYS PRINTS ALWAYS PRINTS ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR ONLY ERROR ONLY ERROR ONLY NEVER PRINTS NEVER PRINTS NEVER PRINTS RECEPTION CONF RECEPTION ALWAYS PRINTS ALWAYS PRINTS ERROR
465. rs in the checkbox f this procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled fax print hold is enabled SENDING FUNCTION These programs are used to change the default settings initially set at the factory for the various fax transmission functions to settings that better meet your needs RES CON SET This program is used to adjust the exposure level when scanning an original to be faxed The initial setting is standard resolution and auto exposure mode 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select RES CON SET with the V or A key and press the OK key 4 Select the resolution setting with the V or key and the exposure mode with the lt 4 or gt key and then press the OK key See page 15 for information on selecting the resolution and contrast settings 100 AUTO REDUCE TX This setting is used to have transmitted faxes reduced to match the size of the other machine s printing paper AUTO REDUCE TX is normally enabled If the setting is disabled documents are faxed in their original size Because the size is not adjusted to match the size of the printing paper part of the received fax may be cut off 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and th
466. rsonal injury or damage to the machine Do not make copies of anything which is prohibited from copying by law The following items are normally prohibited from printing by national law Other items may be prohibited by local law e Money Stamps Bonds Stocks e Bank drafts Checks Passports Driver s licenses e Do not touch the photoconductive drum Scratches or smudges on the drum will cause dirty prints e Store spare toner cartridges in a cool dry place without removing from the package before use If they are exposed to direct sunlight or excessive heat poor copies may result BATTERY DISPOSAL THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY MEMORY BACK UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY PLEASE CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SHARP DEALER OR AUTHORIZED SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE FOR ASSISTANCE IN DISPOSING OF THIS BATTERY This product utilizes tin lead solder and a fluorescent lamp containing a small amount of mercury Disposal of these materials may be regulated due to environmental considerations For disposal or recycling information please contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance www eia org LASER INFORMATION Wave length 785 nm 10 nm 15 nm CAUTIONS Pulse times Europe North America 3 1 us x 3 1 ns 7 mm 3 7 us 3 7 5 7 mm Output power Max 0 8 mW At the production line the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0 8 MILLIWATT
467. rty and then press the OK key Bg Press the START key 4 Replace the phone CONVENIENT METHODS OF USE SETTING THE RECEPTION MODE The machine normally receives faxes automatically after ringing however when an extension phone is connected you can set the reception mode to MANUAL This will allow you to talk to the other party first and then receive a fax This is convenient when you only have one telephone line and receive more voice calls than faxes You must answer all calls on the extension phone and activate fax reception after you verify that a call is a fax transmission Press the COMM SETTING key in Select AUTO or MANUAL with the the initial state of Fax mode V or A key RCV SETTING SYMBOL 14 a Select RX with the V or A key B Press the OK key OK Activating fax reception from an extension phone remote reception After receiving a call on the extension phone you can activate fax reception from the extension phone This is called remote reception After speaking or when you hear a fax tone through the extension phone perform the following procedure with the extension phone still lifted If you made the call remote reception will not be possible 2 The following procedure is not possible if you are on pulse dial line and your extension phone cannot produce tone signals To find out whether your extension
468. ry Select any number up to 20 digits ww 11245 73212 wW Document Product Plannin 1 5 0 7732123 2 Product Box name used to manage ept Planning boxes in your machine Product Planning Dept Dept Select a name of up to 36 v Z characters 0 Passcode key Department Reports bert Select any number up to 20 Manager anager RP 9 digits Not required 11111111 EX Reps public box is used for normal memory polling See USING POLLING MEMORY on page 39 48 TRANSMISSION USING F CODES When communication occurs involving a box the communication will only take place if the sub address and passcode that the other machine sends match the sub address and passcode programmed in your machine for that box Therefore to allow communication you must inform the other party of the sub address and passcode of the box Likewise to send a fax to a box in another machine or use polling to retrieve a document from a box you must know the sub address and passcode of that box Note that assigning names simply makes it easier to manage boxes you do not need to inform the other party of a box name However you must inform the other party of the sub address and passcode for a box This machine uses the term sub address for the location of the memory box and the term passcode for the password that allows communication however other fax machines of other manufacturers may use different ter
469. s If irritation does occur consult medical personnel Ingestion Rinse with water and drink several glasses of water If irritation or discomfort does occur consult medical personnel 5 FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES Extinguishing Media Water foam and dry chemicals Special Fire Fighting Procedures None Fire and Explosion Hazards Toner material like most finely divided organic powders may form an explosive mixture 6 ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES Personal Precautions None Environmental Precautions None Methods for Cleaning Up Wipe off with paper or cloth Do not use vacuum cleaner when a large amount is released It like most finely divided organic powders is capable of creating a dust explosion 7 HANDLING AND STORAGE Handling Technical Measures None Precautions None Safe Handling Advice Use of a dust mask is recommended when handling a large quantity of toner or during long term exposure as with any non toxic dust Try not to disperse the particles Storage Technical Measures None Storage Conditions Keep container closed and Store in a cool and dry place Keep out of the reach of children Incompatible Products None 8 EXPOSURE CONTROLS PERSONAL PROTECTION Engineering Measures Ventilation Not required under intended use 80 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 3 4 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 31211 Exposure Limit Values OSHA PEL USA ACGIH TL
470. s V A 4 These are used to select items and move through pages 18 ADDRESS key page 21 This key is used to search for a fax destination When the auto power shut off function is that has been stored as an auto dial number in activated All lights except the mode key the address book lights go off For the information on the auto power shut off function see the 19 BROADCAST key page 32 Operation manual for general This is used to perform a broadcast transmission information and copier For information on the keys and lights which are used for the copy function and other functions see Operation Panel in faxed the manual for each function 20 ORIGINAL SIZE key page 14 This is used to set the size of the original to be BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCTION FAX MODE BASE SCREEN The base screen of fax mode is displayed by pressing the FAX key when the print mode copy mode or scan mode Screen appears The base screen of fax mode 1 Stand by 2 MAY 10 MON 10 25 AM 9 MEMEMORY 8 AUTO Q CONT EAk 8 6 STANDARD 1 Message display 6 Free memory display Messages appear here to indicate the current This shows the percentage of fax memory that is status of the machine free An icon E appears to the right side when confidential fax has been received gt Reception made display page 61 There are two modes
471. s are programmed into a Rapid key If you frequently send faxes to the same group of destinations using broadcast transmission which is used to send the same document to multiple destinations in a single operation page 32 it is convenient to program those destinations into a group key Bg Enter a group name see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 ENTER GROUP NAME Up to 36 characters can be entered for the name A group name must be entered H Press the OK key Up to 10 search characters can be entered The search characters function as a keyword if you need to search for the destination when sending a fax page 21 PROGRAMMING B Store the destinations using Rapid keys Speed Dial numbers and the numeric keys To store a Rapid key press the Rapid key that you wish to use 01 to 50 If you press an incorrect key press the C key and then press the correct key To store a Speed Dial number press the SPEED key and then enter the desired Speed Dial number 000 to 299 with the numeric keys If you press an incorrect key uu press the C key and then REDIAL PAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING press the correct key 5 Ox SPACE You can also enter a destination fax number with the numeric keys How
472. s button When The MFP driver installation is complete appears click the OK button If you wish to install Sharpdesk click the Utility Software button in step 5 If you do not wish to install Sharpdesk go to step 18 In Windows 95 NT 4 0 the Utility Software Note button does not appear 15 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER VIA A SERVER The machine can be used as a shared printer in a Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 XP network environment Note that the Windows network environment must already be established Follow these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network 2 For the procedure for configuring settings in the printer server see the Operation manual for printer and scanner The printer server explained here is a computer that is connected to the machine and clients are other computers connected to the same network as the printer server 1 Insert the Software CD ROM 1 that The files required for installation of accompanies the machine into your the MFP driver are copied if MFP computer s CD ROM drive Driver was selected in Step 4 Follow the on screen instructions Click the start button click My Computer and then double click When you are asked how the printer is the CD ROM icon 2 con
473. s including communication time and the other party TIMER LIST This list shows timer transmissions and recall mode jobs MEM POLLING LIST This list shows information on the documents and settings stored for memory polling and F code memory polling e RAPID LIST This list shows the information stored in each Rapid key that has been programmed SPEED LIST This list shows the information stored in each Speed Dial number that has been programmed GROUP LIST This list shows the information stored in each group key that has been programmed e TELEPHONE LIST This list shows the destinations that have been stored in auto dial numbers in the order of their search characters PROGRAM LIST This list shows the contents of each program that has been stored SUB ADD SET LIST This list shows the sub addresses and passcodes that have been programmed for F code communication Note that print passcodes are not shown in the list CONF RX LIST This list shows the confidential box numbers that have received confidential faxes and the number of pages received 1 In Fax mode press the SPECIAL R REPORT with the V or A FUNCTION key key Begin the following procedure from the base screen of Fax mode MENT When the SPECIAL corr MA FUNCTION key is pressed the function selection menu SPECIAL FUNCTION COMM SETTING ORIGINAL STORE B Press the OK key OK g Select the list tha
474. s 1 to 3 on page 20 and then follow the procedure below The factory default setting for the light source color is WHITE If you need to change the light source color follow these steps tf Note light source color can only be selected when the color mode is set to B W Page 27 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key in 3 Press the OK key scan mode Perform this operation from the base screen of scan mode When the SPECIAL special function menu appears To select scan mode see step 1 on page 20 Select the desired light source color 2 Select LIGHT SOURCE with the V with the V or A key key or A key O LIGHT SOURCE SPECIAL FUNCTION B W THRESHOLD LIGHT SOURCE VOID AREA PAPER SIZE SET Press the OK key OK The setting is stored and you return to the base screen ADJUSTING THE THRESHOLD VALUE When scanning in black and white mode you can adjust the threshold value As the threshold value is increased black becomes stronger As the threshold value is decreased white becomes stronger Select scan mode place the original steps 1 to 3 on page 20 and then follow the procedure below The factory default setting for the threshold value is 128 To change the threshold value follow these steps tf Note The threshold value can only be adjusted when the color mode is set to B W Page 27 1 Press the SPECIAL FUNCTION key in B Select B W THRESHOLD
475. s mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Fine Fine Halftone 8 x 15 4 lines mm Super Fine Super Fine Halftone 16 x 15 4 lines mm Ultra Fine Ultra Fine Halftone Printing method Electrophotography Transmission speed 33 6 kbps down to 2 4 kbps Automatic fallback Transmission time 1 2 seconds Super G3 mode 33 6 kbps JBIG 6 seconds G3 ECM mode 14 4 kbps JBIG Paper size A3 to A5 8 1 2 x 11 Inch based machine 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 A4 Effective recording width 293 mm max A3 printing or 11 5 max 11 x 17 printing Transmittable original size to A5 Inch based machine 11 x 17 to 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 Refer to Image rotation page 25 for transmission of A5 size documents Effective scanning width Maximum 297 mm 11 7 Halftone transmission Yes 256 levels Contrast adjustment Automatic 5 levels by manual adjustment Extension telephone connection Possible 1 telephone Auto dialling A combined total of 50 Rapid dial and group dial keys can be stored 300 speed dial destinations can be stored Timer Transmission Yes Program function Yes 9 programs F code support Yes can transmit and receive SUB SEP sub address and SID PWD passcode signals Auto document feeding Yes maximum of 40 sheets 30 sheets of 90 g m 24 1 5 paper or total stack thickness of 4 mm 5 32 or less Image memory
476. s src BEER je Using the E mail print function To use the e mail print function attach the file that you wish to print to an e mail message and send the e mail to the machine s e mail address The machine can print the following file types PCLXL PCL5e PS PDF and TIFF with file extensions pcl ps pdf tiff and tif Control commands can be entered in the message of the e mail to specify the number of copies and print format Commands are entered in the format command name value The following control commands can be entered Function Command name Values Example Copies COPIES 1 999 Two sided print DUPLEX OFF TOP LEFT Account number ACCOUNTNUMBER 5 digit number File type LANGUAGE AUTO PCL PCLXL POSTSCRIPT PDF TIFF Paper PAPER Name of available paper LETTER 4 etc COPIES 2 DUPLEX LEFT ACCOUNTNUMBER 11111 PAPER LETTER Enter the commands in Plain Text format If entered in Rich Text format HTML the commands will have no effec To receive a list of the control commands enter the command Config in the e mail message f an e mail is sent with nothing entered in the message printing will take place according to the settings in the condition settings menu in the Web page Default settings page 24 To print PS and PDF files the PS3 expansion kit is required An encrypted PDF file cannot be printed Only enter a File type when you are specifying a page d
477. s the START key Repeat until all pages have been scanned and then press the key Make sure that the reception mode is set to auto reception Transmission begins when the other machine calls and polls your machine 2 cancel scanning To cancel scanning of a document while scanning is in progress press the C key To erase the documents in the Public Box follow the procedure in Deleting documents from the Public Box page 41 Printing documents in the Public Box To check the document that is stored in the public box follow these steps to print it out Follow steps 2 6 of Scanning a document into polling memory the Public Box page 39 and then follow the steps below Select PRINT with the V or A key ORIGINAL ADD CHANGE DELETE 40 H Press the OK key Printing begins automatically ADVANCED TRANSMISSION METHODS Deleting documents from the Public Box This procedure is used to delete documents from the Public Box when they are no longer needed Follow steps 2 to 6 of Scanning a D YES with the V or A key document into polling memory the Public Box page 39 and then follow e the steps below ox VES 2 Select DELETE with the V or A key 4 H ORIGINAL 4 ADD To cancel the deletion select NO CHANGE B Press the OK key OK The documents are deleted from the Public Box Deletion is not possible whi
478. sage prompting you to restart your computer may appear In this case click the Yes button to restart your computer To use the PS printer driver the PS3 This completes the installation f Note expansion kit must be installed 1 p After the installation see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to check the printer Select whether or not you wish the driver setings printer to be your default printer and If you installed the PS printer driver the PS click the Next button f Note display font can be installed from the PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM that Select the checkboxes of the printer drivers to be installed If you are installing multiple printer drivers select accompanied the PS3 expansion kit Page the printer that you wish to use as your default 30 printer If you do not wish to set either printer driver as the default printer select No When the printer name window appears click the Next button If you wish to change the printer name enter the desired name Select whether or not you wish to install the display font and click the Next button 27 SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT USING THE MACHINE AS A SHARED PRINTER VIA A SERVER If the printer server in a Windows NT server environment NetWare server environment or other environment is configured to share the printer the machine follow the steps below to install the printer driver in each clie
479. se agreement and then click the Yes button 9 Select LPR Direct Print and click the Next button Read the message in the Welcome window and then click the Next Printers connected to the network button detected Select the machine and click g Click the Printer Driver button To view information on the software click the Display Readme button the Next button Tom Apa PR pun io o rip pn p T If you wish to directly specify the IP address click the Specify Address button enter the IP 3 address and click the Search button nhe pru ia sum Se iha s rum pertum um A PES PHF ei Pon P anm m i 26 SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT itl A confirmation window appears Check the contents of the window and Check the contents and then click the click the Next button Next button Installation of the printer driver begins If you are using Windows 2000 When the printer driver selection 2003 window appears select the printer If a warning message regarding the driver to be installed and click the Windows logo test or digital signature Next button appears be sure to click the Continue Anyway or Yes button 17 When The installation of the SHARP software is complete appears click the OK button Click the Close button After the installation a mes
480. sensitization Negative Ames Test In 1996 the IARC reevaluated carbon black as a Group 2B carcinogen possible human carcinogen This classification is given to chemicals for which there is inadequate human evidence but sufficient animal evidence on which to base an opinion of carcinogenicity The classification is based upon the development of lung tumors in rats receiving chronic inhalation exposures to free carbon black at levels that induce particle overload of the lung Studies performed in animal models other than rats did not show any association between carbon black and lung tumors Moreover a two year cancer bioassay using a typical toner preparation containing carbon black demonstrated no association between toner exposure and tumor development in rats 81 SHARP MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET Page 4 4 Date Issued Jun 1 2003 MSDS No F 31211 Chronic Effect In a study in rats of chronic inhalation exposure to a typical toner a mild to moderate degree of lung fibrosis was observed in 92 of the rats in the high concentration 16mg m exposure group and a minimal to mild degree of fibrosis was noted in 22 of the animals in the middle 4mg m exposure group but no pulmonary change was reported in the lowest 1mg m exposure group the most relevant level to potential human exposures 12 ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION No data are available 13 DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS Waste from Residues Waste material may be
481. sh to use as your default printer If you do not wish to set either printer driver as the default printer select No 25 SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT CUSTOM INSTALLATION If you wish to install the display font or specify the machine s IP address by direct entry when installing the printer driver select Custom installation If you wish to install the printer status monitor 1 Insert the network expansion kit click the Printer Status Monitor button in this Software CD ROM 1 into your window and follow the on screen instructions computer s CD ROM drive If you wish to install the printer administration utility click the Administrator Tools button in 2 this window and then click the Printer Click the start button click My Administration Utility button and follow the g Computer and then double click on screen instructions the CD ROM icon i In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click Click the Next button My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon Click the Custom installation button H Double click the Setup icon 2 2 If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected automatically The SOFTWARE LICENSE window will appear Make sure that you understand the contents of the licen
482. sing this product as a facsimile Please note the following Line connection Be sure to use the provided telephone line cord to connect LINE jack the machine to a telephone line jack Insert one end of the telephone line cord into the LINE jack on the left side of the machine as shown Insert the other end of the telephone line cord into a telephone line jack Insert the plug firmly until you hear a click In some countries an adapter is required to connect the Wall socket For United telephone line cable to the wall telephone socket as shown in the illustration Kingdom Fd Cm 4 j For Australia For New Zealand Power switch Keep the machine power switch turned on at all times Do not turn off the power If the power is turned off the fax function cannot be used Il Emme When the power is off the machine cannot receive faxes Sas Before turning off the power make sure the machine is idle e tf If the power is turned off while the machine is in operation a paper jam may occur If settings are being configured the ASS settings will be cancelled MO 222 Power switch Setting the date and time and programming your sender s name and number Before using the fax function you must set the date and time and program your sender s name and number in the machine This procedure is explained in POINTS TO CHECK AND PROGRAM AFTER INSTALLATION on page 7 of this manual 4 TO US
483. so used to cancel a job 16 7 8 9 This is used to cancel a transmission or programming operation When pressed during a programming operation the operation is canceled and the display returns to the base screen described on page 18 This key is also used to cancel a resolution paper size or special function setting that was selected at the time of transmission MODE SELECT keys step 1 on page 20 Use these keys to change current operation mode SCAN key Press to switch to scan mode The initial screen of scan mode will appear in the display 10 COLOR MODE key page 27 Use this key to select COLOR GRAY or B W for the scanning mode 11 RESOLUTION key page 27 Use this key to select the scanning resolution 12 ADDRESS key page 22 Use this key to search for destination addresses such as e mail address in the address directory HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION 2 3 4 5 6 7 FAX STATUS BACK OK SAC COPY EXPOSURE PAPER ZOOM AUTO OUTPUT DUPLEX y p J j SCAN J COLOR MODE RESOLUTION ADDRESS FORMAT ORIGINAL SIZE DUPLEX SCA FAX J PROGRAM RESOLUTION ADDRESS BROADCAST ORIGINAL SIZE JUPLEX SCAN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 FORMAT key page 28 17 Arrow keys V 4 When you send an image
484. ss the OK key Press the OK key Return to step 6 To delete another program repeat steps 6 through 8 To exit press the BACK key 73 PROGRAMMING EDITING AND DELETING F CODE MEMORY BOXES The procedure for programming a box for F code transmission is explained here There are three types of F code boxes F code public boxes page 77 F code confidential boxes page 75 and F code relay group boxes page 76 F code boxes are programmed edited and deleted as explained below PROGRAMMING AN F CODE MEMORY BOX A box name sub address passcode and the appropriate functions are programmed in an F code box 2 When programming new F code box sub address that is already programmed in another box cannot be used However the passcode can be the same as a passcode used in another box A passcode can be omitted Up to 10 F code boxes of each type can be programmed If 10 F code boxes of one type have already been programmed a warning message will appear and you will not be able to program a new box Delete any unused F code boxes page 77 and then program the new box In Fax mode press the SPECIAL 5 1 FUNCTION key OK Begin the following procedure from the base screen of When the SPECIAL FUNCTION key is pressed the J function menu screen appears To select fax mode see step 1 on page 18 SPECIAL FUNCTION ORIGINAL STORE Sele
485. stallation of the printer driver f you are using a parallel cable do not 2 select Button Manager This feature is begins complete appears click the OK button Installation of the scanner driver If you wish to install Button Manager begins only when using a USB cable or Sharpdesk click the Utility Software button in step 8 not supported when a parallel cable is SHARP will appear in the Found New used Hardware Wizard dialog box Select Install the When a message appears prompting you software automatically Recommended click the to connect the USB cable click the OK Next button and follow the on screen instructions button For the software that can be installed see INSTALLATION If a warning window appears regarding the ENVIRONMENT AND USEABLE Windows logo test be sure to click the SOFTWARE page 7 Continue Anyway button lick th tton If the dual function board is installed the e Close butto f Note AR XXXX EB printer driver and scanner driver will be installed 2 After the installation a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear In This completes the installation this case click the Yes button to restart If you installed the MFP Driver see CONFIGURING your computer THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to configure the printer driver settings f you installed Button Manager see SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER page 18 to
486. stalled Open to make a copy from the document glass 16 Side cover Open to remove misfed paper 17 Side cover handle Pull to open the side cover 18 Bypass tray guides Adjust to the width of the paper when using the bypass tray 19 Bypass tray Special paper heavy paper or transparency film can be fed from the bypass tray 20 Bypass tray extension Pull out when feeding large paper such as 11 x 17 and 8 1 2 x 14 and B4 21 Toner cartridge lock release lever To replace the toner cartridge pull out the toner cartridge while pushing on this lever 22 Toner cartridge Contains toner 23 Document feeder tray when the SPF is installed Place the original s that you wish to scan face up here Up to 40 sheets can be placed 24 Original guides when the SPF is installed Adjust to the size of the originals 25 Feeding roller cover when the SPF is installed Open to remove misfed originals BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT 31 32 26 Right side cover when the SPF is installed Open to remove misfed originals 27 Fusing unit release levers To remove the paper misfed in the fusing unit push down on these levers and remove the paper The fusing unit is hot Do not touch the fusing unit when removing misfed paper Doing so may cause a burn or injury 28 Roller rotating knob Rotate to remove misfed paper 29 Exit area when the SPF is installed Originals exit
487. sword in Admin click Submit Password The entered password is stored After setting the password turn the machine power off and then back on When establishing a password for the first time enter Sharp in Admin Password B re to enter S in r e 57 When prompted is erter the password a user are case sensitive should enter user in User Name and an administrator should enter admin in User Name The appropriate password should be entered in Password For more information click Help in the upper right hand corner of the window 14 HOW TO USE THE NETWORK SCANNER FUNCTION This chapter explains how to use the network scanner function at the operation panel of the machine after the settings have been configured in the Web page The network scanner function is used to convert paper based information such as a photo or document into image data for transmission over a corporate network intranet or the Internet to an FTP server or computer When transmitting an image using the network scanner function the destination is specified by selecting a previously stored destination at the operation panel There are three methods for transmitting images 1 The scanned image can be sent to a designated directory on an FTP server Scan to FTP 2 The scanned image can be sent to a computer desktop on the network Scan to Desktop 3 The scanned image can be sent to an e mail recip
488. t as the default printer and that the number of trays on the machine and the paper size of each tray are configured in the printer driver 1 Click the start button click Control B Click the Configuration tab and Panel click Printers and Other configure the printer driver based on Hardware and then click Printers the options that have been installed and Faxes Be sure to select the correct printer configuration In Windows 95 98 4 0 2000 click the If not printing may not take place correctly Start button select Settings and then click To automatically configure the settings Printers Note based on the detected machine status click In Windows Server 2003 click the Start button the Auto Configuration button Note that for and then click Printers and Faxes the MFP driver printer driver this is only effective when a USB cable is connected Click the SHARP printer driver icon and select Set as Default Click the Set Tray Status button and Printer 6 select the size of paper that is loaded in each tray H Click the SHARP AR XXXX printer Select a tray in the Paper source menu and driver icon and select Properties select the size of paper loaded in that tray from from the File menu the Set Paper Size menu If you are using Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Server If the dual function board is not installed be sure 2003 go to step 5 to configure the above Set Tray Status
489. t at a time A destination selected with a Rapid key Speed Dial number or group key is indicated by an icon and a number To clear an entry press the C key Press the OK key then dial the fax number of the next destination or press an auto dial key After entering a full number with the numeric keys press the OK key to complete the entry If you pressed an auto dial key in step 13 it is not necessary to press the OK key You can immediately press another auto dial key for the next destination Repeat steps 13 and 14 until all destinations have been entered Press the START key to end the procedure PROGRAMMING F CODE PUBLIC POLLING MEMORY BOXES This setting is used to program a box to store document data for remote transmission when polled by a machine that supports F Code communication Up to 10 boxes can be programmed To check the contents of a programmed box print the following list PRINT REPORT SUB ADD SET LIST page 81 To program an F code public box follow steps 1 through 6 on page 74 and then follow the steps below 9 Enter name for the F code public box see ENTERING CHARACTERS on page 82 S A M POLL NAME Up to 36 characters can be entered for the name A box name must be entered 1 itl Enter a sub address maximum 20 digits with the numeric keys S
490. t necessary if the software has already been installed and configured USING THE PRINTER UTILITIES STARTING UP THE PRINTER UTILITIES If the Printer Status Monitor or Printer Administration Utility is not running use the following procedure to start the utility When the Printer Administration Utility is first started up the TCP IP settings window appears To monitor the machine on a local network select the Local Subnet Search checkbox Otherwise enter the machine s IP address For more information see the Help file Printer Status Monitor Click the start button point to All Programs Programs in operating systems other than Windows XP Server 2003 and then SHARP Printer Status Monitor Select Printer Status Monitor Printer Administration Utility Click the start button point to Programs Programs in operating systems other than Windows XP Server 2003 and then SHARP Printer Administration Utility Select Printer Administration Utility USING THE PRINTER UTILITIES For information on using the Printer Status Monitor and Printer Administration Utility see the Help files for each The Help files can be viewed as follows Printer Status Monitor Printer Administration Utility Click the start button point to All Programs Programs in operating systems other than Windows XP Server 2003 and then SHARP Printer Status Click the start button point to All Programs Programs in
491. t to 0 the machine will immediately call again after the connection is broken due to the line error If you made a mistake in step 5 move the cursor to the mistake with the lt q or b gt keys and enter the correct number Even if this setting is enabled the machine will not re attempt the call when a fax is sent by manual transmission RING TIMEOUT IN AUTO TX When sending a fax by automatic transmission see Storing transmission jobs memory transmission on page 24 this setting lets you select the amount of time that the machine waits before breaking the connection when the other machine does not answer your machine s call If the other machine does not respond within this set time your machine will automatically break the connection Time selections are 30 SEC 45 SEC and 60 SEC Normally 45 SEC is selected 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select SENDING FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select RING TIMEOUT IN AUTO TX with the V or key and then press the OK key 4 Select the time with the V or A key and then press the OK key Selections for the call time are 30 SEC 45 SEC 60 SEC AUTO COVER SHEET When this setting is enabled a cover page is automatically generated and added to each fax transmission The cover page shows the date time destination name sender s name sender s fax number number
492. t you wish to print with the V or A key REPORT REPORT TIMER LIST MEM POLLING LIST RAPID LIST See the explanation of the lists that can be printed above 1 OK The list is printed or is em stored f the list does not contain any data it will not be printed 81 ENTERING CHARACTERS This section explains how to enter and edit characters for names of rapid dial numbers Speed Dial numbers and group keys as well as account names program names and search characters for the address list CHARACTERS THAT CAN BE ENTERED Characters that can be entered for names The following characters can be entered Up to 36 characters can be entered for a name However up to 18 characters can be entered for a account name or sender s name Upper case alphabet lower case alphabet numbers special characters symbols Characters that can be used for search characters The following characters can be used Up to 10 characters can be entered for search characters Upper case alphabet lower case alphabet numbers special characters Search characters are normally the first 10 characters of the name entered for a destination Search characters are used when storing and using auto dial keys and numbers When a destination name includes a symbol the symbol cannot be stored as a search character Search characters can be edited CH
493. tch to printer mode and then use the A key EELLLILI to select ONLINE Darimi T Ready to print T DATA cope PRINT MOLINE Mus Bal hom SCAN v OFFLINE 7 Pem Cine a Por ton The status of the printer function is indicated by the ONLINE and DATA indicators above the PRINT key ONLINE indicator DATA indicator The machine is online Printing is possible There is print data in memory that has not been printed yet Blinking A print job is being canceled Printing is in progress or data is being received The machine is offline Printing is not possible There is no print data in memory and print data is not being received The machine name that appears in the Printer menu is the name that was entered when AppleTalk settings were configured from the Network Utilities CD ROM Unless the name was changed when configuring the settings it will be SCxxxxxx where xxxxxx is a sequence of characters that varies depending on your machine The Print window varies depending on the operating system version the printer driver version and the application Bg Start the application and open the document that you wish to print H Select Print from the application s File menu 17 PRINTING FROM MACINTOSH B Select print settings Click t to Copies amp v Copies am
494. te Letters and numbers appear in above When you contact your Sharp dealer please tell your dealer what numbers appear The following problems are related to the general operation of the machine and copying Problem Cause and solution The power cord is not plugged into a power outlet Plug the power cord into a grounded outlet The power switch is turned off Turn the power switch The machine is warming up The machine requires about 45 seconds to warm up after the power switch is turned on While the machine is warming up copy settings can The machine does not be selected but copying is not possible Wait until Ready to copy operate appears The front cover or the side cover is not completely closed Close the front cover or the side cover The machine is in auto power shut off mode When auto power shut off mode has activated only mode key indicators are lit all other indicators and the display are off The machine returns to normal operation when any of the mode keys are pressed a print job is received a fax is received or when scanning from a computer is started Except when print hold for the fax function is enabled Power is on but copying is The COPY indicator is off not possible Press the COPY key to set the machine to copy mode An appropriate exposure for the original has not been selected Select a suitable exposure mode wit
495. the Continue Anyway or Yes button If the dual function board is installed the AR Xxxx EB printer driver and scanner driver will be installed This completes the installation After installing the MFP Driver see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER page 42 to configure the printer driver settings After installing Button Manager see SETTING UP BUTTON MANAGER page 18 to set up Button Manager INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE INSTALLATION METHOD 2 Use this procedure to install the software in the following environments 1 The printer is connected by USB cable or parallel cable 2 Windows version Windows XP Note To install this software you must have administrator s rights Custom installation Installation methods 2 through 4 are for custom installations of the software If the machine is used as a shared printer via a server or is connected by a parallel cable and you only wish to install required software components select Custom installation Make sure that the USB or parallel 7 Click the Custom button cable is not connected to the machine and your computer If the cable is connected a Plug and Play window will appear If this happens click the Cancel button to close the window and disconnect the cable Note cable will be connected step 14 eme Insert the Software CD ROM 1 that E pene e ER AGREE SIENTO S accompan
496. the Properties screen click the 2 Note checkboxes for the other applications and Events tab leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected B Select SC1 from the Scanner events pull down menu 7 Click the Apply button AX imei d icm P Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to link Button Manager to SC2 through SC6 es poser Select SC2 from the Scanner events Run pull down menu Select Sharp Button Manager G Send to this application and click the Apply button Do the same for each scan destination through SC6 I iinis min When the settings have been completed click the OK button to close the screen f Note In Windows 2000 restart your computer Button Manager is now linked to the machine scan destinations SC1 to SC6 The scan settings for each of scan destinations SC1 through SC6 can be changed in the setting window of Button Manager For the default settings for destinations SC1 to SC6 and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings see Scanning from the Operation Panel of the Machine and Button Manager Settings in Operation Manual for printer and scanner in the Software CD ROM 1 that accompanies the machine 19 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE FOR OPTIONS INSTALLATION FOR A NETWORK CONNECTION The procedures for installing the software when the machine is use
497. the machine here after copying scanning when the SPF is used 30 Reversing tray when the RSPF is installed Pull out to remove misfed originals 81 Photoconductive drum Images are formed on the photoconductive drum Do not touch the photoconductive drum green portion when removing the misfed paper Doing so may damage the drum and cause smudges on copies 32 Fusing unit paper guide Open to remove misfed paper The model name is on the front cover of the f Note machine 13 BEFORE USING THE PRODUCT OPERATION PANEL 1 2 3 4 14 1 2 3 4 SPEAKER XYZ SP REDIAUPAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING SHIFT SYMBOL SPACE 12 Keys for fax function when the fax option is installed These are used in fax mode For more information see the Operation manual for facsimile that accompanies the optional facsimile expansion kit COPY key indicator Press to select copy mode If pressed when Ready to copy appears or during warm up the total number of sheets used page 36 appears while the key is pressed PRINT key indicator Press to select print mode ONLINE indicator Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit DATA indicator This lights steadily when there is a print job in memory that has not been printed
498. ther features that expand the scope of use of the fax machine Please read those sections that are of interest to you CONNECTING AN EXTENSION PHONE You can connect a telephone to the machine and use it as an extension phone to make and receive calls like any normal phone Fax reception can also be activated from an extension phone connected to the machine Remote operation 2 If you connect combination telephone answering machine to the machine you will not be able to use the answering machine function USING AN EXTENSION PHONE Using an extension phone for voice calls An extension phone connected to the machine can be used to place and receive voice calls just like a normal phone f the fax reception mode is set to auto reception you must lift the phone to answer a call before the machine Note automatically begins reception The machine is initially set to answer calls on two rings The number of rings be changed to any number from 0 to 9 in the key operator programs See RINGS AT RX on page 104 f you cannot hear a dial tone when you pick up the extension phone the machine is sending or receiving a fax Replace the phone Activating fax transmission Place the original on document glass or in the SPF adjust the original size resolution and exposure settings as needed and then follow the steps below 1 Lift the extension phone and call the H Select TX with the V or A key receiving pa
499. ting screen and a checkmark will appear to the left of CHAIN DIAL If you pressed the key the checkmark will be removed and chain dialling cancelled B Return to step 13 on page 64 65 PROGRAMMING Transmission speed setting International transmission mode setting To set the transmission speed complete steps 1 To set the international transmission mode complete through 13 on pages 62 to 64 and then follow the steps steps 1 through 13 on pages 62 to 64 and then follow below the steps below Set the transmission speed only when you 2 When sending fax to a foreign country know what speed is most suitable such as telephone line conditions can sometimes when you are sending a fax to a foreign distort the fax or interrupt the transmission country and telephone line conditions are Selecting the right international transmission bad If you do not know the line conditions mode can help alleviate these problems do not change this setting If errors frequently occur when sending a fax to a foreign country try each of modes 1 to 3 and select the mode that enables the best transmission Select TX SPEED with the V or A key y Select INTERNATIONAL TX with the V or A key OTHERS V or A 2O SUB ADDRESS OTHERS QN CHAIN DIAL TX SPEED CHAIN DIAL M START ENTER INTERNATIONAL TX START ENTER Press the OK key Press the OK key OK 5 5
500. tings it will be SCxxxxxx Xxxxxx is Double click the Print Center icon sequence of characters that varies depending on your machine The Printer List window appears If this is the first time you are installing a Click the Printer Model menu and printer driver on your computer a select Other from the list of PPD confirmation message will appear Click the files Add button The PPD file selection window will appear Click the Add Printer button 9 Click the startup disk name and then Library Printers PPDs Contents Resources en Iproj ge and select the PPD file of your model 10 Click the Choose button Em Click the Add button Select AppleTalk in the menu at the f top of the window This completes the configuration of the printer A list of printers connected to the network will driver appear If multiple AppleTalk zones are displayed Note select the zone which includes the printer mot List 37 SETUP MACINTOSH ENVIRONMENT MAC OS 8 6 TO 9 2 2 Select Chooser from the Apple Menu 2 Click the LaserWriter 8 icon The model name of your network connected machine SCxxxxxx appears in the Select a PostScript Printer list on the right The name of the machine that appears is the name that was entered in the AppleTalk settings when the network settings were configured Unless the name was changed when configuring the s
501. tion can be tracked for each account The Acc Usage List page 95 can be printed out which shows the time used for transmission and pages transmitted by each account This function is enabled using ACCOUNT CONTROL and ACCOUNT SET in the key operator programs Page 98 Using auditing mode When auditing mode is turned on the account number entry screen is displayed Enter your account number five digit identification number as explained below before performing a fax operation Enter your account number account M Enter your account number five 2 When you have completed the fax digits with the numeric keys operation press the key Enter your account 5 6 number Bb account 109 As the account number is entered the hyphens change to asterisks X If you enter an incorrect digit press the C key and re enter the correct digit After you enter your account number the base screen of fax mode appears Page 10 f you enter an account number for copy mode has also been programmed for fax mode you can change to fax mode after completing the copy operation and continue with the fax operation without re entering your account number If you enter an account number for copy mode that has not been programmed for fax mode enter your account number for fax mode after you press the FAX key to change to fax mode When ACC SECURITY t
502. tirig ten 95 Auto rcv reduce to regular size 104 Auto roduc TX nen 100 Auto diallinig erret te Rd 16 20 Automatic reduction 12 B Base Screen en adea etic 10 BOX6S RR rennes 48 Broadcast 32 Cancelling IE code pollitig ret tre derent 54 lForwarding teret 47 s PONO ener rettet 37 Trans MSSM e seiis tiniani ai HER 26 Cancelling a fax transmission 26 Cancelling a stored transmission job 27 Clearing document data F code public polling memory boxes 52 Communication activity 88 Communication activity 88 Connecting an extension 60 Goritents E cce e ente c ese dos 2 D Date amp time 2 44 20 12222 99 Date enne pec 7 Direct 4040 23 Disable fax print 100 Document glass eere 13 Dual 22 22 411 43 Duplex 105 Earlier 28 1
503. to allow unfixed toner on the misfed paper to soil your hands or clothes TROUBLESHOOTING AND MAINTENANCE Misfeed in C Lower 1 in the illustration open the H Close the side cover fusing unit paper guide and remove the misfed paper The message Clear paper Be careful not to tear the misfed path will be cleared and pr paper during removal copying will be possible When closing the side cover hold the The fusing unit is hot Do not touch handle the fusing unit when removing f the paper was torn make sure that no misfed paper Doing so may cause a torn pieces remain in the machine HA f the message does not clear check burn or injury again to make sure that no pieces of paper remain 2 If the misfed paper cannot be removed by the previous step remove it from the paper output area SL Be careful not to tear the misfed SSS paper during removal eS MISFEED IN TRAY 1 Note Make sure that there is no misfed paper in the tray before pulling it out Page 31 1 Pull out tray 1 and remove the misfed Gently push tray 1 into the machine paper H Be careful not to tear the misfed Push the tray in completely paper during removal 2 Open and close the side cover The message A Clear paper path will be cleared and copying will be possible e When closing the side cover hold the Note handle f the message does not clear check again to make sure that
504. to memory and stored as a transmission job This is called memory transmission the destination is automatically called and the document transmitted after previously stored jobs are completed If scanning is completed normally the following screen is appears briefly and then the display returns to the base screen READ END QMEMORY AUTO STANDARD STANDARD Scanning begins H If you have another page to scan change pages and then press the START key STANDARD Repeat this sequence until all pages have been scanned You can change the resolution and exposure settings as needed for each page 15 If no action is taken for one minute the START key is not pressed scanning automatically ends and the transmission job is stored This function can be disabled in the key operator programs After the last page is scanned press the READ END key 8 Open the SPF and remove the original When the original is removed or any key operation is performed the display returns to the base screen The destination is automatically called and the document transmitted after any previously stored jobs are completed To cancel transmission f Note To cancel transmission while READING appears or before the key is pressed press the C or CA key To cancel a transmission job that is already stored press the FAX STATUS key and cancel the job as explained on page 2
505. to select copy mode ROTATING THE IMAGE 90 DEGREES Rotation copy When Auto paper select mode or automatic ratio selection are in operation and the original is placed in a different orientation vertical or horizontal from the paper the original image will be automatically rotated 90 degrees to enable correct copying onto the paper This function is convenient for copying 8 1 2 x 14 or 11 x 17 B4 or originals which can only be placed horizontally onto paper that is loaded vertically The rotation copy function is initially enabled It can be disabled in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide The rotation copy function cannot be used in combination with the margin shift function Rotation copy will not operate when copy is enlarged to a paper size greater than 8 1 2 x 11 4 In this case place the original in the same orientation as the paper Even if rotation copy is disabled in the key operator programs rotation copy will function when the 2 in 1 or 4 in 1 function is selected page 66 mS 9E Orientation of Orientation of Copy the original the original SORT MODE Copies of multiple original pages can collated into sets 2 The dual function board can scan approximately 100 standard originals 8 1 2 x 11 4 however the number will vary for photos and other types of originals Sort
506. to your computer with a USB or parallel cable Network Utilities CD ROM that accompanies the network expansion kit This CD ROM contains utilities required when using the machine as a printer in a Macintosh environment PSC Setup Utility This is a utility that lets you configure the machine s network settings from a Macintosh Online Manual This manual in PDF format explains how to use the Network Utilities CD ROM CONTENTS INTRODUCTION m X 1 SOFTWARE LIGENSE 1 Q9 ABOUT THE GD ROMS nre Cu peii eed 2 BEFORE INSTALLATION 2 e anh saci ceca ua rna saa ON ION da dada 7 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE 00 0 7 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT AND USEABLE SOFTWARE 2 000 01 000000000 7 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE 655i sana aucun na aa na ausu na cans in at Ya cd Sk naa saca aa ERR KRFaRR ER aR EE aUa Ta HA He cna NER 7 INSTALLATION USING THE INSTALLER riin 7 INSTALLATION METEQOD T1 a nnne o EE eee 8 e INSTALLATION METHOD 2 diente ni Eee t tete dii iae da boo ees dere Re dd 10 INSTALLATION METHOD S rec ee eitis e fe
507. ttings on the printer server fil When the model selection window appears select model name of your machine and click the Next button When the printer driver selection window appears select the printer driver to be installed and click the Next button Be sure to select the same printer driver as that of the shared printer the machine map imam Es US no Riad a Fi derer tar decia Pas eorum mam m FR ie ave 29 SETUP IN WINDOWS ENVIRONMENT INSTALLING THE PS DISPLAY FONTS The fonts used by the PS printer driver are contained in the PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM that accompanied the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N Install these fonts as needed for the PS printer driver Insert the PS3 expansion kit AR PK1 N PRINTER UTILITIES CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive If your computer is configured for CD ROM auto start the installation window appears Go to step 4 Bg Click the start button click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon i In Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 double click My Computer and then double click the CD ROM icon H Double click the Setup icon 2 If the language selection screen appears after you double click the Setup icon select the language that you wish to use and click the Next button Normally the correct language is selected automatically Select
508. tup This installs and launches which enables administration and configuration of advanced print server settings Online Manual This manual in PDF format explains how to use the Network Utilities CD ROM 3 gt Sharpdesk CD ROM Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage document and image files and launch applications For information on the Sharpdesk CD ROM and how to install Sharpdesk see the Sharpdesk installation guide that accompanies the machine Sharpdesk Desktop Document Management Software Sharpdesk is used to manage images scanned from the machine and files created in various software programs Network Scanner Tool This is a utility that helps you use Scan to Desktop The utility allows you to configure settings to receive scanned images from the machine to your computer You can have Sharpdesk launch automatically when your computer receives a scanned image from the machine SHARP TWAIN AR DM This is used to acquire black and white images from a TWAIN interface into TWAIN compliant software applications OmniPage Pro Trial ScanSoft inc This is used to scan text printed on paper and convert the image data into text data by means of OCR Optical Character Recognition Software CD ROM 2 This CD ROM contains a minimal version of Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 For the installation procedure double click Readme txt in the root folder of the
509. ue from step 6 of BASIC 7 PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES STANDARD page 19 If an original has been placed scanning of the The name programmed for the destination can be original will begin automatically without the need displayed by pressing the Rapid key to press the START key in step 6 on page 19 SENDING A FAX BY SPEED DIALLING In addition to Rapid dialling and group dialling you can also send a fax by pressing the SPEED key and entering a 3 digit Speed Dial number Follow the steps below to send a fax by Speed Dialling The 3 digit Speed Dial number is entered with the numeric keys when programmed See STORING EDITING AND DELETING AUTO DIAL NUMBERS AND PROGRAMS on page 62 1 Perform steps 1 to 4 of BASIC H Enter the 3 digit Speed Dial number PROCEDURE FOR SENDING FAXES with numeric keys page 18 Enter the 3 digit Speed Dial 2 number entered when the Speed Dial number was 2 Press the SPEED key programmed See step 7 of Storing Rapid keys and Enter SPEED Speed Dial numbers on page w XYZ SP 63 REDIALPAUSE SPEED COMM SETTING 000 299 f you make a mistake press the C key and then dk SHEET RMEMORY amp AUTO enter the correct number If you enter a 3 digit number that is not programmed in the machine STANDARD press the C key and then enter the correct number The Speed Dial number If you do not know the Speed Dial number print out
510. unction board is installed appears in the name of the installed printer driver Furthermore the printer driver for the dual function board enables a faster printing speed Scanner driver The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with TWAIN compliant and WIA compliant applications Button Manager Button Manager is a software utility that allows you to use the SCAN key on the machine to scan a document Acrobat Reader 5 0 This program is used to view the online manuals on your computer screen Sharpdesk Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage document and image files and launch applications Online Manual This is a manual in PDF format that is viewed using Adobe Acrobat Reader To view the online manual Operation Manual for printer and scanner on the CD ROM specify the following path Note that R represents the letter of your CD ROM drive R Manual EnglishA AR_161_162_163 pdf English A in North America English in Europe The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are running Windows 98 Me 2000 XP and are connected to the machine by a USB cable If you are running Windows 95 NT 4 0 or are connected by a parallel cable only printing is available Software CD ROM 2 This CD ROM contains a minimal version of Internet Explorer 6 0 SP1 For the installation procedure double click Readme txt in the root folder of the Softwa
511. utomatically E SOFTWARE LICENSE window will appear Make sure that you understand the contents of the license agreement and then click the Yes button INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MACHINE 8 When the Finish screen appears click the Close button When Now connect the MFP interface cable to the PC appears click the OK button If you using Windows 2000 If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears be sure to click the Continue Anyway or Yes button After the installation a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear If this message appears click the Yes button to restart your computer Jg Connect the machine to your computer with the USB cable Page 44 Make sure that the machine is powered on The machine is found and a plug and play window appears Follow the on screen instructions elf the following message appears on your computer screen close it o LA IT IT Sp eee 4 I a rna window regarding HI SPEED USB Device will then appear Close the window This message appears when the machine s USB 2 0 mode is not set to Hi Speed For information on switching the USB 2 0 mode see the Key operator s guide If you are using Windows 2000 If a warning message regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature appears be sure to click
512. ved data print condition is set to division the image may be clipped If auto receive reduce is disabled an image larger than the standard size will be cut off However the image will be clearer because it will be printed at the same size as the original DUPLEX RECEPTION Only on models with the two sided printing function This setting is used to select whether or not received faxes are printed on both sides of the paper When two sided printing is enabled and a fax that is two pages or longer is received the pages must be the same size the fax will be printed on both sides of the paper 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCTION with the V or A key and then press the OK key 3 Select DUPLEX RECEPTION with the V or key and then press the OK key The setting is enabled two sided printing will take place and a checkmark appears in the checkbox If the procedure is performed when the setting is enabled the checkmark will be cleared and the setting disabled 8 1 2x11 RX REDUCE This setting is used to select whether received 8 1 2 x 11 faxes are reduced When an 8 1 2 x 11 R fax is received part of the document is normally cut off This setting can be turned on to have 8 1 2 x 11 R faxes reduced to fit on A4R paper The setting is initially turned off 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 of INITIAL PROCEDURE page 94 2 Select RCV FUNCT
513. w an explanation of the restriction 1 2 3 4 5 6 SHARE Priming Pralurarici 1 2 3 Tab The settings are grouped on tabs Click on a tab to bring it to the front Checkbox Click on a checkbox to activate or deactivate a function Print image This shows the effect of the selected print settings Drop down list Allows you to make a selection from a list of choices Check button Allows you to select one item from a list of options Image of paper trays The tray selected in Paper Source in the Paper tab appears in blue You can also click on a tray to select it ised E eut 7 OK button Click this button to save your settings and exit the dialog box 8 Cancel button Click this button to exit the dialog box without making any changes to the settings 9 Apply button Click to save your settings without closing the dialog box 2 Windows NT 4 0 does not have the Apply button The Apply button does not appear when you open this window from an application 10 Help button Click this button to display the help file for the printer driver The settings and the image of the machine will vary depending on the model If a tray or job separator tray option is installed see CONFIGURING THE PRINTER DRIVER in 3 TROUBLESHOOTING AND USEFUL INFORMATION in the Software setup guide to con
514. warranty protection Sharp extends a limited warranty to each of its authorized dealers and in turn requires each of its authorized dealers to extend its own warranty to you on terms that are no less favorable than those given to the dealer by Sharp You should be aware however that Sharp does not itself extend any warranties either express or implied directly to you the end user and no one is authorized to make any representations or warranties on behalf of Sharp Specifically SHARP DOES NOT EXTEND TO YOU THE END USER ANY EX PRESS WARRANTY OR ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILIT Y FITNESS FOR USE OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE IN CON NECTION WITH THE HARDWARE SOFTWARE OR FIRMWARE EMBODIED IN OR USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS PRODUCT Sharp is not respon sible for any damages or loss either direct incidental or consequential which you the end user may experience as a result of your purchase or use of the hardware software or firmware embodied in or used in conjunction with this Product Your sole remedy in the event that you encounter any difficulties with this Product is against the authorized dealer from which you purchased the Product AR M162 Digital Multifunctional System AR M207 Digital Multifunctional System In the event that this authorized dealer does not honor its warranty commitments please contact the General Manager Business Products Group Sharp Electronics Corporation Sharp Plaza Mahwah NJ 07430 1163
515. wer outlet which is not used for other electric appliances If a lighting fixture is connected to the same outlet the light may flicker 3 Do not install your machine in areas that are i 8 20 damp humid or very dusty exposed to direct sunlight poorly ventilated subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes e g near an air conditioner or heater 4 Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation pn d 20 cm A small amount of ozone is produced within the printer during operation The emission level is insufficient to cause any health hazard NOTE The present recommended long term exposure limit for ozone is 0 1 ppm 0 2 mg m3 calculated an 8 hr time weighted average concentration However since the small amount that is emitted may have an objectionable odor it is advisable to place the copier in a ventilated area ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION As an ENERGY STAR Partner SHARP has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency The Environmental Choice Program guidelines are applied to the products only in Canada The products that meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines carry the logo shown to the left The products without the logo may not meet the Environmental Choice Program guidelines USB 2 0 compatible dua
516. wn the status button on the network expansion kit for at least 2 seconds to print out a Printer Setting List Status button HOW TO RESET THE NETWORK EXPANSION KIT To reset the network expansion kit power on the machine while holding down the status button on the network expansion kit After the network expansion kit is reset network scanner destination information and scan settings will remain however the network settings and network printer settings will revert to the factory default settings HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Before installing the software from the CD ROM that is provided standard with the machine or the CD ROM that is provided with the optional network expansion kit AR NB3 make sure that your computer satisfies the following requirements Windows standard 2 machine system Windows options Macintosh options Operating system Windows 95 2 3 Windows 98 Windows Mac OS 8 6 to 9 2 2 Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Service Pack 5 or later 3 4 10 1 5 10 2 to 10 2 8 Windows 2000 Professional 4 Windows XP Professional 4 excluding 10 2 2 Windows XP Home Edition 4 Windows 2000 Server 10 3 to 10 3 4 Windows Server 2003 5 Computer type IBM PC AT compatible computer Equipped with a An environment on ris da 10 100 LAN Which any of the bi directional parallel port board operating syste
517. ws XP and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S A and other countries and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Acrobat Reader Copyright O 1987 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners The display screens messages and key names shown in the manual may differ from those on the actual machine due to product improvements and modifications CONTENTS 1 BASIC PRINTING 3 e IF THE TRAY RUNS OUT OF PAPER DURING PRINT IIO 4 PAUSING A PRINT 4 WHEN PAPER SOURCE IS SET TO AUTO BELEGT 4 HOW BYPASS TRAY AND BYPASS MANUAL DIFFER IN THE PAPER SOURCE SETTINGS istituti RU QUIA 4 OPENING THE PRINTER DRIVER FROM THE START BUTTON 5 PRINTER DRIVER SETTINGS 6 TWO SIDED PRINTING ONLY FOR MODELS THAT SUPPORT TWO SIDED PRINTING 7 PRINTING MULTIPLE PAGES ON ONE PAGE
518. x 17 8 1 2 x 14 8 1 2 x 11 8 1 2 x 11 R 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 R Scanning is possible at the maximum resolution 600 dpi DISPLAY MESSAGES 4 If a transmission error occurs when you send scanned image a message informing you of the error and an error code will appear in the display on the machine Error Code Solution Turn off the power and then turn it back on Consult with your network administrator to CE 00 CE 01 make sure that no problems exist on the network or in the server If the error is not cleared after turning the power off and on turn off the power and contact your dealer The scanned image was not sent because a connection to the server could not be established Make sure that the SMTP server settings or Scan to FTP destination settings in the Web page are correct The procedure for configuring the SMTP server is explained in VARIOUS SERVER SETTINGS and the procedure for editing Scan to FTP destination information is explained in Editing and deleting programmed transmission destinations For information on the settings to be entered see Help in the Web page The scanned image was not sent because the server was busy or there was too much traffic on line Wait briefly and then try again The scanned image was not sent because the directory of the destination FTP server was not correct Make sure that
519. x option is installed be sure to keep the power turned on Faxes cannot be received when the power is turned off The machine is set at the factory to return all settings to the default settings one minute after a copy job is finished auto clear function When the settings return to the default settings any functions that were selected are canceled The auto clear time can be changed in the key operator programs See the Key operator s guide Power save modes The machine has two power save modes to reduce power consumption thereby helping to reduce environmental pollution and conserve resources Preheat mode This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the duration of time set in the key operator programs elapses without the machine being used when the power is on In preheat mode the display turns off Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed an original is placed or a print job or fax is received Auto power shut off mode This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the duration of time set in the key operator programs elapses without the machine being used when the power is on During auto power shut off only the mode key indicators are lit To restore the machine to normal operation press any one of the mode keys Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job or fax
520. y is pressed When an original is being scanned this key can also be used to cancel scanning 9 8 9 10 11 12 13 10 11 12 13 14 15 CA key This is used to cancel a transmission or programming operation When pressed during an operation the operation is cancelled and the display returns to the base screen described on page 10 This key is also used to cancel a resolution paper size or special function setting that was selected when sending a fax SPEAKER SHIFT key pages 16 82 This is used to dial without lifting an extension phone connected to the machine and to shift between upper and lower case when entering characters REDIAL PAUSE key pages 16 18 This is used to redial the last number dialled and enter a pause when entering a fax number SPEED SYMBOL key pages 16 84 This is used to dial by Speed dialling and to enter a symbol when entering characters COMM SETTING SPACE key page 23 This is used to switch between memory transmission and direct transmission and to Switch between automatic reception and manual reception It is also used to enter a space or when entering characters LINE STATUS indicator This blinks to alert you when a fax is received FAX RECEPTION LIGHT page 103 in the key operator programs can be used to set the blinking timing to one of two patterns or to turn blinking off BEFORE USING THE FAX FUNCT

Sharp AR-M207 Owner's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents